Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 370

2012

Bahrain Institute of Banking and Finance

T raining and development catalogue

www.bibf.com

His Royal Highness, Prince Khalifa bin Salman Al Khalifa, The Prime Minister of the Kingdom of Bahrain

His Majesty, King Hamad bin Isa Al Khalifa, the King of the Kingdom of Bahrain

His Royal Highness Prince Salman bin Hamad Al Khalifa, The Crown Prince & Deputy Supreme Commander of the Kingdom of Bahrain

General Information

Vision
BIBF is the Institute of choice for the development of business professionals

Mission
Leadership through providing ongoing education for business professionals

Values
At the heart of our organisational culture are our values. Our values define the way we interact every day at BIBF. We call it PRIDE in our performance.

Principled
We are all responsible for open, honest and direct two way communication. We tell it like it is, give and receive honest feedback and listen carefully. All our interactions have an outcomes focus and we operate with the utmost integrity in our interaction with business, staff and other stakeholders.

Respect builds success


At BIBF we engage and support each other and capitalise on the expertise and talents within the organisation. Everyone makes a significant contribution and delivers on the communication we make.

Improve and innovate


To grow with business, we must anticipate and lead change. We switch in to new ideas and possibilities and look for improvements in all activities across our business.

Deliver to succeed together


We succeed when our stakeholders succeed. We develop and deliver the highest value and quality tools and solutions to equip business and other stakeholders for personal and business success. We can only achieve this though partnering together across the business and seeking successful outcomes.

Expect the Best


We set our standards high and expect the best results across all operations. We recruit and develop the best and strive to be the best in all our markets. We set stretch goals and celebrate our achievements.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

continued ..... General Information


MEMBERS OF THE SPECIFIC COUNCIL FOR VOCATIONAL TRAINING (BANKING SECTOR)

H.E. Rasheed Mohammed Al Maraj Mr. Murad Ali Murad Governor Chairman Central Bank of Bahrain Bank of Bahrain & Kuwait

Mr. Adnan Yousef Mr. Yassir Al Baharna Chief Executive Officer Chief Executive Officer Albaraka Islamic Bank Arab Insurance Group

Mr. Jean-Christophe Durand Mr. Jonathan Morris Head of Territory Chief Executive Officer BNP Paribas Standard Chartered

Mr. Ashraf Bseisu Mr. Redha Ahmed Hubail Chief Executive Officer Assistant Undersecretary for Training Solidarity Group Ministry of Labour

Mr. Ibrahim Al Qassab Mr. Garry Muriwai Chairman of Bankers Union Director General Federation for BIBF Bahrain Workers

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

continued ..... General Information


BIBFS PARTNERSHIPS AND AFFILIATIONS BIBF is proud to have both domestic and international partnerships in place. Many have been with BIBF for a number of years reinforcing the value of such relationships for BIBF, the partners and ultimately the students. BIBFs approach is to have best in class across multiple disciplines. All BIBFs strategic relationships and affiliations are integrated into its training and development solutions to ensure that benchmark practices around the globe are an integral part of its approach to performance and delivery. Partners ACI, France, The Financial Markets Association American Institute for Chartered Property Casualty Underwriters Affiliations Central Bank of Bahrain Accounting and Auditing Organization for Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI) Bahrain Association of Chartered Certified Accountants Bahrain Economic Development Board Business Continuity Institute (UK) Bahrain Management Society Chartered Institute of Management Accountants Federal Reserve System, USA Financial Services Volunteer Corps, USA Human Resources Development Fund Institute of Chartered Accountants of India Institute for Global Insurance Education Islamic Finance Information Service

Ministry of Commerce Association of Certified Anti-Money Laundering Specialists (ACAMS) Ministry of Education BPP Learning Media Standard and Poors BPP ICDL GCC Foundation Chartered Insurance Institute (CII) Chartered Management Institute Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development Darden School of Business, University of Virginia, USA DePaul University, USA Edexcel, UK Institute of Banking, SA US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), USA

USERS OF BIBF BIBFs participants come from different corners of the world. In the last year countries include Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kuwait, Libya, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, and United Arab Emirates. REGISTRATION PROCEDURES

Registration Institute of Chartered Accountants in England Course selection by a participant or a training and Wales manager/coordinator should only happen after Institute of Internal Auditors Ministry of Labour Morgan International Newcastle University, UK Professional Risk Managers International Association (PRMIA) SHL Partner Tamkeen The CFA Institute, USA The Chartered Institute of Marketing University of Cambridge International Examinations, UK University of Wales WAQF International Compliance Association ensuring that the course syllabus matches with the training requirements and that the participant satisfies the set pre-requisites (where applicable). The institute holds the right to reject / cancel the registration of a participant that does not meet the pre-requisites after notifying the participant/ organisation of the same. All complete registration requests are to be sent to the following email address: registrar@bibf.com Member Institutions A registration confirmation letter will be sent to all approved enrolments based on seat availability. As the time of the selected course comes near, reminders will be sent to ensure that the participant is aware that the date of the selected course is approaching.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

10

continued ..... General Information


Non-Member Institutions Non-member institutions will receive a notification verifying the receipt of the registration request accompanied with a quotation. A confirmation of registration will be sent once all amounts due are paid, which is vital to be settled prior to the commencement of the selected course. As the time of the selected course comes near, reminders will be sent to ensure that the participant is aware that the date of their course is approaching. Reminders Prior to course commencement, two reminders will be sent to ensure that the participant is aware of the course start date. The first reminder will be sent one month prior to the start date of the course and the second reminder will be sent one week prior to the start date of the course. Methods of payment: Course fees can be paid by the following methods: Cash Cheque payable to BIBF Credit Card Bank Transfer Course Procedures The institute offers courses on the basis that there will be sufficient participants to justify running the course or else the course will be cancelled. In other instances, where unexpected and unavoidable circumstances arise, the institute will be obliged to modify the dates of the course. This will be communicated to the participant two weeks prior to the start date of the course to minimise any inconvenience that may be caused. The institutes liability in the event of any modification or cancellation will be limited to cover the full paid course fees. Registration Cancellation In the case of cancellation by a participant, the Institute requires a written notice of cancellation not less than two weeks prior to the commencement of the course. For fees bearing courses, the Institute requires a written notice of cancellation attached with the original receipt to be submitted not less than two weeks prior to the commencement of the course to enable the institute to refund the full paid fees. Otherwise, course fees already paid or invoiced may not be refunded and invoices will be due and payable. The institute will permit the nomination of substitute participants.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Participant Punctuality On the first day of a course, any participant attending later than 30 minutes from the stated start time will be marked as a No Show and a notification will be sent to the relevant training manager/coordinator informing them. In the case of a highly demanded course, the participants seat will be offered to individuals on the waiting list if no prior arrangements and notifications are provided informing us of their late arrival. Further, attendance of each participant is monitored throughout the duration of the course and any deviations will be communicated immediately. Participant Withdrawal Participants should attend the full duration of the course as scheduled and strictly abide with the stated course timings. In the event of a participant attending less than 80% of the total course hours, the participant will be withdrawn from the course, marked as a Drop Out , requested to re-register and a notification will be sent to training manager/ coordinator informing them. For fee bearing courses, the total fees will be charged irrespective of the number of sessions attended. Examinations Participants that meet all course requirements including the minimum 80% attendance policy (where applicable) will be permitted to attend the prescribed course examination. Programme/course rules are available on our website and with relevant centres and information desk staff. Results Examination results are disseminated by the Registrar and are due as per course /programme rules. Results will be emailed to training managers / coordinators. Certificates Certificates of completion will be awarded to candidates who have completed all programme requirements. For examinable courses, the institute will only issue a completion certificate for participants that have successfully passed the prescribed examination. The institute will not issue attendance certificates for courses that are categorised as examinable. All certificates will be mailed to the relevant training manager/coordinator.

11

continued ..... General Information


Enquiries Requests for information should be directed to: The Information Desk P.O. Box 20525 Manama, Kingdom of Bahrain Telephone: (+973) 17815579 or (+973) 17815559 *Fax: (+973) 17729928 E-mail: infodesk@bibf.com QUALITY ASSURANCE The following is a brief summary of the Quality Assurance documents available on BIBF website for student and sponsor organisations information and implementation in the relevant areas. Introduction: Code of Practice in BIBF http:// www.bibf.com.bh/content/quality-assurancecop.htm Overview Approach Scope and principles, a clear definition of responsibilities The competence of staff Monitoring and review of policy, procedures and practices, Use of the Code of practice in audit and review The Code of practice (12 sections). Codes of Practice- Chapter IX Malpractice, Appeals and Student complaints http://www. bibf.com.bh/content/quality-assurance-copchapterIX.htm BIBF student charter http://www.bibf.com.bh/ content/student-charter.htm Introduction Equality of Opportunities Personal Information and Confidentiality Recruitment & Admissions Information on Programme of Study / Training. Training / Teaching and Learning Support The Assessment Process / Collaborative Project / Assignment Plagiarism and Malpractice Student Representation Evaluation of Programmes of Study Complaints and Grievance Procedure Contact information BIBF student handbook http://www.bibf.com. bh/content/student_handbook_index.htm Section 1: Vision, Mission, Core Values, Ethos and History http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/ student_handbook/studenthandbook-section-1.htm Section 2: General Information for Students Registered on Academic and Professional Programmes http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/student_ handbook/studenthandbook-section-2.htm Section 3: Assessment http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/student_ handbook/studenthandbook-section-3.htm Appendix 1: BIBF Generic Assessment Criteria http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/student_ handbook/appendix1.htm Appendix 2: Course work cover sheet http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/student_ handbook/docs/SH-A2-CourseworkCoverSheet.doc Appendix 3: Mitigating Circumstances claim form http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/ student_handbook/docs/SH-A3MitigatingCircumstancesClaimForm.doc Appendix 4: Plagiarism guideline http://www. bibf.com.bh/content/student_handbook/appendix4. htm Appendix 5: Student code of conduct in Examinations http://www.bibf.com.bh/content/ student_handbook/appendix5.htm Appendix 6: BIBF Contact Information http:// www.bibf.com.bh/content/student_handbook/ appendix6.htm

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

12

continued ..... General Information


SPECIAL SERVICES Library The BIBF library collection consists of books and periodicals both in Arabic and English Approximately 3050 books on a variety of subjects (Banking, Accountancy, Economics, Information Technology, Finance, Management, Islamic Finance, Insurance, Risk Management, English, and Marketing) Approximately 210 training videos Approximately 50 periodicals on Banking & Finance Internet access via three user workstations 8 daily local newspapers Membership Banking Sector employees Insurance Sector employees University of Wales students Non levy participants can also subscribe at a yearly fee of BD20/Library Timing Sunday to Thursday: from 7 am to 2.30 pm and from 5 pm - 8.30 pm Use of Rooms and Equipment The Institute offers its training rooms (when available) and equipment for use by the member institutions for their own seminars and meetings to be held at the Institute. A nominal fee will be charged to cover all incurred costs. For more details, please send a written request to fadheela@bibf.com Visa Procedures If you require Institute assistance in obtaining an entry visa to the Kingdom of Bahrain, please e-mail our Information Desk infodesk@bibf.com or fax (+973 1772 9928). A clear copy of your passport at least one month prior to the course commencement date is required. Visa costs will be charged to the participant. Accommodation If you require Institute assistance in arranging your accommodation, please e-mail our Information Desk infodesk@bibf.com or fax (+973 1772 9928) for assistance Hotel accommodation costs are the participants own responsibility.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

13

continued ..... General Information


USEFUL INFORMATION FOR PARTICIPANTS Location

Reception On the first day of the course, participants should proceed to the Reception Area at the ground floor to register for the course at least 15 minutes before the course starts Office Hours Sunday Thursday 7.00 am 2.30 pm

Cafeteria The Cafeteria is located on the first floor Mobile Telephone and Beepers To avoid disturbances during training, we require that participants TURN-OFF mobile telephones or beepers while in training rooms Smoking Smoking is NOT permitted inside BIBF premises Dress Code and Personal Conduct The BIBF is a professional institute and wishes to maintain such standards throughout its programmes. Participants attending courses at BIBF are to behave accordingly. Those who attend classes dressed in inappropriate attire (jeans, T-shirts, shorts etc) will be requested to leave the premises and return suitably clothed.

Reception and Information Desk Sunday Thursday 7.00 am 9.00 pm Saturday 7.00 am 9.00 pm Parking Ample-parking space is available for participants adjacent to the BIBF premises Breaks There are two short breaks during each course Prayer Room Mens Prayer Room is located on the ground floor Ladies Prayer Room is located on the first floor

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

14

continued ..... General Information

KEY CONTACTS
DIRECTORS OFFICE Garry Muriwai Ebtisam A. Saad Farayi Patrick Chikwanda Director Executive Assistant Internal Auditor HUMAN RESOURCES Hussain Ismail Hassan Abbas Miriam Rasool Deputy Director HR Officer HR Assistant +973 1781 5544 +973 1781 5557 +973 1781 5554 hismail@bibf.com hgabbas@bibf.com miriam@bibf.com +973 1781 5501 +973 1781 5501 +973 1781 5576 ebtisam@bibf.com farayi@bibf.com

OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT Khalid Al Medfaie Fadheela Al Sharaf Noora Buhazza Dana Kamal Marwa Ahmed Allan Mauleon Hassan Khamis Hussain Askari George Epen Kakkarattu Kunnummal Rajan Mohammed Abdulkhaliq Nawal Saif Sarah Saade Afnan Ali Sahwan Ahmed Al Alawi Dana Kamal Farooq Abdul Qader Muqtada Al Oraibi Bader Al Ameer Mohammed Taqi Nasser Al Khayat Abdul Mutaleb Abdulla Head of Operations Operations Officer Librarian Administrative Assistant Administration Assistant IT Support Supervisor, General Services Office Assistant Office Assistant Office Assistant Office Assistant Registrar Assistant Registrar Administrative Assistant Administrative Assistant Administrative Assistant Administrative Assistant Administrative Assistant Information Desk Attendant Information Desk Attendant Information Desk Attendant Receptionist +973 1781 5518 +973 1781 5537 +973 1781 5534 +973 1781 5606 +973 1781 5536 +973 1781 5552 +973 1781 5511 +973 1781 5514 +973 1781 5514 +973 1781 5514 +973 1781 5514 +973 1781 5581 +973 1781 5550 +973 1781 5595 +973 1781 5589 +973 1781 5606 +973 1781 5528 +973 1781 5502 +973 1781 5555 +973 1781 5555 +973 1781 5555 +973 1781 5514 nsaif@bibf.com ssaade@bibf.com afnan@bibf.com alalawi@bibf.com dana@bibf.com farooq@bibf.com muqtada@bibf.com alameer@bibf.com m.taqi@bibf.com nasser@bibf.com aali@bibf.com kalmedfaie@bibf.com fadheela@bibf.com library@bibf.com dana@bibf.com marwa@bibf.com amauleoun@bibf.com hak@bibf.com haskari@bibf.com

CENTRE FOR ACADEMIC AND EXECUTIVE LEARNING Dr Mohammed Al Khozai Zahra Tabbara Waseem Mirza Lameea Mohammed Parwin Haji
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Head of Centre: Academic & Executive Academic & Executive Coordinator Academic Coordinator/Lecturer Administration Coordinator Administration Coordinator

+973 1781 5522 +973 1781 5509 +973 1781 5592 +973 1781 5523 +973 1781 5524

malkhozai@bibf.com ztabbara@bibf.com academic@bibf.com wasseem@bibf.com lameea@bibf.com phaji@bibf.com

15

continued ..... General Information

CENTRE FOR ACCOUNTING AND IT Namasiku Liandu Khulood Al Thaqafi Syed Amir Zahid Hafiz Qaisar Raza Khan Naheel Al-Lababidi Yousif Faraj Mahmood Abdulla Najma Ghuloom Nedhal Al-Faraj Head of Centre: Accounting and IT Administration Coordinator Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer / Business Development Manager Lecturer +973 1781 5512 +973 1781 5521 +973 1781 5570 +973 1781 5561 +973 1781 5535 +973 1781 5516 +973 1781 5580 +973 1781 5562 +973 1781 5551 ndliandu@bibf.com khulood@bibf.com amir@bibf.com hafiz@bibf.com naheel@bibf.com yousiffaraj@bibf.com mahmood@bibf.com najma@bibf.com nalfaraj@bibf.com

CENTRE FOR BANKING AND FINANCE Dr Subhadra Ganguli Khulood Al Thaqafi Amani Al Tublani Dr. Jyothi Rao Anuradha Shaw Chithra Suresh Head of Centre: Banking Administration Coordinator Special Projects Coordinator Senior Lecturer Lecturer / Business Development Manager Lecturer +973 1781 5588 +973 1781 5521 +973 1781 5591 +973 1781 5513 +973 1781 5568 +973 1781 5598 CENTRE FOR INSURANCE Husain Al Ajmi Mahesh B. J. Prabhu Mohamed Alshamlawi Wafa Al Durazi Zainab Bucheery Yousif Darwish Ali Mohsen Manal Mohammed Mashkoor Mohamed Alshamlawi Dr Mohammad Omar Farooq Sumayya Zainalabedin Dr. Ahmed Assad Mahmoud Alfatih Gessan Nedal El-Ghattis Assistant Director & Head of Centre: Insurance Business Development Manager Administration Assistant Administration Assistant Administration Assistant Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Associate Lecturer Head of Centre: Islamic Finance Administration Coordinator Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer / Business Development Manager Senior Lecturer +973 1781 5566 +973 1781 5586 +973 1781 5605 +973 1781 5542 +973 1781 5564 +973 1781 5567 +973 1781 5587 +973 1781 5574 +973 1781 5605 +973 1781 5530 +973 1781 5584 +973 1781 5520 +973 1781 5539 +973 1781 5525 CENTRE FOR ISLAMIC FINANCE mfarooq@bibf.com sumayazain@bibf.com asad@bibf.com alfatihgp@bibf.com nedal@bibf.com halajmi@bibf.com mahesh@bibf.com alshamlawi@bibf.com wafa@bibf.com zainab@bibf.com yousifd@bibf.com amohsen@bibf.com manal@bibf.com alshamlawi@bibf.com sganguli@bibf.com khulood@bibf.com amani@bibf.com jgrao@bibf.com ashaw@bibf.com chithra@bibf.com

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

16

continued ..... General Information

CENTRE FOR LEADERSHIP AND MANAGEMENT Kadri Rizk Sana Sarwani Dr. Muneer Mohammed Saeed Dr. Victoria Ghurbal Dr. Vijayalaxmi Moovala Dr. Vivek Kumar Madhavi Tiwary Bader Abbas Al Nasser Naema Al Aali Phillip Mukhwana Amal Al Awadhi Siddika Sabooni Sameera Al Khal Ellen Cubacub Head of Centre: Leadership and Management Administration Coordinator Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer / Business Development Manager Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer Consultant Trainer Assessment & Development Business English Consultant Administration Coordinator Administration Assistant +973 1781 5565 +973 1781 5529 +973 1781 5533 +973 1781 5527 +973 1781 5569 +973 1781 5531 +973 1781 5573 +973 1781 5577 +973 1781 5505 +973 1781 5510 +973 1781 5590 +973 1781 5603 +973 1781 5526 +973 1781 5519 krizk@bibf.com ssarwani@bibf.com muneer@bibf.com vicki@bibf.com vijaya@bibf.com vkumar@bibf.com mtiwary@bibf.com bader@bibf.com nalaali@bibf.com phillip@bibf.com amal@bibf.com ssabooni@bibf.com salkhal@bibf.com ellen@bibf.com

FINANCE DEPARTMENT Buvana Muthuraman Christine Al Arayedh Mahdi A Nabi Redha Mohammed Hassan Finance Manager Finance Officer Finance Officer Finance Officer +973 1781 5599 +973 1781 5532 +973 1781 5508 +973 1781 5558 buvana@bibf.com c_alarayedh@bibf.com mahdi@bibf.com rhassan@bibf.com

MARKETING AND COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT Chris Carston Amal Al AAli Ameera Qaedi Gerry Palad Marketing & Communications Manager Marketing Officer Marketing Coordinator Web Master/Graphic Designer +973 1781 5538 +973 1781 5553 +973 1781 5608 +973 1781 5503 chris.carston@bibf. com aalaali@bibf.com ameera@bibf.com gerry@bibf.com

QUALITY ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT Dr Subhadra Ganguli Cath Hogan Nasreen Aqueel Head of Quality Assurance Senior Academic QA Coordinator Administration Coordinator +973 1781 5515 +973 1781 5606 +973 1781 5543 sganguli@bibf.com cath.hogan@bibf.com nasreen@bibf.com

RESEARCH DEPARTMENT Dr Mohammad Omar Farooq Sowmiya Vivek Head of Research Research Analyst/Coordinator OTHER Jalila Fadhel Hassan Ahmed Ghuloom Redha Taqi Business Manager Morgan Intl. Administration Coordinator Morgan Intl. +973 1781 5504 +973 1781 5578 morgan@bibf.com Info.morgan@bibf.com +973 1781 5504 +973 1781 5578 mfarooq@bibf.com sowmiya@bibf.com

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

19

University of Wales Validated Diploma Programme

Academic Qualifications

The BIBF - Wales Validated Diploma Programme started in September 2004 with 28 students. The intake has increased year on year as the diploma quality has been increasingly recognised. The University of Wales Validated Diplomas comprises sixteen subjects. Each programme, excluding the foundation year, is composed of eight subjects in two semesters; Semester one is from September 2011 to January 2012 and Semester two is from February to June 2012. This is an annual rolling event, so for interested parties within the calendar year of 2011, the NEW intake will commence in September. Under the University of Wales Validated programme framework, the following three diplomas are offered: Banking and Finance (leading to a BSc in Banking and Finance) Islamic Finance (leading to a BSc in Business Studies and Finance) Accounting (leading to a BSc in Accounting and Finance) Programme Structure - Foundation Year Semester I Code MAT100 ACS100 BEN100 BAF100 Subjects Introduction to Mathematics for Business and Finance Academic Study Skills Business English Introduction to Business and Finance

Semester II Code STA100 PWP100 ETH100 ECO100 Subjects Introduction to Statistics Project Writing and Presentation Skills Introductory Business Ethics Introduction to Economics

For all diplomas, the Foundation year structure is identical but the structure for years 1 and 2 is different. After completing the foundation year, students are required to choose one of these diplomas to continue their studies. Details on the diploma requirements can be found at www.bibf.com After completion of the three years study at BIBF, students attain an internationally recognised Validated Diploma from the University of Wales.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

20

continued.... University of Wales Validated Diploma Programme


Diploma graduates have the option of transferring to Bangor, Wales in the UK to complete a Bachelor of Science at Bangor University. Admission Requirements To be admitted to the University of Wales Validation Diploma Programme, the candidate must supply: An acceptable school leaving qualification with a GPA not less than 3.0 (out of 4.00) or 80% over all average. o High School Diploma o GCE three A Levels (with related subjects)- A, B, & C Grades will be exempted from the foundation year programme o International Baccalaureate (IB) 28 & above will be exempted from the foundation year programme Proof of proficiency in English for non-native speakers. Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) with a minimum of a 80 score is required or IELTS minimum 6.0 is acceptable Transcript of the past three grades (10, 11 & 12) Writing an essay Two recommendation letters Copy of passport, CPR and two photographs Tuition :BD 1800 per semester

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

21

Master of Business Administration (MBA)


Foundation of DePauls MBA Programme DePaul University established the United States tenth oldest business school in 1912. The Charles H. Kellstadt Graduate School of Business was established in 1949. DePaul enjoys an outstanding reputation based upon its past accomplishments, its current strengths, and potential for a very bright future. While its overall mission is to be a leader in the application and dissemination of knowledge, as it relates to business and its role in a global society, its primary objective is to be responsive in markets through innovative programs and research that address current issues and anticipates the future. Interesting to note is a Princeton Review Guide Survey of 59,000 students at 331 colleges and universities, which found DePaul students to be the happiest and most satisfied in the US. This is very clear testimony regarding the quality dimensions of the colleges faculty and academic programs in support of its mission and educational objectives. BIBF and DePaul DePaul University of Chicago, with its top ranked part-time MBA programmes in the U.S, joins with BIBF, the leading professional training Institute in the Gulf Region, in offering its Fall 2012 MBA programme in Bahrain. DePaul and BIBF offered the first resident MBA programme for Bahrain and the Gulf Region and the first MBA programme taught solely by U.S. faculty in the entire Middle East. Like BIBF which offers quality programmes in countries around the globe, DePaul, with MBA programmes in Bahrain, Taiwan and Czech Republic brings its global experience to the Gulf Region. DePauls evening MBA programme is ranked 9th among the largest part-time MBA programmes in the world and is accredited by AACSB International. MBA Programme Structure (Course list is subject to modification) This is a unique 18 month programme with courses offered in the evenings and on weekends. There are 18 courses in the programme all of which are taught in Bahrain in-person by full-time Chicago-based DePaul faculty. This is not a distance learning programme, although resources are available on-line. The programme starts in February of each calendar year and runs for 21 months. August is a summer holiday, and December is a winter holiday. No BIBF DePaul MBA Concentrations The DePaul programmes equip individuals to successfully compete in the 21st century, for organisations to become more productive, to establish enabling relationships, create value, and to market and sell goods and services utilising the electronic medium. DePaul welcomes this opportunity to join with
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

classes are conducted in the holy month of Ramadan. Each course is taught in 3 week modules with approximately 2 weeks in between each course. Students meet with DePaul professors 3 times per week during the evening between 6 pm 9.30 pm and in mornings on 3 consecutive weekends between 8 am 3.30 pm. Weekends are usually Fridays for this programme. Class sessions (excluding national and religious holidays) run as follows: 2 weekdays (Usually Sundays and Tuesdays) 6 pm 9.30 pm 3 consecutive weekends (5 hours long) 8 am 3.30 pm Core Courses GSB 420 Quantitative Assessment ACC 500 Financial Accounting MKT 555 Decisions in Marketing Management MGT 500 Managing Effective & Ethical Organizational Behaviour ECO 555 Economics for Decision Making ECO 509 Business Conditions Analysis MGT 555 Strategic Management of Human Resources FIN 555 Financial Management ACC 555 Management Accounting for Decision Making MGT 502 Managing Operations MIS 555 Management of Information Technology GSB 599 Strategic Analysis for Competing Globally Electives IB 500 MGT 563 MKT 558 MKT 535 MKT 557 MKT 598 Global Economy Negotiation Skills Marketing Across Cultures: A Global Perspective Change Management International Marketing Project Management in Operations Management

22

continued.... Master of Business Administration (MBA)


BIBF in providing a world class MBA and other programmes deemed necessary by the business and financial sectors in Bahrain to add experience to organisations, their respective staff, and individuals looking to develop attractive career options. Beyond the aforementioned, MBA BIBF DePaul also offer The Master of Science in Human Resource Management (MSHR), The Master of Science in Finance (MSF); the Master of Science in Islamic Finance (MSIF); and possibly the Master of Science in Finance with Real Estate Concentration (MSRE) . Additional details are highlighted below. Registrations for MBA and MSHR programmes close Nov 15th and MSF and MSIF Programmes close December 15th of each calendar year.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

23

Master of Science - Human Resource Management (MSHR)


DePaul University in cooperation with BIBF is pleased to provide a Master of Science degree in Human Resources through its highly ranked Kellstadt Graduate School of Business. The MSHR allows the flexibility to facilitate career changes into HR from other functional areas in both the public and private sectors. It also is highly recommended for those already in the HR field who aspire to General and Top management HR positions. Because an interdisciplinary background is appropriate for HR, a combination of courses in business and social sciences is useful. Employment of human resource professionals is expected to grow about 10 to 20 percent this decade. The Kellstadt Graduate School of Business is fully accredited by AACSB International The Association to Advance Collegiate Schools of Business. Human Resources professionals help organisations strategically meet workplace challenges including employee attraction and retention, diversity, the global economy, mergers and acquisitions, new technology systems, incentives for improving human performance, restructuring, employee ownership, total rewards and performance management. Some of the career opportunities available to individuals with educational preparation at the masters degree level include Compensation and Benefits Consultants, Trainer, HR Analyst, Recruiter, Labour Relations Professional, and HR Director. With DePaul Universitys Master of Science in Human Resource Management, you can: Enter or advance in the human resources or related fields. Join professional bodies and societies of Human Resource Management such as the Arabian Society of Human Resource Management and the Bahrain Society for Training and Development Develop knowledge and skills in: o Core HR functions o Related areas such as managing people, psychology, law, and economics o Business or public administration functions MSHR Programme Structure The programme starts in January of each calendar year and runs for 14 months. August is a summer holiday, and December is a winter holiday. No classes are conducted in the holy month of Ramadan. Courses are offered once per month and run for 3 weeks. Students meet with DePaul
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

professors 3 times per week; twice during the evening between 6 pm 9.30 pm and in mornings on 3 consecutive weekends between 8 am 3.30 pm. Weekends are usually Fridays for this programme. MSHR Curriculum Students complete the Master of Science Human Resources by taking a total of twelve courses. These are given below: Core Courses MGT 500 Behaviour in Organizations MGT 555 Strategic Management of Human Resources MGT 523 Recruitment and Selection MGT 526 Compensation MGT 525 Training and Career Development Elective Courses MGT 529 Life & Career Planning MGT 530 Leadership in Organization MGT 563 Negotiation Skills MGT 798 Strategic Management for HR Managers IB 500 Global Economy ECO509 Conditions Analysis MKT 555 Decisions for Decision Making (Course list is subject to modification)

24

Master of Science Finance (MSF)


The Master of Science in Finance programme provides an opportunity for highly motivated students to develop the skills necessary to understand modern financial markets, instruments and decision-making. The programme is structured to develop financial management professionals with the knowledge and proficiency to: Create sophisticated solutions to financial problems Design and evaluate new financial instruments Leverage resources for optimal profitability and productivity Develop strategic financial objectives Seize new business opportunities Mitigate corporate risk Improve investment decision making Analyse technical financial material MSF Programme Structure The programme starts in March of each calendar year and runs for 15 months. August is a summer holiday, and December is a winter holiday. No classes are conducted in the holy month of Ramadan. Courses are offered once per month and run for 3 weeks. Students meet with DePaul professors 3 times per week during the evening between 6 pm 9.30 pm and in mornings on 3 consecutive weekends between 8 am 3.30 pm. Weekends are usually Fridays for this programme. MSF Curriculum Students complete the Master of Science in Finance by taking a total of twelve courses. Seven core courses as specified below and three of the other five courses have been determined by DePaul based on appropriateness for the market need in Bahrain. The remaining two electives will be determined by DePaul University in consultation with BIBF. Prerequisites GSB 420 ACC 500 ECO555 Applied Quantitative Analysis Financial Accounting Economics for Decision Making Core Courses FIN 501 FIN 555 FIN 523 FIN 524 FIN 553 FIN 562 FIN 617 FIN 662 FIN 675

Ethics & Standards of Professional Conduct Financial Management Investment Analysis Financial Statement Analysis Special Topics in Corporate Finance Derivatives: Pricing and Risk Management Quantitative Methods in Finance Advanced Derivatives: Pricing & Applications Cases in Investments & Financial Engineering

Elective Courses FIN 512 Commercial Banking FIN 551 Corporate Financial Policy Problems FIN 557 International Finance FIN 798 Special Topics

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

25

Master of Science in Finance Islamic Finance (MSF-IF)


The Master of Science in Finance - Islamic Finance programme provides an opportunity for highly motivated students to develop the dual knowledge and skills base necessary to understand modern conventional and Islamic financial markets, instruments and decision-making. Complementing DePauls existing reputation in Finance, BIBF has sourced globally recognised experts in Islamic Finance to deliver the Islamic Finance courses. The programme is structured to develop financial management professionals with the knowledge and proficiency to: Create sophisticated solutions to financial problems Structure and evaluate new financial instruments for both Islamic and conventional institutions Leverage resources for optimal profitability and productivity Develop strategic financial objectives Seize new business opportunities Mitigate corporate risk Improve investment decision making Analyse technical financial material Understand the technicalities of Islamic commercial and investment banking MSF-IF Programme Structure The programme starts in March of each calendar year and runs for 15 months. August is a summer holiday, and December is a winter holiday. No classes are conducted in the holy month of Ramadan. Courses run for a maximum of 3 weeks. Students meet with DePaul professors 3 times per week; twice during the evening between 6 pm 9.30 pm and in mornings on 3 consecutive weekends between 8 am 3.30 pm. Weekends are usually Fridays for this program. The Schedule for the Islamic Finance stream may slightly vary from the format stipulated. Additionally, students will be required to attend the AAOIFI Annual Conference on Islamic Banking and the AAOIFI Annual Sharia Conference held during the year. MSF-IF Curriculum Students complete the Master of Science in Finance - Islamic Finance by taking a total of twelve courses. The MSF-IF degree is structured based on
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

two specialisations and hence includes topics to be covered in both the conventional finance stream and the Islamic Finance stream. These are given below: Prerequisites GSB 420 Applied Quantitative Analysis ACC 500 Financial Accounting ECO555 Economics for Decision Making Seven Finance Courses ECO 555 Economics for Decision Making FIN 555 Financial Management FIN 523 Investment Analysis FIN 524 Financial Statement Analysis FIN 512 Commercial Banking FIN 562 Derivatives and Risk Management FIN 662 Advanced Derivatives and Risk Management Five Islamic Finance Courses FIN 798 Islamic Economics, Jurisprudence and Ethics FIN 798 Accounting, Auditing and Governance for Islamic Financial Institutions FIN 798 Islamic Commercial Banking FIN 798 Islamic Investment Banking FIN 798 Islamic Treasury, Risk Management and Capital Markets

26

Master of Science In Finance Real Estate (MSF-RE)


The Master of Science in Finance Real Estate is a professional degree built on a robust tradition of finance and real estate courses. Students will possess a solid array of tools with which they can adapt to the evolving and inherently multidisciplinary industry. The programme is structured to develop knowledge and proficiency in: Financial and quantitative decision-making skills Critical thinking, evaluation and analysis skills Oral and written communication skills Familiarity with contemporary software and database tools In addition to the core curriculum, students will be required to complete two of the following: FIN533 FIN535 FIN596 FIN798 FIN798 FIN798 Real Estate Market Analysis and Valuation Real Estate Investment Sustainable Buildings and Real Estate Negotiating Commercial and Real Estate Transactions Real Estate Development Management of Building Design and Construction

MSF-RE Programme Structure The programme starts in March of each calendar year and runs for 15 months. August is a summer holiday, and December is a winter holiday. No classes are conducted in the holy month of Ramadan. Courses run for a maximum of 3 weeks. Students meet with DePaul professors 3 times per week; twice during the evening between 6 pm 9.30 pm and in mornings on 3 consecutive weekends between 8 am 3.30 pm. Weekends are usually Fridays for this programme. MSF-RE Curriculum Students complete the Master of Science in FinanceReal Estate by taking a total of fourteen courses. The MSF-RE degree is structured based on two specialisations and hence includes topics covered in both the conventional finance stream and the Real Estate stream. These are given below: 7 Finance Courses ECO555 FIN555 FIN523 FIN524 FIN512 FIN562 FIN662 Economics for Decision Making Financial Management Investment Analysis Financial Statement Analysis Commercial Banking Derivatives and Risk Management Advanced Derivatives and Risk Management

5 Real Estate Concentration Courses FIN530 FIN531 BLW798 Real Estate Investment and Finance Real Estate Finance Legal Issues in Real Estate

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

27

Leadership Development Programme


Darden Executive Education has partnered with the Institute of Banking in Saudi Arabia and Bahrain Institute of Banking and Finance to design a four-week executive development programme for outstanding managers from the Gulf region. The Leadership Development Programme faculty team has created an impactful programme based on action-oriented learning experiences and participant-centred classroom discussions. Through case study analysis, participants will explore actual business problems and solutions that will lead them to develop new ways of thinking about their own challenges. Learning team and class discussions offer an opportunity to practice influencing others, understanding differing viewpoints, and thinking strategically. The Programme consists of three parts in three locations: Part 1: a six day program in Manama, Bahrain Part 2: three weeks at the Darden School of Business in Charlottesville, VA, USA Part 3: one day in the Institute of Banking in Riyadh Topics Participants will be exposed to some of the most innovative ideas in business and conceptual frameworks for developing successful growth strategies. The integrated curriculum is organised around the following themes: Leadership Development Assessing Your Leadership Style Becoming a Strategic Leader: Purpose, Process, People, and Performance Creating High Performance Teams Formulating a Personal Action Plan Learning, Leading, and Change Personal and Team Engagement Special Features Simulations- incorporated to test new strategies and actively practice leadership skills. Leadership Practices Inventory- a 360-degree assessment and personalised coaching sessions will provide each participant with a view of their leadership style and clear goals for improvement. A follow-up assessment is provided six months later to measure new leadership skills attained. Who Should Attend This programme is designed for outstanding managers with experience leading organisational entities or major project teams who are identified as having potential to be strategic leaders of their enterprise. Programme starts January 2012 and finishes April 2012. Note: Dates and times subject to change

Business Acumen and Enterprise Thinking Creating Value through Process Marketing Your Competitive Advantage Operational Alignment for Service Excellence Organisational Excellence: Agenda to Action Understanding the Total Enterprise Strategic Management Analysing Industry and Global Competition Building Sustainable Competitive Advantage Building Stakeholder Commitment Communicating Strategic Vision Developing a Customer Centric Mindset Linking Strategy and Execution
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

31

Centre for Accounting and IT Accounting and Finance Courses

intro

PROFESSIONAL COURSES In addition to the Open short courses conducted at BIBF, details of which are contained in this catalogue, a series of programmes are conducted to prepare candidates for Professional Qualifications in Accounting and Finance. These include: Certificate in Finance, Accounting and Business (CFAB) from The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW), UK, is the first step to becoming a Chartered Accountant CFAB in brief Has six modules Has no requirement for formal academic entry qualifications, although the BIBF has a minimum English language entry requirement. This is to ensure that all those who enrol on the programme can derive maximum benefit from it Credit for prior learning is available for up to five of the six modules and is awarded only after careful mapping of the prior learning with the content of each module The Certificate can be gained within one year It provides fundamental knowledge in finance, accounting and business Modules can be taken in any order, although BIBF will determine that order The accounting module is compulsory ensuring that everyone has attained the same basic level of accounting competence on obtaining the qualification BIBF will provide the appropriate tuition for a good chance of success in the ICAEWs e-assessments ICAEWs assessment is computer-based The certificate can be used as an entry route into the ICAEWs premier accounting qualification, the ACA, to become a Chartered Accountant BIBF uses comprehensive ICAEW-approved Materials Diploma in International Financial Reporting (DipIFR) from The Chartered Association of Certified Accountants (ACCA), UK DipIFR in Brief Finance professionals not already familiar with the principles of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) will be faced with the challenge of developing a working knowledge of IFRS as quickly as possible.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

32

Continued.... Centre for Accounting and IT Accounting and Finance Courses

The Diploma in International Financial Reporting (DipIFR) is designed to develop your knowledge of IFRS providing an understanding of the concepts and principles which underpin them, and their application in the international marketplace. The tuition materials and the course teaching environment at the BIBF focus on the practical implementation of IFRS in the real reporting world and so will suit those who are practically engaged in reporting under IFRS. It does not teach basic accounting it is geared for those who are already practising accountants It is suitable for CPAs and CMAs without formal IFRS training Comprehensive ACCA-approved course materials are used Certified Internal Auditor (CIA) from The Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA -USA) CIA in Brief The Certified Internal Auditor (CIA) designation is the only globally accepted certification for internal auditors and remains the standard by which individuals demonstrate their competency and professionalism in the internal auditing field. Candidates leave the programme enriched with educational experience, information, and business tools that can be applied immediately in any organisation or business environment. CIA candidates must hold a bachelors degree (or higher degree) or its educational equivalent from an accredited college-level institution. Applicants must meet the education requirement before their CIA application can be approved and before they can register and sit for any CIA exam parts. Candidates must successfully complete an exam for each of parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 and obtain the necessary work experience in order to be admitted to membership BIBF provides a review course for all parts using the Powers CIA Review Course Certified Public Accountant (CPA) from The Institute of Certified Public Accountants (ICPA), USA CPA in Brief BIBF in conjunction with Morgan International provides the 16 week CPA Review course, covering the four modules, twice per year Examinations can now be taken outside the USA in countries
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

33

Continued.... Centre for Accounting and IT Accounting and Finance Courses

around the world, including Bahrain BIBF is the ONLY Authorised Becker Learning System, the CPA Review Course For further information please contact Jalila Fadhul on 17815504 or email her at morgan@bibf.com Certified Management Accountant (CMA) from The Institute of Management Accountants (IMA), USA CMA in Brief BIBF in conjunction with Morgan International provides the two part CMA Review course twice per year The ONLY Authorised IMA- CMA Learning System, the CMA Review Course For further information please contact Jalila Fadhul on 17815504 or email her at morgan@bibf.com Full details of all the above programmes are available on the BIBF website at www.bibf.com.bh In addition to these, the Centre for Accounting & IT will soon be offering the BIBF Certificate/Diploma/Advanced Diploma in Applied Accounting. This qualification will be based on successful completion, by passing the examinations of a number of modules, most of which are in the catalogue of open courses conducted at the BIBF during the day. Accreditation for this qualification, which is currently being developed with the help of Tamkeen and the Scottish Qualifications Authority (SQA), will be sought from internationally recognised professional accountancy bodies. Full details will be available on the BIBF website at www.bibf.com.bh CUSTOMISED COURSES BIBFs Centre for Accounting & IT can create Accounting and Finance courses to the specific requirements of any organisation. This includes professional programmes, open courses or specifically developed courses to the specification of the client. Should have need for a customised course please contact our Business Development Manager by emailing najma@bibf.com PARTICIPANT PREREQUISITES The under-noted courses have been designed so that a participant following a well-defined sequence will build on their knowledge over a series of courses. It is important that participants attend the proper sequence or otherwise fulfil the prerequisite for any course.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

34

Continued.... Centre for Accounting and IT Accounting and Finance Courses

Our core accounting courses have been revamped and their timing streamlined. We would encourage participants to complete the core accounting courses within six months of starting Accounting 1. Participant prerequisites are provided for each course under the headings of minimum and recommended requirements, where appropriate. From our experience, participants who have the recommended requirements obtain maximum benefit from the courses. Those who enter the courses with only the bare minimum requirements are likely to find the sessions difficult and are unlikely to get maximum benefit from attendance. Participants who have practical experience or have studied Accounting outside the BIBF may wish to begin their studies at the BIBF with a more advanced level course. This is quite acceptable but it would be advisable to discuss the level at which such participants should enter the programme with Accounting and Finance faculty in the Centre for Accounting & IT who will be able to offer assistance and guidance.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

35

Index

Category Basic Business / Study Skills Core Accounting

Course Titles Basic Business Mathematics Intermediate Business Mathematics Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records Accounting 3: Drafting Financial Statements Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting Managerial Accounting 2: Intermediate Managerial Accounting

Page 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77

Code 200 250 210 211 212 213 214 223 224 226 257 220E 220A 221 222 230 231 232 266 267 268 272 252 253 254 240E 240A 241 242 255 256 258 271 275 269 276 278 270E 270A 274I 274A

Finance

Cases in Finance Valuation of Companies Financial Analysis Managing Finance

Analysis & Evaluation

Understanding Financial Statements (English) Understanding Financial Statements (Arabic) (NEW) Financial Statement Analysis Evaluating Company Performance Understanding Bank Financial Statements Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements Analysing Bank Financial Statements Analysing Insurance Company Financial Statements Analysing Islamic Bank Financial Statements Evaluating Commercial Bank Performance

Financial Modeling

Financial Modeling with Excel - Introduction Advanced Financial Modeling with Excel Financial Modeling for Project Finance

The Non Accounting Finance for the Non Financial Manager (English) Specialist Finance for the Non Financial Manager (Arabic) (NEW) Budgeting: Preparation and Control Understanding the External Auditors Report Specialised Accounting Project Management Accounting Practical Accounting Information Systems Islamic Accounting Standards Accounting in Banks Insurance Accounting Audit Courses Introductory External Audit and Assurance Audit Update Internal Audit Ethics Work Ethics (NEW) Work Ethics (Arabic) (NEW) Introductory Business & Professional Ethics Advanced Business & Professional Ethics

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

36

COURSE #: 200

Basic Business / study skills Basic Business Mathematics

Training courses
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Description This course provides the participant with the basic mathematical skills they require in the Financial Services sector and prepares them for future related training programmes. The course enables participants to develop an understanding of the basic mathematical skills needed in business. These skills will be required by participants on all Accounting, Principles of Banking and Excel courses. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Solve basic mathematical problems including arithmetic, fractions, decimals, algebra, percentages and ratios, and simple and compound interest with confidence. Content Highlights Arithmetic Fractions Decimals Algebra Percentages and Ratios Simple and compound Interest and Depreciation Target Audience New and existing staff that will have to work with numerical data in their jobs Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 15-18 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD200

37

COURSE #: 250

Intermediate Business Mathematics

Description The course introduces the basic mathematical calculations used in business and in finance. Objectives Upon the completion of the course, the participant will be able to: Explain the time value of money Explain discounting and compounding Explain interest rates Carry out basic bond (notes payable) valuation techniques Content Highlights Time Value of Money Discounting & Compounding Flat, Effective, Real and Nominal Interest Rates Bond Calculations Target Audience Individuals who are involved in credit and investment analysis and need calculation skills to more effectively perform their analysis Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Business Mathematics 200 Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other At least six months work experience in an organisation where you have personally been involved in solving basic mathematical problems including arithmetic, fractions, decimals, algebra, percentages and ratios, and simple and compound interest with confidence. Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 4-7 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

38

COURSE #: 210

Core accounting Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions

Description This is a basic course in accounting for the beginner to grasp the important concepts. It enables the successful participant to be able to record financial transactions, summarise the recorded information, prepare adjusting journal entries and prepare basic financial statements. It is the foundation (a prerequsite) for many accounting and analysis courses. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participants with no prior accounting knowledge, will be able to: Distinguish between types of business transactions and documentation, recognising relevant basic business law and data protection legislation Prepare basic ledger accounts under the double entry system Record income and receipts from credit customers Explain and account for irrecoverable debts Record purchases, expenditure, and payments to suppliers Account for banking transactions Maintain general cash and petty cash records Produce bank reconciliation statements Record payroll transactions Prepare and reconcile control accounts Prepare an initial trial balance identifying and correcting errors using journal entries Content Highlights Accounting principles Financial reporting framework Double entry accounting: basic concepts Double entry accounting: cash and credit transactions Book-keeping practice and the general ledger system Nature and function of primary records Internal check and control accounts Payroll transactions Control accounts Adjusting journal entries Basic financial statements Target Audience Those individuals whose current or future responsibilities may require knowledge of basic accounting/book-keeping and who have little related knowledge or experience
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Basic Business Mathematics (200) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in solving basic mathematical problems including arithmetic, fractions, decimals, algebra, percentages and ratios, and simple and compound interest. Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 10 days with exam on the final day Dates : 12-23 Feb, 6-17 May, 7-18 Oct Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 750

39

COURSE #: 211

Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records

Description This is an intermediate course in Accounting where the participant will apply the concepts learnt in Accounting 1 and will be able to prepare an extended trial balance. This course should ideally be followed by Accounting 3. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Describe, explain and apply relevant accounting concepts, policies and standards Maintain records relating to capital acquisition and disposal Prepare reconciliations for the preparation of final accounts Identify, calculate and record appropriate adjustments Prepare and complete the extended trial balance Prepare final accounts for a sole trader Prepare final accounts for a partnership Content Highlights Recording of cash and credit transactions Preparing financial statements Accounting concepts Day books and the cash books Adjusting journal entries Recording fixed assets depreciation and disposals Bad and doubtful debts Accruals and prepayments Stock and work in progress The extended trial balance Income and expenditure accounts Incomplete records Partnership accounts Target Audience Individuals who have successfully completed Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) and need to enhance their accounting knowledge. This course is a prerequisite for other courses in the accounting stream Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible

for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in recording financial transactions, producing bank reconciliations, preparing the trial balance, preaparing adjusting journals, preparing control accounts and producing basic (sole trader) financial statements. Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 10 days with exam on the final day Dates : 4-15 Mar, 3-14 Jun Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD850

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

40

COURSE #: 212

Accounting 3: Drafting Financial Statements

Description This course is designed for participants who need to know how to prepare financial statements to a high standard. The course will naturally build on what was learnt in Accounting 1 & 2. The requirements of extant GAAP (Generally Accepted Accounting Principles) will be applied in the preparation of Financial Statements on this course. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Draft partnership and limited company financial statements to comply with relevant legislation and accounting standards Correctly identify and implement adjustments, referring any issues and unresolved discrepancies to an appropriate person Understand the importance of an organisations procedures and policies, including confidentiality procedures Prepare and interpret a limited company cash flow statement Identify the general purpose of limited company financial statements Identify the elements of limited company financial statements and the relationship between them Interpret the relationship between the elements of financial statements using ratio analysis drawing valid conclusions and presenting interpretations and conclusions to the appropriate people Content Highlights Conventions, policies and the conceptual framework Accounts of a sole trader and incomplete records Partnership accounts and accounts of societies Goodwill contingencies and post balance sheet events Drafting accounts of limited companies Cash flow statements Interpretation of accounting information Equity accounting for associate companies Consolidated financial statements Target Audience Those who are preparing to take up positions in the accounting, operations, audit or credit departments and are likely to major responsibility for financial statements. This course is strongly recommended for those candidates intend take BIBFs Financial Statement Analysis course.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records 211 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records (211) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records (211). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions, videos and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 10 days with exam on the final day Dates : 1-12 Apr, 16-27 Sept Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,000

41

COURSE #: 213

Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting

Description This course is designed to develop knowledge and understanding of how organisations record, analyse and report current and future costs and revenue data for use within the organisation. It is an Introductory Managerial Accounting course; it is not at a higher level than Accounting 3. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the role of management accounting within an organisation and the requirement for management information Describe costs by classification and behaviour Identify appropriate material, labour and overhead costs Apply the principles of marginal costing and absorption costing Content Highlights Nature and purpose of internal reporting Management information requirements Maintaining an appropriate cost accounting system Cost classification Cost behaviour Elements of cost Marginal costing Absorption costing

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 days with exam on the final day Dates : 13-17 May Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

Target Audience Those who are preparing to take up positions in the accounting, operations, audit or credit departments. This course is strongly recommended for those candidates intend take BIBFs Intermediate Managerial Accounting course Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

42

COURSE #: 214

Managerial Accounting 2: Intermediate Managerial Accounting

Course Description This course is designed to enhance the understanding of cost data used in planning, control, decision making and product pricing. The course concludes with case studies /progress tests to evaluate the understanding of budgets and use of relevant costs for decision-making and product pricing. Course Objectives Explore the nature of budgeting, standard costs and variance analysis Examine product costing systems using variable and absorption costing and activity-based costing Identify and use the relevant information for managerial decision-making in the following areas: special orders, add/delete products, pricing, make or buy parts/products Content Highlights Introduction and types of budgets Flexible budgets and variance analysis Job order costing and process costing Cost volume relationship Variable and absorption costing (re-cap) Relevant costs for decision making Target Audience It is recommended for those who have attended BIBF Introductory managerial accounting course. It is also suitable for those who are currently working in operations and/or accounting departments. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213). Course Structure Participants will be properly guided to work in a group to case studies to have an exposure to the real work place. Teaching strategies will therefore be used which actively involve participants in the learning process. Participants will spend much of their time developing skills in analysing and controlling costs. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 Days with exam on the final day 10-14 Jun BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

43

COURSE #: 223

FINANCE Cases In Finance

Description This course is designed to introduce the participant to the key concepts of finance. Extensive use is made of real - life business cases to illustrate the objectives taught. Objectives Upon the completion of this course participant will be able to: Apply capital budgeting techniques to a variety of situations Critically analyse problems in finance Carry out DuPont analysis Calculate the cost of capital Solve cash flow management problems Content Highlights Estimating cash flows Ratio and DuPont analysis Financial analysis and forecasting Capital budgeting techniques Credit management Debt and equity financing Cost of capital Target Audience Finance Managers; Financial/Credit Analysts; Banking Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Intermediate Business Mathematics 250 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Intermediate Business Mathematics (250) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Intermediate Business Mathematics (250). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 19-23 Feb, 4-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

44

COURSE #: 224

Valuation of Companies

Description This course is designed to introduce the participants to the concept of company valuation and the different methods by which such valuation is carried out. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Apply a number of techniques to valuing companies Explain why some valuation methods are more suitable for some situations and other methods for other situations Content Highlights What is a company valuation? Valuation methods Book value Break-up/liquidation Replacement cost Price earnings ratio (PER) Earnings capacity Dividend yield valuation Problems and cases Target Audience Credit analysts/account officers Potential or existing lending bankers Management trainees Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Intermediate Business Mathematics 250 Understanding Financial Statements (English) 220 Please refer to the prerequisite course description for details of course contents Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Intermediate Business Mathematics (250) and Understanding Financial Statements (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Intermediate Business Mathematics (250) and Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 25-27 Mar, 6-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

45

COURSE #: 226

Financial Analysis

Description This course provides the participant with a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, methods and tools necessary for financial analysis. It is not a basic course and expects participants to have a good understanding of basic finance and accounting before attending the course. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain financial management and the profitmaximising goals Solve risk and return problems Solve cost of capital problems and explain the WACC Apply appropriate capital budgeting (investment appraisal) techniques to business situations Deal with capital structure and leverage (gearing) problems Content Highlights An overview of financial management and the goals of the firm Financial statements Risk and return Sources and cost of capital Investing decisions: capital budgeting Capital structure and leverage Target Audience Credit analysts/account officers; Financial control personnel; Investment placement/ marketing staff; Internal audit staff; Credit/Market risk personnel Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Intermediate Business Mathematics 250 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Intermediate Business Mathematics (250) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Intermediate Business Mathematics (250). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions. Case studies are also featured in the course. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 1-5 Jul, 9-13 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

46

COURSE #: 257

Managing Finance

Description This course will help candidates develop knowledge and understanding of the way organisations finance their operations, plan and control cash flows, optimise their use of working capital and allocate resources to capital expenditure projects. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Describe the cash flow cycle Describe sources of short, medium and longterm finance Prepare cash budgets and cash flow forecasts Explain the principles of effective working capital management Calculate working capital requirements Describe credit management methods and procedures Describe cash management methods and procedures Evaluate capital expenditure proposals Content Highlights Cash budgets Sources of finance Working capital management Credit management Short-term decisions Capital investment appraisal Target Audience Those who wish to understand the way organisations finance their operations. These could include lending decision makers, small business owners and anyone involved with making finance decisions. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 Days with exam on the final day 16-20 Sept BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

47

COURSE #: 220E

Analysis and evaluation Understanding Financial Statements (English)

Description This course provides participants with the knowledge to read and understand published Financial Statements and the notes. The course will also provide an opportunity to appreciate the use of some of the important International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the terminology used in published financial statements Read any financial statements and other information published in the annual report Link the various parts that make up the published financial statements Content Highlights The terminology used in published financial statements The income statement The balance sheet The cash flow statement The statement of changes in equity Notes to the accounts Key IFRS/ IAS requirements Target Audience The course is a refresher for those wishing to study Financial Statement Analysis and other credit courses and studied Accounting 3 and have not applied it in their work situation

Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions, video and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 24-26 Jan, 6-8 Mar 5-7 Jun, 11-13 Sept, 18-20 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

48

COURSE #: 220 A

: 8-6 7-5 :

: 3 : 20-18 .

: , )(IFRS : : ( ) . . " . . : : 3 . : .

: : . 75 : . 300/- : : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

49

COURSE #: 221

Financial Statement Analysis

Description This course will enable participants to analyse published financial statements of different commercial entities using different techniques. The participant will have the opportunity to apply these techniques in group workshops to real company financial statements. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Carry out ratio analysis including the interpretation of the ratios and sensitivity analysis Carry out industrial and environmental analyses including SWOT and PEST Report the results of the analyses carried out, advising those charged with decision making Discuss the limitations of these analyses Content Highlights Ratio analysis and Interpreting the ratios Interpreting the cash flow statement and Cash flow forecasting Sensitivity analysis Common size analysis Trend analysis The industry environment SWOT and PEST analysis Role of computers in analysis Report preparation Target Audience Management trainees; Trainee Credit or Investment Analysts; Others interested in extracting meaning from financial statements (for example, financial auditors) Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements 220 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Financial Statements (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and practical workshop sessions. Video case studies and a computer workshop are also featured in the course. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 days with exam on the final day Dates : 11-15 Mar, 10-14 Jun, 16-20 Sept, Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

50

COURSE #: 222

Evaluating Company Performance

Description This course is designed to provide participants with the necessary tools to permit them to effectively evaluate corporate performance. Participant will be provided with live cases to analyse and interpret using the statistical tools discussed. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Explain statistical tools required for the evaluation of corporate performance Assess earnings quality Project future performance Apply internal performance measures to given situations Content Highlights Evaluating corporate performance The economic value added The market value added Tools of analysis Format of performance report Internal performance measures Case studies Target Audience Anyone involved in evaluating company performance from a variety of standpoints Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Financial Statement Analysis 221 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Financial Statement Analysis (221) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing analysis work which meets all the objectives stated in Financial Statement Analysis (221). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions. Case studies are also featured in the course. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 15-17 July : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

51

COURSE #: 230

Understanding Bank Financial Statements

Description This course provides participants with the knowledge to read and understand a set of published Bank Financial Statements and the related notes. The course will also provide an opportunity to appreciate the use of some of the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) relevant to Bank Financial Statements. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the terminology used in published bank financial statements Read any bank financial statements and other information published in the bank annual report Link the various parts that make up the published bank financial statements Content Highlights The terminology used in published bank financial statements The banks income statement and the statement of comprehensive income The banks balance sheet The cash flow statement The statement of changes in equity Notes to the financial statements including those relating to the BASEL accord Key IFRS/ IAS requirements Target Audience The course is a refresher for those wishing to study Analysing Bank Financial Statements and other credit courses or those who studied Accounting 3 and have not applied it in their work situation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements

220

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Financial Statements (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 27-29 Feb, 6-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

52

COURSE #: 231

Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements

Description This course provides participants with the knowledge to read and understand a set of published Insurance Company Financial Statements. The course will also provide an opportunity to appreciate the use of some of the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) relevant to the understanding of Insurance Companies financial statements. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the terminology used in published Insurance Company financial statements Read Insurance Company financial statements and other information published in the annual report Link the various parts that make up the published Insurance Company financial statements Carry out ratio analysis including the interpretation of the ratios and sensitivity analysis Discuss the limitations of ratio analyses Content Highlights The terminology used in published insurance company financial statements The insurance company income statement The insurance company balance sheet The insurance company cash flow statement The insurance company statement of changes in equity Notes to the financial statements Key IFRS/ IAS requirements Target Audience The course is design for individuals (with no or little accounting background) who need to read and understand Insurance Company financial statements Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements

220

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Financial Statements (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 4-6 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD300

53

COURSE #: 232

Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements

Description This course provides participants with the knowledge to read and understand published Islamic Bank Financial Statements and the notes. The course will also provide an opportunity to appreciate the use of some of the important Accounting Standards set by Accounting and Auditing Organisation for Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI). Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the terminology used in published Islamic Bank financial statements Read Islamic Bank financial statements and other information published in the annual report Link the various parts that make up the published financial statements Content Highlights The terminology used in published Islamic Bank financial statements The Islamic Bank income statement The Islamic Bank balance sheet The Islamic Bank cash flow statement The Islamic Bank statement of changes in equity Notes to the financial statements Key AAOIFI requirements Target Audience The course is a refresher for those wishing to study Analysis of Islamic Bank Financial Statements Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements

220

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Financial Statements (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 7-9 Feb, 4-6 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

54

COURSE #: 266

Analysing Bank Financial Statements

Description This course will enable the participants to analyse published bank financial statements using different techniques. The participant will have the opportunity to apply these techniques in group workshops to real bank financial statements and develop an understanding of industry-specific and entity-specific factors. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Carry out ratio analysis including the interpretation of the ratios and sensitivity analysis Carry out industrial and environmental analyses including SWOT and PEST Report the results of the analyses carried out, advising those charged with decision making Discuss the limitations of these analyses Content Highlights Key ratios for a bank Ratio analysis for banks and interpreting the ratios Interpreting the cash flow statement Cash flow forecasting Sensitivity, Common size and Trend analysis The industry environment SWOT and PEST analysis Role of computers in analysis Report Preparation Target Audience Central Bank of Bahrain (CBB) staff and others with regulatory oversight over banks Others interested in extracting meaning from bank financial statements (for example, bank financial auditors) Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Bank Financial Statements 230 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either A Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Bank Financial Statements 230 or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Bank Financial Statements (230). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions, based on real published financial statements Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 days with exam on the final day 1-5 Apr BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

55

COURSE #: 267

Analysing Insurance Company Financial Statements

Description This course will enable the participants to analyse published financial statements of Insurance Companies using different techniques. The participant will have the opportunity to apply these techniques in group workshops to real Insurance company financial statements. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Carry out ratio analysis including the interpretation of the ratios and sensitivity analysis Carry out industrial and environmental analyses including SWOT and PEST Report the results of the analyses carried out, advising those charged with decision making Discuss the limitations of these analyses Content Highlights Ratio analysis and Interpreting the ratios Interpreting the cash flow statement Cash flow forecasting Sensitivity analysis; Common size and Trend analysis The industry environment SWOT and PEST analysis Report Preparation Target Audience Insurance Management trainees; Trainee Credit or Investment Analysts; Others interested in extracting meaning from Insurance financial statements (for example, financial auditors) Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements 231 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements (231) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements (231). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and practical workshop sessions. Video case studies and a computer workshop are also featured in the course. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 days with exam on the final day Dates : 6-10 May Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

56

COURSE #: 268

Analysing Islamic Bank Financial Statements

Description This course will enable the participants to analyse published Islamic Bank Financial Statements using different techniques. The participant will have the opportunity to apply these techniques in group workshops to real Islamic Bank Financial Statements and develop an understanding of industry-specific and entity-specific factors. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Carry out ratio analysis including the interpretation of the ratios and sensitivity analysis Carry out industrial and environmental analyses including SWOT and PEST Report the results of the analyses carried out, advising those charged with decision making Discuss the limitations of these analyses Content Highlights Key ratios for an Islamic bank Ratio analysis for Islamic banks and Interpreting the ratios Interpreting the cash flow statement Cash flow forecasting Sensitivity; Common size and Trend analysis The industry environment SWOT and PEST analysis Role of computers in analysis Report Preparation Target Audience Central Bank of Bahrain (CBB) staff and others with regulatory oversight over Islamic Banks ; Others interested in extracting meaning from Islamic Bank Financial Statements (for example, Islamic Bank financial auditors) Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements 232 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements (232) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements (232). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions, based on real published Islamic bank financial statements Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 days with exam on the final day 9-13 Dec BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

57

COURSE #: 272

Evaluating Commercial Bank Performance

Description This course is designed for practicing bankers and banking supervisors to evaluate the performance of commercial banks. The course will apply standard methodology like ratio analysis, common sizing, trend analysis, SWOT, PEST analysis. There will also be an opportunity to revisit Basel II. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Evaluate the performance of a commercial bank from a number of perspectives Briefly discuss bank regulation under Basel II Content Highlights Techniques for interpreting a set of financial statements Revisiting PEST and SWOT analysis The banking industry Regulatory and licensing requirements Trend analysis Comprehensive ratio analysis and interpretation Evaluating cost of capital for bank Evaluating risk and return Market Value added and Economic value added Practical case studies Target Audience Credit or Investments Analyst; Commercial Banking Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Analysing Bank Financial Statements 266 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Analysing Bank Financial Statements (266) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Analysing Bank Financial Statements (266). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 22-24 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

58

COURSE #: 252

FINANCIAL MODELLING Financial Modelling With Excel Introduction

Description The course is designed to introduce the participant to the concepts of financial modeling using Excel. The course concentrates on modeling for Accounting. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Apply spreadsheet applications of financial management Intelligently model investment projects, cost of capital, financial statements Explain cash flow modeling Content Highlights Introduction to excel functions Data tables, graphs NPV analysis in capital budgeting Modeling cost of capital Modeling financial statements Target Audience Credit/Financial Analysts; Corporate and Banking staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Financial Statement Analysis 221 Excel Basic 315 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Financial Statement Analysis (221) and Excel Basic (315) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Financial Statement Analysis (221) and Excel Basic (315).

Course Structure The course is taught in a computer-lab environment. All applications will be carried out using Excel, and the participant will be provided with all necessary data files at the commencement of the course. The course will utilise a case-approach methodology to demonstrate practical financial modeling applications. Course Facts Duration Dates 17-21 Jun, 4-8 Nov Lecturers

: 5 Days : 22-26 Jan, 22-26 Apr, : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

59

COURSE #: 253

Advanced Financial Modeling With Excel

Description This highly practical, hands-on course has been designed to build on your basic knowledge of finance and excel. The course will strengthen the already existing model structuring skills. A structured design strategy will be adopted throughout the course in order to develop the skills of good excel model development. These skills are then applied to building high quality financial models. Participants will have the chance to work on their own models. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Design, cross-check and structure financial models effectively Build robust and effective models in which addins can be perform and to which amendments can be made without destroying the model integrity Create & compare scenarioscurrent case, best case, worst case & expected case in order to make decision-making easier Create models quickly following the basic rules of good model construction Content Highlights Useful ideas to speed up spreadsheet design Validating data and producing dropdown lists Sumif Countif and excels database Vlookup, Hlookup, Lookup, Match & Index Row and column functions Outlining collapsing rows and columns Working with arrays, array formulas and array constants Some other advanced functions (e.g. data consolidation, macro recording and use of the CTRL key) Model structure , Types of financial models, Monthly financial models Financial ratios and sensitivity analysis Cost of capital, loans capital and interest repayment Return on investment Scenarios and Valuing companies Model optimization and Basic forecasting Target Audience Analysts, Investors, Investment advisers, Planners and Other finance professionals

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Financial Modeling with Excel Introduction 252 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Financial Modelling with Excel - Introduction (252) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Financial Modelling with Excel Introduction (252). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 days : 4-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

60

COURSE #: 254

Financial Modelling For Project Finance

Description This course will help candidates develop knowledge and understanding of the five golden rules of financial modeling for project finance. While every project will have unique features, and each spreadsheet packages its own special techniques, certain principles apply generally to the construction of project finance models. These principles are the main focus of this course. The course aim includes ensuring that the modeling process is quicker and easier for the modeler, and the model is as flexible, robust and comprehensible as possible. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Create models for project finance that are flexible, robust and comprehensible following the five golden rules of financial modelling for project finance Know when to break the golden rules lawfully Content Highlights The five golden rules of financial modelling Purposes and uses of a model Development over project life How to start and where to stop Design to maximise flexibility Timescale Consistent signs Currency treatment Circular and iterative calculations Control and identification of sensitivities Data, capital costs and finance costs Work lines, masks, factors and counters, operations, tariff and tax Profit and loss, returns and cover factors Cash flows and cash balances Debugging, checking and presenting, sample data, examples and exercises Target Audience Anyone involves in project finance, where everyones financial security is dependent on the future performance of a new undertaking Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Excel Basic 315 Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213) and Excel Basic (315) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing work which meets all the objectives stated in Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213) and Excel Basic (315). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 days with exam on the final day 7-11 Oct BIBF staff

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

61

COURSE #: 240E

the Non-Accounting specialist Finance For The Non Financial Manager (English)

Description This programme is designed to introduce participants to the basic accounting concepts and to enable them to interpret the content contained in the financial statements. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Read published financial statements Explain accounting concepts and the accounting equation Explain how the various components of the financial statements link together to tell a story of the business being reported upon Interpret financial statements Briefly explain various costing techniques Apply basic budgeting techniques Correctly use costs for decision making Content Highlights Purpose of Financial Statements: The profit and loss account The balance sheet Cash flow statement Interpreting financial statements Elements of cost and overhead absorption Activity based costing Using costs for decision making Budgetary planning and control Target Audience Managers who are not finance professionals but are required to interact and liaise with the finance department and who would benefit from an understanding of the financial function and terminology Prerequisites None required

Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions. Published financial statements will be used in the class discussions; participants are encouraged to bring along their own financial statements to be able to apply the class techniques to during the group discussions. There will be an assessment (based on real financial statements) on the final day of the course. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 Days 4-8 Mar, 24-28 Jun, 23- 27 Sep BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

62

COURSE #: 240A

: 5 : : 8 4 24 28 27 23 : : : . 125 : . 500/- : : .

: . : : " . . " . " . " . : : " " " " " " " . : . : . . ( ) . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

63

COURSE #: 241

Budgeting - Preparation and Control

Description The participant will learn the techniques of budgeting and its application to the workplace. The course will provide the formulation of budgets using different methodologies. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Explain the budgetary process Plan and prepare a budget Apply budgeting to real situations Distinguish between various budgeting techniques Carry out variance analysis Explain the human factor in budgetary control Content Highlights Objectives of budgeting Operational budgets Revenue budget Cash budget Capital budget Zero-based budgeting Service cost apportionment Activity based costing Flexible budgets and re-forecasting Variance analysis Overview of the budget process in a large corporation Target Audience Staff, who are involved in the budget preparation and control process in their organisations. The course has no pre--requisite but there is an underlying assumption that participants are aware of general business concepts. Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions. Video case studies and a computer workshop are also featured in the course.

Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 3 Days : 10-12 Apr, 27-29 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

64

COURSE #: 242

Understanding The External Auditors Report

Description This course provides participants with the knowledge to read and understand the external auditor report which is usually issued with published financial statements and introduces the reader to the reporting ISA issued by the IAASB. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the terminology used in the auditors report Explain the respective responsibilities of management and external auditors Explain the types of audit opinion given by the auditor Content Highlights The terminology used in published audit reports The responsibilities of management in connection with audit The responsibilities of the auditor in connection with audit The auditors opinion The Audit Report Examples of audit reports for different types of organisations Target Audience Anyone who wishes to understand the auditors report and the implications of the auditors opinion Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements 220 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 4: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 4: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213). Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Understanding Financial Statemednts (220) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Understanding Financial Statements (220). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 2 Days : 12-13 Sept : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 150

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

65

COURSE #: 255

Specialised Accounting Project Management Accounting

Description This course addresses the accounting & finance side of project management. Accounting has an important role to play in ensuring that the project is managed appropriately and come in on budget both cost and time-wise. This course will equip participants with a solid working knowledge of basic business practices when it comes to dealing with projects. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Explain the key issues in project finance Account for projects Plan and prepare a project budget Identify key project risks Evaluate projects Explain the contractual context and identify contractual issues in a project Place project financing within the economic context Content Highlights Project management Project financing Creating the project budget Project costing Project revenues and cash flows Monitoring project progress: (Is it on time and within budget so far?) Assessing project financial success Key project risks entity and transaction risks Target Audience Management or other staff involved in coordinating or managing projects in their organizations Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting 213 or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting (213). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 days with exam on the final day 7-11 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

66

COURSE #: 256

Practical Accounting Information Systems

Description This course is designed to introduce the participant to a practical computerised accounting information system. It will introduce the participants to the elements of an accounting information system whether manual or computerised. It will also introduce some of the concepts of systems analysis, design and evaluation. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Analyse, design and document manual accounting information systems Analyse and design accounting information systems that satisfy the transaction processing, reporting and decision-making requirements of management Distinguish data from information Process data using a computerised accounting information system and report using an appropriate reporting outlet Analyse, design and document internal controls in a computerised accounting information systems Evaluate internal controls in a computerised accounting information system Evaluate a computerised accounting information system Integrate computer systems applications using a case study Content Highlights Introduction to accounting information systems Systems analysis and design and evaluation Transactions processing and reporting using an actual computerised accounting system Computer systems and internal controls Processing data using a spreadsheet package Producing a report using a word processing package Target Audience Those who wish to improve their skills in computerised accounting Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of theoretical explanation and practical exercises using a computerised accounting information system Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 days with exam on the final day Dates : 2-6 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

67

COURSE #: 258

Islamic Accounting Standards (English)

Description This is an accounting course introducing participants to Islamic accounting standards. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be able to: Apply the Islamic Accounting Standards developed by the Accounting & Auditing Organisation for Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI). Content Highlights Objectives & concepts of Financial Accounting for Islamic banks and Financial Institutions. Objectives of Financial Accounting for Islamic banks. Concepts of Financial Accounting for Islamic banks. General presentation & disclosure in the financial statements of Islamic banks. Accounting Standard for Murabaha, Musharaka, Ijara, Salaam and Istisna Investment accounts and their equivalents. Target Audience All those who are interested in knowing AAOIFIs Islamic Accounting Standards

Prerequisites None required Prerequisites Basic understanding of conventional accounting principles Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions using the case method. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 9-13 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

68

COURSE #: 271

Accounting In Banks

Description The course is at an intermediate level and the participant will learn the process of accounting pertaining to some of the major areas in banking viz. loans, foreign exchange, investments. The participant will have the opportunity of relating some aspects of the course to published financial statements of real commercial banks. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Account for various banking transactions, for example, those related to securities, loans, deposits, foreign exchange Explain bank accounting principles Review real bank financial statements Content Highlights Accounting for investment and trading securities Accounting for provisions for loan losses Accounting principles for banks Financial statement presentation Accounting for foreign exchange transactions Bookkeeping for common banking transactions Target Audience Staff whose positions require them to know and understand the accounting implications of banking transactions or who may be involved in the bookkeeping aspects of these transactions; Those involved in reviewing financial statements of banks Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration the final day Dates Lecturers

: 5 days with exam on : 12-16 Feb, 4-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

69

COURSE #: 275

Insurance Accounting

Description This course is designed for participants who need to know how to prepare financial statements of Insurance companies. The requirements of IFRS will be applied in the preparation of Financial Statements on this course. Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will: Have gained an understanding of the concepts of insurance accounting Will have gained knowledge about the various aspects of record keeping, calculating provisions for doubtful debts and reserves Content Highlights Conventional and Insurance accounting framework Insurance companies and their products Recording and processing requirements of claims Process of providing bad debts and doubtful debts Various insurance accounting calculations, premiums written, earned and unearned Revenue accounting and reinsurance Preparation of financial statements Target Audience Employees in the early stages of their career in the insurance industry; Employees in other accounting firms; Non-Insurance employees who wish to acquire basic insurance accounting knowledge Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions, case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers :

5 days with exam on the final day 14 -18 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

70

COURSE #: 269

Audit COURSES Introductory External Audit And Assurance

Description This course is intended to help the participant develop knowledge and understanding of the audit and assurance process from the planning stage through to the reporting stage and the techniques used in the conduct of internal and external audits. Objectives On completion of this paper, candidates should be able to: Explain the rules of professional conduct relating to the ethics of integrity, objectivity, independence and confidentiality and undertake audit procedures accordingly Identify control objectives and weaknesses for an accounting system under review Assess audit risks, produce an audit plan and design appropriate audit procedures Carry out appropriate audit procedures in accordance with an audit plan on the basis of a validly selected sample Draw valid conclusions from the results of audit tests Prepare draft reports relating to an audit assignment Content Highlights The business environment: The nature of accounting records, audit and the audit, report, requirements for becoming an auditor, duties of an auditor, responsibilities of auditors, fraud and error, liability to clients, liability to third parties The audit framework: External audit and internal audit, regulatory framework of auditing, auditing standards, requirements of professional bodies, and the audit engagement process Audit personnel: The audit team, liaison with client staff, liaison with third parties, experts, internal audit Audit planning: The nature of an audit plan and programme, understanding the entity and its environment, risk, materiality, documentation, audit planning meeting Accounting systems and controls: The nature of accounting systems, general principles of control, techniques to record accounting systems, narrative notes, flowcharts, techniques to evaluate accounting systems, internal control questionnaires, internal control evaluation questionnaires, checklists, major control cycles (income and expenditure), tests of control, reporting control deficiencies
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Audit evidence and sampling: Financial statement assertions, audit evidence and procedures, verification techniques physical examination, re-performance, third party confirmation, documentary, evidence, vouching and analytical review, audit sampling, types of testing tests of control and substantive testing, computer assisted audit techniques, audit of statement of financial position items existence, completeness, occurrence, valuation and allocation, classification, rights and obligations Audit completion and Audit reporting: Audit review (events after the end of the reporting period, going concern, opening balances and comparatives), analytical procedures, recording significant and material errors, review by senior audit staff, report of audit points arising (to partner), letter of representation, standard audit report, qualifications in audit reports

Target Audience Individuals who would like to acquire an understanding of basic external audit procedures Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210).

71

Continued.... Introductory External Audit And Assurance

Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 4-8 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

72

COURSE #: 276

Audit Update

Description The course is designed to give the participant an update on global issues relating to audit pronouncements and audit practice Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will able to: Explain the changes that have taken place in international audit regulation since the last update course (or in the last 12 months, for the first course) Identify the implications of those changes on their (organisations) practice of auditing Apply those changes to their own audit involvement Content Highlights Ethics for professional accountants International standards on auditing The IFAC structure and operations Corporate governance Other current issues Target Audience Individuals currently working as external auditors or in the internal audit function, for example accountants whose work is impacted upon by audit or those who wish to gain an understanding of the current issues in auditing Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Participants should be aware of the international audit regulation regime. This may have been acquired through the participants working in external audit, being liaison officers for audits at their own organisations or working with their own auditors during the audit visit.

Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 2 Days : 15-16 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

73

COURSE #: 278

Internal Audit

Description The course is designed to introduce the participant to the concepts of internal audit, as it relates particularly to the financial matters of an organisation. It will touch on other functional areas to which internal audit are relevant. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Explain the audit process from the planning stage through to the reporting stage Explain the techniques employed in internal audit Carry out basic internal audit processes, including planning and reporting Content Highlights The nature and purpose and scope of internal auditing Auditing theory Internal audit as a consulting engagement Planning the audit Audit evidence and internal controls Use of computers in internal audit Tests of control and substantive procedures Sampling and other techniques Forming an audit judgment Formulating the audit opinion Reporting Target Audience Individuals currently working in the internal audit function or those who wish to gain an understanding of the role of internal audit in the organisation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions 210 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210) or work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions (210). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 23-27 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

74

COURSE #: 270E

ETHICS Work Ethics (English) (New)

Description This course is about keeping a job once you have got it; it is about ensuring that you provide your employer with a service your employer was expecting; to ensure that if you have to leave, your employer will write you a good reference because your employer is sure you will be an asset to whoever you will be employed by in the future. Course Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will able to: Explain work ethics within a cultural context Explain the difference between labour/ employment law and work ethics Implement behaviour at work that ensures that the employee is giving a satisfactory service to the employee Content Highlight Cultural and religious context Basics of labour law and the difference with work ethics Knowing your employer code of conduct Showing up for work consistently and working reliably Dressing appropriately for work Knowing your specific duties and doing your specific job Being honest in everything, including admitting mistakes Doing your best without whining Respecting your employer, your co-workers and your employers property and customers/clients Being reliable in all things Realising you are not indispensable

Target Audience All those interested in giving their employer the best service and enjoy their job Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 2 Days : 30-11 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 100

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

75

COURSE #: 270 A

()NEW

: : : 31 30 : . : : . 50 : . 100/- : : .

: . : : " : " " " " " . " : : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

76

COURSE #: 274I

Introductory Business and Professional Ethics

Description Ethics has become the burning issue of current moral philosophical thought, raising the spectre of responsibility at a time when responsibility seems entirely replaced by uncertainty and relativism. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will able to: Discuss the various schools of western philosophical thought Distinguish between one school of western philosophical thought and another Explain the different approaches to ethical decision making Link philosophy, ethical-decision-making approaches and the professions Content Highlights Introduction to philosophy including the language of ethics; moral development; moral duty; responsibility; rights and justice; relationship between morality and ethics Ethical decision-making models Introduction to ethics for the professions

Target Audience Decision makers whether in private or in public sectors. This includes all professionals and all those who manage other people. Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical sessions Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 4 Days : 6-9 Feb : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

77

COURSE #: 274A

Advanced Business and Professional Ethics

Description Ethics has become the burning issue of current moral philosophical thought, raising the spectre of responsibility at a time when responsibility seems entirely replaced by uncertainty and relativism. Engendering trust and respect will prove instrumental in building relationships and shaping the future. Only by maintaining the support of key stakeholders can an organisation, profession, or individual achieve strategic objectives optimally and on a sustained basis. This advanced course will build on the philosophy and decision-making models covered in the introductory course and apply these to the analysis of real situations (e.g. the Enron Case) to identify the key ethics issues. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will able to: Analyse and evaluate the ethical issues in business and professional practice Discuss the nature of professions and professionalism focusing on your own profession Apply ethical solution models to business and professional problems Content Highlights Professions Codes of conduct - professions Corporate ethical governance Managing ethics workplace ethics Managing ethics social accountability Managing ethics crisis management Target Audience Decision makers whether in private or in public companies. This includes all professionals and all those who manage other people. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introductory Business & Professional Ethics 274I Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Introductory Business and Professional Ethics (274I) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in performing accounting work which meets all the objectives stated in Introductory Business & Professional Ethics (274I). Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical sessions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 5 Days : 17-19 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

78

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR ACCOUNTING & IT: ACCOUNTING & FINANCE COURSES
Duration 4 4 10 10 10 5 5 214 10-14 213 13-17 212 1-12 211 4-15 3-14 16-27 210 12-23 6-17 250 7-18 200 15-18 4-7 CODE JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

NO

COURSE TITLE

BASIC BUSINESS / STUDY SKILLS

Basic Business Mathematics

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Intermediate Business Mathematics

CORE ACCOUNTING

Accounting 1: Recording Financial Transactions

Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records

Accounting 3: Drafting Financial Statements

Managerial Accounting 1: Introductory Managerial Accounting

Managerial Accounting 1: Intermediate Managerial Accounting 5 3 5 5 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 5 232 266 231 7-9 1-5 230 222 27-29 4-6 221 220A 220E 24-26 6-8 6-8 11-15 257 5-7 5-7 226 224 25-27 223 19-23

FINANCE

Cases in Finance

4-8 6-8 1-5 9-13 16-20 11-13 10-14 15-17 6-8 4-6 16-20 18-20 18-20

BIBF CLOSED

Valuation of Companies

10

Financial Analysis

11

Managing Finance

ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION

12

Understanding Financial Statements

13

Understanding Financial Statements (Arabic) (NEW)

14

Financial Statement Analysis

15

Evaluating Company Performance

16

Understanding Bank Financial Statements

17

Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements

18

Understanding Islamic Bank Financial Statements

19

Analysing Bank Financial Statements

NO 5 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 3 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 2 2 4 5 278 270E 270A 274I 274A 6-9 17-21 276 269 275 4-8 15-16 23-27 271 12-16 258 256 255 242 241 10-12 12-13 7-11 240A 4-8 240E 4-8 24-28 24-28 254 23-27 23-27 253 7-11 252 22-26 22-26 17-21 272 22-24 268 267 6-10

COURSE TITLE

Duration

CODE JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC 9-13

20

Analysing Insurance Company Financial Statements

21

Analysing Islamic Bank Financial Statements

22

Evaluating Commercial Bank Performance

FINANCIAL MODELLING 4-8 4-8

23

Financial Modelling with Excel - Introduction

24

Advanced Financial Modelling with Excel

25

Financial Modelling for Project Finance

THE NON-ACCOUNTING SPECIALIST

26

Finance for the Non Financial Manager

27

Finance for the Non Financial Manager (Arabic) (NEW)

28

Budgeting: Preparation and Control

27-29

29

Understanding the External Auditors Report

SPECIALISED ACCOUNTING

30

Project Management Accounting

BIBF CLOSED

31

Practical Accounting Information Systems

2-6 9-13 4-8 14-18

32

Islamic Accounting Standards

33

Accounting in Banks

34

Insurance Accounting

AUDIT COURSES

34

Introductory External Audit and Assurance

35

Audit Update

36

Internal Audit

BUSINESS PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 30-31 30-31

37

Work Ethics (NEW)

38

Work Ethics (Arabic) (NEW)

39

Introductory Business & Professional Ethics

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

40

Advanced Business & Professional Ethics

79

Note: English run courses unless otherwise specified

83

Centre for Banking

intro

Banking has evolved over the years with continued research into new products and services. BIBFs Centre for Banking is a premier provider of performance based training and development solutions with a primary focus on change and innovation. This along with high quality teaching has significant implications for human resource transformation in the areas of banking. The Centre for Banking has a wide range of training courses for banks and other financial institutions in Bahrain and in the region. These include Public Offerings (e.g. short courses run in the mornings at BIBF) run throughout the year in the areas of Domestic Banking, Credit and Credit Analysis, Finance and Economics, International Banking, Treasury and Capital Markets; Special offerings in different areas of Banking but customized to the particular needs of our clients in and outside Bahrain; and External Offerings which are delivered by experts from all over the world on cutting edge topics in Banking and Finance throughout the year for middle to top level management. There are also a number of Professional Qualifications which are provided in the evenings. The following pages will outline the Centers Professional and the Public Offerings Professional Qualifications (International) Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA) Professional Risk Manager (PRM) Investment Representative Programme (Series- 7 Certification) ACI (Financial Markets Association) Level I & II Certification ACAMS (Anti-money Laundering Specialist) Certification IDC (International Diploma in Compliance) Professional Qualification (BIBF) Banking Studies Diploma Programme (BSDP) Professional Qualifications Awards Awards are made to students gaining the highest aggregate examination marks. The following awards are presented annually at both the Intermediate and Advanced levels by a number of sponsoring banks: Award for Outstanding Graduate at the Intermediate Level National Bank of Bahrain Award for Exceptional Achievement at the Intermediate Level Ahli United Bank
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

84

continued.... Centre for Banking Award of Merit at the Intermediate Level HSBC Award for Outstanding Graduate at the Advanced Level Bank of Bahrain and Kuwait Award of Excellence at the Advanced Level Gulf International Bank Arab Bank Award to Successful Bahrainis in the CIB Examination Arab Bank Plc. Award of Merit to Bahraini Graduate at the Advanced Level Bahraini Saudi Bank Award for Outstanding Graduate at the Intermediate and Advanced Diploma Levels Investcorp Bank Award for Outstanding Graduate of the Year in the Investment Representative Programme Bahrain Stock Exchange. For further details of courses leading to the professional qualifications listed above, please complete the Request Information form at the back of this catalogue and the relevant information will be sent to you. Open Courses Open Courses have been designed so that a participant following a well-defined sequence will build on their knowledge over a series of courses. It is important that participants attend the proper sequence or otherwise fulfil the prerequisite for any course. Participant Prerequisites Participant prerequisites are provided for each course under the headings of minimum and recommended requirements, where appropriate. From our experience, participants who have the recommended requirements obtain maximum benefit from the courses. Those who enter the courses with only the minimum requirements cannot be expected to obtain this same level of competence.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

85

Index

Category Banking Operations

Course Title Elements of Banking Negotiable Instruments Introduction to Bankcard Industry BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part I BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part II BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part III Banking Products: Development and Sales 360 Negotiation Skills for Bankers Banking Law and Practice

Page 87 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 99 100 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

Code 100 101 104 107A 107B 107C 108 111 129 109 110 112 113 115 116 117 117A 117B 117C 118 119 120 128 121 122 133 140 143 155 149 177

Credit Risk Analysis & Management

SME Financing Project Appraisal & Financing Real Estate Investment and Financing Micro Finance: Consumer & Small Business Lending Consumer Loan Collection Techniques The BIBF Credit Programme BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level I BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level II BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level III Problem Credits Corporate Credit Risk Analysis Introduction to Loan Syndication & Documentation Commercial Loan Documentation

Finance & Economics

Country Risk Analysis Corporate Finance CFA Level 1: Preparatory Course for Economics Introduction to International Trade Finance Uniform Customs & Practices for Documentary Credit (UCP 600) Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantess (URDG 758) Documentary Letter of Credit An Introduction to Certified Documentary Credit Specialist (CDCS) Preparatory Course

International Banking

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

86

continued.... Index

Category Treasury

Course Title Foreign Exchange - Level 1 Foreign Exchange - Level 2 (NEW) Foreign Exchange & Money Markets Level 1 Foreign Exchange & Money Markets Level 2 (NEW) Introduction to Treasury Operations Market Technical Analysis Derivatives - Level 1 Derivatives - Level 2 Interest Rate and Money Market Calculations

Page 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 138 139 140 142 143 144 145 146

Code 165 175 166 176 167 168 169 184 196 183 185 180 186 187 102 170 106 136 137 139 161 181 188 194

Capital Markets

Private Equity & Venture Capital Asset Valuation Portfolio Management Foundations of Investment Analysis Fixed Income Management

Risk Management, Regulations & Compliance

Anti Money Laundering Awareness Programme Regulatory Compliance Programme CFA Level 1 Preparatory course for Quantitative Methods Developing a Ready-to-Use Compliance Framework Business of Money Exchange & AML Corporate Governance Introduction to Basel III Introduction to Asset Liability Management Risk Management & Value at Risk Finance Skills for All

Assessment: Banking courses for 3 or more days are examinable. Pass mark is 50%. Please refer to programmes for details.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

87

COURSE #: 100

BANKING OPERATIONS
Elements of Banking

Training courses

Description This course introduces participants to the basics of banking operations and financial services, in particular the general principles of banking operations, introduction to the financial sector, banking systems (Conventional and Islamic) and the main financial institutions that operates in Bahrain. The roles of the Central Bank of Bahrain and the nature of various financial services, products and diverse customers would be intensively discussed. An overview of the nature and operations of International Trade, Foreign Exchange transactions would be discussed well. The standard application of Know Your Customer and Customer Due Diligence in Banking Operations would be emphasised while participants would have the opportunity of having introduction to the concept and overview of Islamic Banking products/ operations and Money Laundering processes and Anti-Money Laundering regulations. Objectives On completion of the course, participants would be expected to have gained: An idea of the concept and overview of domestic banking operations A clear knowledge on the process of operations in domestic banking An introduction to the central banking operations, roles and responsibilities in the nations economy Understanding of the various types of conventional banking products and customers Basic understanding of the composition and content of the banks balance sheet Understanding of international trade and foreign exchange operations Understand the development, concepts and principles of Islamic banking products and services Anti-money laundering overview and awareness Comprehension of the internal control policies and compliance culture in our operations environment Risks confronted by banks in their operation and the need for regulation of banking sector Content Highlights Development and control of the banking system Central bank definition and roles Conventional banking products, various types of accounts and categories of customers Payment methods and funds transfer system
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

88

continued....

Elements of Banking
Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies and exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 6 Days Dates : 19-26 Feb, 1-8 Apr, 6-13 May, 8-15 Jul, 23-30 Sep, 4-11 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

Introduction to foreign exchange operations spot and forward exchange rates Collections/ documentary letters of credit Islamic banking instruments/products, roles and operations Introduction to anti-money laundering awareness Internal control policies and compliance in banking operations

Target Audience New employees in the banking sector; Existing employees in the early stages of their career whose practical experience to date have been limited Prerequisites None required

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

89

COURSE #: 101

Negotiable Instruments

Description This programme introduces participants to the legal aspects of commercial paper used in banks dayto-day transactions. The course will focus on the practical side of negotiable instruments as well as the legal procedures in case of dishonour or any forgery regarding the instruments. Objectives On completion of the course, participants should be able to apply the acquired knowledge of the law and practices relating to negotiable instruments and their relevance to the banking practice. Content Highlight Attribute of negotiable instruments Types of negotiable instruments The legal requirements of an instrument (Cheque) Endorsements and crossings Rights and duties of each party to an instrument Risks facing the collecting bank Protections available for banks on third party instruments collection and conversions Risks facing the paying bank Protections available for banks on payment of third party instrument Protections against wrongful dishonour or incorrect clearance procedure Situation where the collecting bank is also the paying bank Summary Bills of Exchange Act 1882 or Cheques Act 1957 Cleaning Mechanisms Rules Relating to Cheque Abuse Target Audience Tellers and personnel involved in front office and customers account services; Staff handling instruments processing particularly in clearing and related departments

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Elements of Banking 100 Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies and examination Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : Lecturers 3 Days 10-12 Apr, 25-27 Jun, 2-4 Oct BIBF Faculty and Guest

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

90

COURSE #: 104

Introduction To Bankcard Industry

Description The course gives an overview of the Bank card business, the transactions process, charge backs and disputes, the bank card issuer and the acquirer. Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will be able to understand the fundamentals of the Bankcard industry and learn about the different type of Bankcards in the market. Content Highlights Identify the players in bankcard transactions and responsibilities Identify terms associated with transactions process Learn how different POS devices affect the authorisation process Clearing and settlements Learn about posting and fees Understand charge-back, arbitration and compliance cases Learn about bankcard products and services List elements of the credit card review process Explain fraud, finance and legal issues related to issuer Understand merchant sales and investigative procedures Identify procedures for setting merchant discounts and setting up new merchants Explain how sales transactions are processed Identify merchants fraud Payments through Web Portals

Target Audience All bank staff who want to know about the Bankcard industry; New university graduates who just joined the banking field; University undergraduates who will soon join the practical life Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course will be conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 2-3 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

91

COURSE #: 107A

BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part I

Description After the completion of the BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part I participants will be able to transfer the knowledge they acquired in the programme to skills in workplace. The programme has been geared to prepare them with the theoretical knowledge and practical application of that in work place through case studies, role plays, presentations and projects. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: A clear knowledge on the process of operations in domestic banking An introduction to the central banking operations, roles and responsibilities in the nations economy Understanding of the various types of conventional banking products and customer An idea of the overview of domestic banking An introduction to the role of central banks An understanding of the various types of bank customers and accounts Knowledge of international trade Development of Islamic banking Anti money laundering awareness Identify the elements of a project and project management framework Identify the key elements of project management and tools for strategic planning and project selection during project initiation Identify the components and principle of cost management Define the elements of organisational planning, discuss staff acquisition and explain how to negotiate successfully Identify the key aspects of project communication planning Discuss and classify project risks and the tools of risk identification To provide participants with an overview of the budgeting process that takes place in an organisation To encourage participants to apply the budgeting concepts to their own department in their organisation To stimulate discussion on budgeting and cost control techniques

Target Audience The course is targeted at individuals: Who are currently employed as Branch Managers Who are planning to become Branch Managers Whose career path will lead him/her to become a Branch Manager Prerequisites None required Course Structure Lectures, Discussions, Video Shows, Interactions and Examination Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 11 days 15-29 Apr BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

92

COURSE #: 107B

BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part II

Description After the completion of the BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part II participants will be able to transfer the knowledge they acquired in the programme to skills in workplace. The programme has been geared to prepare them with the theoretical knowledge and practical application of that in work place through case studies, role plays, presentations and projects. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Possess a strong understanding of what is customer service Have identified their individual strengths and weaknesses, through awareness survey of their own customer service skills Be able to determine their needs, wants and expectations and identify how to exceed their expectations Demonstrate skills in dealing with telephone calls effectively Demonstrate skills in dealing with difficult customers Manage stress in the aim of higher productivity Understanding of how to develop the appropriate marketing communication mix to address business needs What is advertising, public relation and sales promotion Pros and cons of media, selection and media schedule Target Audience The course is targeted at individuals: Who are currently employed as Branch Managers Who are planning to become Branch Managers Whose career path will lead him/her to become a Branch Manager

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part I 107 A

Course Structure Lectures, Discussions, Video Shows, Interactions and Examination Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 11 Days 17 Jun-1 Jul BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

93

COURSE #: 107C

BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part III

Description After the completion of the BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part III participants will be able to transfer the knowledge they acquired in the programme to skills in the workplace. The programme has been geared to prepare them with the theoretical knowledge and practical application of that in work place through case studies, role plays, presentations and projects. After completing Part III, participants will have to complete a Capstone Project to be submitted & presented at BIBF within 6 weeks of the completion of Part III. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Assess their own strengths and weaknesses to reach the goal of being a Branch manager Nurture individual development and achievement Provide knowledge of all deposits and loans, electronic delivery products and underwriting systems and other bank products and services Strengthen sales and communication skills Improve motivational and training skills Develop operational efficiency and effectiveness Build flexibility and adaptability in responding to changes Help understand growth drivers and income objectives Gain innovative leadership and management techniques and skills Target Audience The course is targeted at individuals: Who are currently employed as Branch Managers Who are planning to become Branch Managers Whose career path will lead him/her to become a Branch Manager

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part II 107 B Course Structure Lectures, Discussions, Video Shows, Interactions and Examination Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 11 Days 7-21 Oct BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

94

COURSE #: 108

Banking Products: Development And Sales

Description This is an interactive training programme on the management and development aspects of Retail Banking Products. This course features real life case studies. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Effectively manage a product portfolio for optimum growth Embrace new technology and advances to gain the edge Confidently develop the winning product strategy Generate increased revenue for your bank Featured case study: Barclaycard & HSBC Content Highlights Product management Key factors when managing products today Effective pricing strategy and the governance process of pricing changes A process for new product development Making the customer at the heart of product development Assessment of the market and competition Business strategy fit The impact of technology Group workshop: From product management to development. Target Audience The course will be of value to professionals in the following areas: Product Development managers; Product managers; Senior Marketing managers; Heads of Marketing; Research analysts; Heads of Business units; Strategy personnel; Heads of Channel; Distribution managers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or

experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other 3 to 6 months work experience in an organisation using product sales skills in their current role Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to experience different ways to develop and position your bank in this niche banking segment, uncover your clients true needs, cross-sell additional bank services, and build a mutually beneficial relationship. Youll also learn solutions that are both tangible and relevant in todays banking environment. This course offers you the unparalleled opportunity to practice hands-on segment management skills using real-life problems. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 31 Jan 2 Feb : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

95

COURSE #:111

360 Negotiation Skills For Bankers

Description Its more than just trying to beat your competitors price! Negotiation is a key skill that, when mastered, can enhance communications and provide better results from communication especially in the world of banking where successful negotiation translates directly into successful business relationships and profitability. This course will teach participants the basics of negotiation, how to prepare to negotiate, ways to respond to negotiation challenges, how to create win-win customer-banker solutions, and how to create sustainable agreements. Objectives This highly interactive programme is specially designed to help participants from the banking sector to: Understand the basic principles of negotiation Prepare for negotiation Respond to challenges Create win-win situations Develop sustainable agreements Content Highlights Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explore techniques for becoming a more skilled negotiator. Complete a negotiation style diagnostic instrument to learn about your own preferred negotiation style Learn when it is most appropriate to apply that style in a negotiation, and when to adjust another style to maximise results Practice a systematic process for negotiating with customers Develop your listening and questioning skills for effective client interviews Learn about specific techniques for understanding your customers needs, exploring alternatives, and reaching an agreement Gain insight into ways you can position your bank more successfully and identify a path forward Evaluate how you can present your credit most effectively in the approval process Learn specific steps to take to overcome seven difficult negotiating tactics Master Workshop: Loan Negotiation and Selling a Total Banking Relationship Target Audience Bankers with various backgrounds will benefit, including community bankers, corporate bankers, credit officers, branch bankers, relationship managers trust officers, and cash managers.

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites Other 3 to 6 months work experience in an organisation using relationship development skills for building business. This course requires at least one to two years of banking experience Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to experience different ways to negotiate with customers, uncover their true needs, cross-sell additional bank services, and build a mutually beneficial relationship. Youll also learn solutions that are both tangible and relevant in todays banking environment. This course offers you the unparalleled opportunity to practice handson negotiation using real-life problems. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 11-13 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

96

COURSE #: 129

Banking Law and Practice

Description This course is specifically designed to develop professionally qualified and competent bankers and financial professionals on the legal framework that protects and supports their operations, products and the end users of their products. Objectives The world of banking and finance is constantly changing and banks are leveraging knowledge and technology in offering newer, better and faster services to their customers. This course deals with the legal and regulatory aspects that have a bearing on the dynamic world of banking and finance. Banking and business laws have been interwoven into the discussion of day to day banking operations discussed and case laws have been included wherever appropriate. There are various newly enacted laws relating to Money Laundering, Right to Information legislation, and Information Technology laws that will be referred to considering their significant impact on the business of banking. Content Highlights Upon the completion of this course, the participant will understand: Legal framework for regulation of banks Control over organisation of banks Regulation of banking business The Negotiable Instruments and the law Case laws on responsibilities of paying banker and of collecting banker Indemnities; Bank guarantees; Letters of credit and Deferred payment guarantee Laws relating to bill finance Various types of securities Law relating to securities and modes of charging Laws relating to obligations of revocable and irrevocable commitments Prevention of Money Laundering Islamic Banking under the support of Sharia Law Target Audience This introductory course is designed for anyone who needs to develop or improve an understanding of the legal framework which supports and protects the business of banking.

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - OTHER 3 to 6 months work experience in a financial institution. Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to understand how to read the laws that bind the contractual agreements between the banker and the client. Lectures, discussions, case studies and exercises will be the methodology used. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 15-19 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

97

COURSE #: 109

CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT SME Financing

Description Lending to SME customers presents one of thegreatest opportunities for commercial banks to pursue growth and profitability; at the same time it ties up a large amount of economic capital and represents substantial credit risk. Taught by an internationally experienced banking and small business operator, this course is designed to give delegates a comprehensive overview of how to build a successful SME banking strategy and how to raise the performance of their institution. It applies to banks in developed and emerging markets. The course will train how to use the planning process to set goals, to control costs and to increase the profitability of clients. The course focuses on the needs of SME customers, defines their product requirements and discusses efficient client relationship management. In addition, it trains on successful sales channel management, cross selling approaches and the introduction of new products and service. The concept of risk adjusted pricing and minimum pricing based on the usage of standard risk costs, economic capital, RAROC and EVA will be discussed in case studies and workshops.The course will give hands-on examples of how to create value by implementing efficient credit decisions and creating up to date rating and scoring systems. Through examples the programme shows how qualitative and quantitative ratios are applied to examine the creditworthiness of clients and transactions. Finally, participants will assess the main risk factors in SME banking; they will learn how to mitigate these risk factors and to use an effective portfolio management. Objectives A comprehensive 5 day strategic management course for banking experts that will help you to: Implement a successful SME strategy Build an SME focused sales force and increase the cross- selling rate Introduce innovative products and product bundles Calculate risk adjusted pricing Apply standard risk cost, RAROC , economic capital and EVA Apply modern credit scoring systems Improve the credit decision process Implement an effective risk limit system Content Highlights Upon the completion of this course, the participant will understand:

Strategies in corporate banking The importance of the planning process for SME banking How to building an efficient SME sales network Effective client management Building a competitive product range Measuring product and client profitability in SME banking Mastering credit risk in SME banking A streamlined credit decision process for SME customers Operational risk in SME banking An introduction to portfolio management How to develop an action plan for your bank or area of responsibilities Analysing Small Business Financials Industry and Business Specific Risks

Target Audience General managers and regional managers; Heads of regional businesses and branches; Managers in branches responsible for SME banking; Experts responsible for sales and distribution; Managers from credit departments and risk management; Experts responsible for corporate strategy and planning; Banking and strategy consultants; Human resources and training staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Consumer and Small Business Lending: 115

Minimum Prerequisites - Other 3 to 6 months work experience in an institution working with small and medium business financing Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to experience different ways to develop and position your bank in this niche banking segment, uncover your clients true
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

98

COURSE #: 109

continued .... SME Financing

needs, cross-sell additional bank services, and build a mutually beneficial relationship. Youll also learn solutions that are both tangible and relevant in todays banking environment. This course offers you the unparalleled opportunity to practice hands-on segment management skills using real-life problems. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 12-16 Feb, 22-26 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

99

COURSE #: 110

Project Appraisal and Financing

Description Corporate and commercial borrowers of banks approach banks to fund long term capital projects like setting up new businesses, expansion, renovation, diversification of existing business. Government agencies approach banks for financing infrastructure projects such as building electricity generation, transmission and distribution projects, roads, bridges, etc. These projects require large sums of money. The payback period of such projects is invariably long. This course introduces to appraising and financing long term capital projects undertaken by bank borrowers. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Differentiate capital projects from working investment funding Describe time value of money concepts relevant to long term project funding Apply payback period, accounting rate of return (ARR), net present value (NPV) and internal rate of return (IRR) methods of computation of return on capital projects Compute weighted average cost of capital (WACC) of a company and select required rate of return (RRR) for appraising a capital project, CAPM Identify, analyse and mitigate risks Select financing structure for capital projects Appraise infrastructure projects Content Highlights Nature of capital projects Time value of money NPV, IRR WACC and RRR Sensitivity analysis Project risk mitigation Financing structure Target Audience Credit Analysts/Account Officers; Financial Controllers/ Auditors; Corporate Banking Personnel; Private Equity, Investment Analysis and Risk Managers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Excel Level 1 315 Corporate Finance 122 Minimum Prerequisites - Other This is an high intensity course and best serves delegates from banks who are practitioners in large project financing for at least three to six months and have some exposure to the mechanics of syndicating loans. Course Structure Lectures, Modeling with Excel, Exercises and Cases Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 9-12 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 A calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

100

COURSE #: 112

Real Estate Investment and Financing

Description This course explores both qualitative issues and traditional quantitative analysis. The intermediatelevel three-day course helps participants understand the key elements of credit decisions involving real estate by describing the characteristics of incomeproperty real estate loans and identifying the key loan underwriting differences between investor loans, owner-occupied real estate loans, and commercial loans secured by real estate. Those responsible for the real estate appraisal function and corresponding regulatory compliance will examine best practices in managing the valuation process and converse with regulators on the Interagency Appraisal and Evaluation Guidelines. Objectives The course focuses on structuring, organising, and effectively managing the real estate appraisal ordering and review function in your bank. The forum gives chief appraisers and other credit professionals who have the responsibility for real estate appraisals the opportunity to expand their knowledge on a variety of issues via structured presentations given by a lead facilitator, guest speakers who are industry experts, and open roundtable discussions with other attendees. The presentations and discussions will cover topics related to having an independent appraisal ordering and review process that complies with all regulatory expectations. The forum presents a unique opportunity for participants to meet and discuss common challenges with their peers. Participants will benefit from the problem solving techniques discussed by their peers, regardless of size of the particular institution. Participants share information, ask questions, and exchange ideas to broaden their knowledge and understanding of the issues discussed. Best of all, attendees will have a network of peers to reach out to in the future. Content Highlights The impact of regulations on what banks can and cannot do in real estate investment and financing How to have an effective appraisal management process Scope-of-Work development for appraiser engagement for a government-related transaction The bones of an appraisal - whats important Cap rates and other economic dynamics in todays markets
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Appraisal review with a chief appraiser Interagency Appraisal and Evaluation guidelines with a regulator Tools for ordering appraisals and preparing evaluations Review classic credit best practices. Learn how to link the loan purpose with the repayment source Find out why there should be at least two sources of repayment, and why the first is typically based on cash flows Come to understand the importance of the borrower/sponsor having a stake in the deal Find out about the pros and cons of loans secured by income-producing property, loans secured by owner- occupied property, and commercial loans secured by real estate Discuss real estate risk relative to apartments, retail space, warehouse, and industrial property Discounted cash flow, sensitivity analysis, volatility, regulatory issues, lease analysis, documentation, and environmental risk

Target Audience The course is for commercial lenders and credit analysts who are not real estate specialists but who need to know more about assessing real estate risk. It is targeted at: Chief appraisers at financial institutions with up to $5 billion in assets Managers of internal real estate appraisal ordering and review functions Managers of out-sourced real estate appraisal functions Staff in appraiser departments at institutions with more than $5 billion in assets Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course BIBF Credit Programme : 117 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Participants are expected to have an understanding

101

continued .... Real Estate Investment & Financing (New)

of the important elements of a commercial real estate appraisal and familiarity with the regulations supporting such business. Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to experience different ways to develop and position your bank in this niche banking segment, uncover your clients true needs, cross-sell additional bank services, and build a mutually beneficial relationship. Youll also learn solutions that are both tangible and relevant in todays banking environment. This course offers you the unparalleled opportunity to practice hands-on segment management skills using real-life problems. This course lends itself remarkably well to highly interactive discussions supported by presentations. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 6-10 May, 2-6 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

102

COURSE #: 113

Micro Finance

Description Learn how to transform the building blocks of your firms operational focus to include a commercially viable push into the realm of Microfinance. The World Bank estimates that there are now over 7000 microfinance institutions, serving some 16 million poor people in developing countries. The total cash turnover of MFIs world-wide is estimated at US$2.5 billion and the potential for new growth is outstanding. Participants will build a solid conceptual foundation and apply this in practice through hands-on case studies and exercises. We will define the strict parameters that encapsulate the area of Microfinance and Micro Finance Institutions, and consider the effects the rates structures that operate within microfinance and examine several institutions that have changed the face of poor nations round the world, e.g. Grameen Bank. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: An understanding of what the effects are of financing the poor through Micro Finance A more strategic understanding of the established and developing tools that can be used to manage and measure risk and rewards of micro finance Content Highlights Gain a more strategic understanding of operational risk in Micro Lending and the tools available to identify, measure, control, mitigate, and monitor it Understand and articulate your institutions cooperation with the identified institutional thrust to make lending available to all strata of the public Recognise what is needed to deliver appropriate policies and programs to address the needs of the poor. Learn how to raise awareness and build collaboration with your management, business, and risk partners regarding management of this type of lending Understand the relationship between micro finance and environmental consciousness, the goal of every institution of today which has a strong forward vision Target Audience Business development managers, relationship managers in credit, line officers, small business finance officers all stand to benefit in getting a
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

broad stroke understanding of this as yet untapped area of business. We also plan to include end users within the group for a conceptual meeting of the minds and needs to resources. This is expected to create a desirable environment where the providers and users of this type of financing can educate and understand each others potential and limitations. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course BIBF Credit Programme 117 Minimum Prerequisites Other This course requires at least one to two years of banking experience from the participants from banks and none from the end users of this type of financing. For participants from banks only. Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to experience different ways to develop and position your bank in this niche banking segment, uncover your clients true needs, cross-sell additional bank services, and build a mutually beneficial relationship. Youll also learn solutions that are both tangible and relevant in todays banking environment. This course offers you the unparalleled opportunity to practice hands-on segment management skills using real-life problems. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 19-23 Feb : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

103

COURSE #: 115

Consumer and Small Business Lending

Description This course emphasises the practical skills of participants involved in each stage of loan generation process in making consumer credit decisions. The course focuses on both personal and small business lending. Objectives Participants will have developed an understanding of the techniques of good credit assessment with particular emphasis on evaluating the risks associated in lending to personal customers and small businesses. Content Highlights General principles of lending Consumer lending Analysis of Personal Net Worth Types of small businesses Loan interviewing and credit investigation Credit analysis Risk in Lending to Small Businesses both at individual and portfolio level Loan structuring & Negotiations Security When things go wrong Installment loans Target Audience Prospective or junior loan officers from commercial banks who want to improve their credit skills; Potential or existing lending bankers; Loan administration staff; Trainee loan officers; Trainee credit analysts Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course Understanding Financial Statements 220 Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants should have had at least 3 to 6 months exposure to this financing segment. Course Structure Lectures combined with extensive use of case studies, assignments and case presentations Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 4 days 11-14 Mar BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

104

COURSE #: 116

Consumer Loan Collection Techniques

Description This course is designed for banks collectors and concisely covers all aspects of effective loan collections. The course serves a dual purpose. First, it guides the participant through the course and encourages ample note-taking and active participation. Second, once the participant has completed the course, he can use the material as a useful reference guide on the job. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Recognise the role of the collections department and the tools available Demonstrate the skills of a successful telephone collections call Integrate effective collections letters into overall collections strategy Demonstrate the skills of effective face-to-face collections visit Determine the appropriate actions to conduct a repossession Be aware of skip tracing techniques that enhance collection efforts Content Highlights Discussion of repayment of the loan with the customer How the banker/customer relationship is controlled The responsibilities of the customer to make payment The means of contacting the customer The maintenance of accurate and careful notes for file The follow-up and referral process Customer confidentiality Customer relations Target Audience Credit Card Collection personnel; Consumer/ Personal Loan officers; Small/Medium business lenders

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course Consume and Small Business Lending 115

Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants should have had some prior experience in a relationship building role as skills gained in such a role will from the building blocks of learning from this course. Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies, video and role play Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 8-11 Apr Lecturers : BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

105

COURSE #: 117

The BIBF Credit Programme

Description This course is introduced to develop the skills of participants for good credit assessment with particular emphasis on evaluating the risks associated with lending to personal and small and middle market business customers. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have developed an understanding of the techniques of good credit assessment Be able to identify, analyse and evaluate risks associated with lending to personal (consumer), small and medium sized business customers Be capable of preparing an application for submission to the lending authority Content Highlights General principles of lending, business lending & security and the problems with business lending Business risk analysis Builders & property developers Trade finance Specialist services for borrowers The credit package & decision Quantitative Techniques Analysis Target Audience Bankers with limited exposure to lending proposals; Graduate Management Trainees; Credit Analysts Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Consumer and Small Business Lending 115 Consumer Loan Collection Techniques 116 Evaluating Company Performance 222 Financial Statement Analysis 221 Minimum Prerequisites Other This is a high intensity analytical course requiring strong math skills and at leat a years experience in credit function in a financial institution. Course Structure Lectures, videos and extensive use of case studies and assignments Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 10 Days 16-27 Sep BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,000 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

106

COURSE #: 117A

BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level I

Description The BIBF Advanced Credit programme is designed to provide participants with a structured framework to help them develop the core credit skills that are needed in the work of corporate and retail banking. Participants must complete Level I to move to Level II. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Screen the loan proposal using the preliminary analysis guidelines Recognise typical profitability, assets and liability structure of types of business List information gathered from different sources to decide upon the viability of loan request Construct a cash flow statement to determine the ability of the borrowing Advice customer in generating sufficient cash to repay the loans Perform sensitivity analysis to assess the reasonability of the hypotheses Content Highlights Applying the lending process to screening customers loan request Loan structuring (overview of three lending rationales) Financial statements and ratio analysis from lending perspective Evaluating financial risks Constructing cash flow format to identify borrowers ability to generate cash Developing cash flow projections to predict business ability to meet financial obligations Performing a sensitivity analysis as a final step in repayment source Target Audience Bankers with limited exposure to lending proposals; Graduate Management Trainees; Credit Analysts

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Financial Statement Analysis 221 Evaluating Companys Performance 222 Course Structure This level uses interactive training methods of a combination of lectures, group discussions, and selfassigned assessments. Video case studies are also featured in this level. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 11 Days : 26 Feb-11 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

107

COURSE #: 117B

BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level II

Description The BIBF Advanced Credit programme Level II is designed to provide participants with a structured framework to help them develop the core credit skills that are needed in the work of corporate and retail banking. Participants must complete Level I to move to Level II. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Use the tools to analyse decisions that affect current assets & liabilities Determine the adequacy of working capital Using the concept of working investment to fund financial needs of customer Decide when security should be taken List the essentials of good banking security and be able to perfect the security in favour of the bank Content Highlights Analysing working capital and liquidity Industry & business cycle risk evaluation Management of future debt servicing The appropriate banking security Loan documentation Target Audience Bankers with limited exposure to lending proposals; Graduate Management Trainees; Credit Analysts Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course The BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level I 117 A Course Structure This level uses interactive training methods of a combination of lectures, group discussions, and selfassigned assessments. Video case studies are also featured in this level. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 11 Days : 3-17 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

108

COURSE #: 117C

BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level III

Description The BIBF Advanced Credit programme Level III is designed to provide participants with a structured framework to help them develop the core credit skills that are needed in the work of corporate and retail banking. Participants must complete Level II to move to Level III. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand why and how domestic trade and international trade differ Understand the concepts of absolute and comparative advantage, and how these concepts in general trend to support arguments for increasing the volume of international trade Apply proactive management techniques to enhance profits and minimise losses Explain the ranges of actions that can be taken to resolve a problem loan Introduce participants to conceptual framework of Islamic banking Provide an overview of Islamic banking products Content Highlights Method of financing international trade Effective loan monitoring Problem loans and remedial management Financing of Islamic products Target Audience Bankers with limited exposure to lending proposals; Graduate Management Trainees; Credit Analysts Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course The BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level II 117 B Course Structure This level uses interactive training methods of a combination of lectures, group discussions, and selfassigned assessments. Video case studies are also featured in this level. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 11 Days : 30 Sep-14 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 275 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 1,100 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

109

COURSE #: 118

Problem Credits

Description This course is designed to assist young professional bankers in the management of corporate problem loans and corporate relationship management skills whether they are new or experienced lenders. The ultimate aim of the course is to improve participants corporate loan portfolio management. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an overview of events leading to financial distress Apply proactive management techniques to credit portfolio to enhance profits and minimise losses Understand the procedure involved in bankruptcy, liquidation and reorganisation Have learnt more effective management of loans Explain the range of actions that can be taken to resolve a problem loan to the bank and borrower satisfaction Be able to use the Z-score model to predict corporate failure Effectively monitor loans and assign quality rating system during the review to classify the loans according to banks lending policy Content Highlights Events of Financial distress Cost of problem loans to bank Major causes and early detection of problem loans Conditions leading to bankruptcy with special attention to law and practice in Bahrain Method of resolving problem credit and reorganisation procedure Viability and liquidation analysis Effective loan monitoring Loan classification and rating system Default Rates and Probabilities of Defaults Non-performing Assets Management Target Audience Credit Analysts; Corporate Banking Personnel; Loan Auditors; Financial Controllers; Branch Managers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses The BIBF Credit Programme 117 Corporate Credit Risk Analysis 119 Corporate Finance 122 Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants in this programme are expected to have worked for at least 3 to 6 months, in credit, collection or restructuring of loans. Course Structure Lectures, group discussions, problem solving sessions, case studies and exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 13-17 May, 1-5 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

110

COURSE #: 119

Corporate Credit Risk Analysis

Description This course describes the practical lending process of investigation and assessment used by the corporate officer to evaluate the potential credit risk in order to reach a sound decision about granting or rejecting companys loan request. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Adequately identify and assess risks inherent in borrowers business Quantify the various areas of risks using SWOT model for analysis Effectively use future financial statements to identify debt-capacity and financial needs of the borrower Properly document the loan using the banks standard loan agreement format Content Highlights Financial analysis and forecasting Credit risk assessment Cash flow analysis Sensitivity analysis Debt-capacity and financial needs Loan documentation Target Audience Credit Analysts; Corporate Banking Personnel; Financial Controllers; Loan Auditors Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Consumer and Small Business Leading Corporate Finance

115 122

Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants are expected to be credit practitioners in banks working in or closely with credit risk management and decision making. Course Structure Lectures, group discussions, modelling with excel; videos plays and case studies. All applications will be using Excel and the participants will be provided with diskettes containing software of financial analysis to enter the financial data of the borrowing customer to assess the financial risks. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 1-5 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

111

COURSE #: 120

Introduction To Loan Syndication and Documentation

Description This is an introductory level programme designed to provide participants with a basic level of understanding of the concepts and techniques of syndication. Documentation structure is discussed to enable the participant to recognise the various requirements of both financial and non financial covenants. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have a basic understanding of the techniques related to loan syndication Know the component parts and types of documentation used in syndication Be aware of the types of loans that can be syndicated and the benefits thereof Understand the regulatory requirements concerning such financing Content Highlights History of syndicated loans Choice of law contract law revisited Enforcement of foreign judgments Sovereign immunity Exchange controls Basic structure of effective loan agreements and other documentation The importance of high-quality loan documentation How documentation for secured and unsecured lending differs Loan transfers and participations Events of default Remedies, enforcement of remedies and rescheduling Loan control and monitoring Ratings, Country Risk and Global Factors Target Audience Credit Managers; Accounting and Marketing Officers; Advance Controllers; Internal Auditors; Graduate and/or Management Trainees; Financial Controllers of Large Corporates; Project Financiers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses The BIBF Credit Programme 117 Introduction to International Trade Finance 140 Minimum Prerequisites Other This course best serves professionals. Already working in the area of project financing and loan syndications. Course Structure Lectures, discussions and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 Days Dates : 8-12 Jul Lecturers : BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

112

COURSE #: 128

Commercial Loan Documentation (NEW)

Description Although loan documentation may appear to be a complicated process that is strewn with hidden obstacles ready to trip up the unsuspecting loan officer, it can instead, be a fairly routine exercise when approached with care and a good sense of perspective about what needs to be accomplished. Additionally such care and attention to detail adds towards ensuring legal compliance in the lending arrangement. Objectives The Commercial Loan Documentation programme provides commercial lending and credit professionals with the skills to ensure legal compliance in the lending arrangement. Participants will strengthen customer relations by demystifying the legal process and will protect their organisations from unnecessary losses caused by incomplete documentation. This course includes the latest revisions to Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code. Content Highlights Establish the importance of completely and accurately documenting commercial loans Determine the required authority documentation and where to obtain it for sole proprietors, partnerships, corporations, limited liability companies, non-profit associations, trusts, and estates and guardianships Ensure viability of legal documents by practicing the dos and donts for completing forms Secure repayment through the correct use of promissory notes for demand, term loans, and revolving lines of credit Ensure first priority security interest in collateral in secured lending under the Uniform Commercial Code Understand and communicate the obligations of revocable and irrevocable commitments Target Audience This introductory course is designed for anyone who needs to develop or improve loan documentation skills as they relate to commercial lending.

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites Other This course is an open enrolment version but assumes that the participant has a sound background and at least one years experience in the credit function in banks. Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the workplace. Youll have the opportunity to understand how to establish between the banker and the client a legally binding and secure set of documentation that shows evidence of the authority to borrow, the evidence of indebtedness of all kinds, evidence of the loans terms and conditions and evidence of collateral in the case of secured loans. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 18-22 Mar, 14-18 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 50

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

113

COURSE #: 121

FINANCE AND ECONOMICS Country Risk Analysis

Description The course offers a quantitative and qualitative analysis of the political, economic risks and creditworthiness of countries. The intensive course will offer a structured approach to the analysis of country and sovereign risk in both emerging and mature markets and will review lessons learned from both the current and previous crises. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, participants will have an in-depth knowledge of the political and economic factors which need to be considered when evaluating country risk and they will be equipped to: Understand the key drivers of country and sovereign risk in both mature and emerging markets Identify qualitative, quantitative and market indicators of vulnerability Recognise the impact of country risk on other exposures Review the lessons learned from the current and previous crisis in various regions of the world Content Highlights Qualitative versus quantitative analysis The role of country risk analysis Factors affecting creditworthiness Lending portfolios Economic risk Political risk Sources of information The role of the IMF and other international bodies Role of Rating Agencies Target Audience Credit Analysts; Management trainees; Account and Marketing officers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Intermediate Business Mathermatics 250 Course Structure Lectures, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 2-5 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

114

COURSE #: 122

Corporate Finance

Description The course offers an in-depth analysis of corporate finance decisions, capital structure decisions and valuation of common financial instruments. It also includes corporate finance functions from banking perspective. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: An understanding of macro approach to corporate finance and learn to link up various corporate finance functions to the ultimate objective of the company Understand various financial instruments a company can raise and their costs To understand the theory and apply, in real world situations the techniques that have been developed in corporate finance Content Highlights Goal of financial management The investing and financing Functions The Dividend decision Corporate finance decisions and value creation Corporate finance decisions in a bank Mergers and Acquisitions Target Audience Credit Analysts; Management trainees; Corporate Finance Exectives Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Basic Business Mathematics 200 Accounting 2: Maintaining Financial Records 211 Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Other 6 months to 1 year experience in any finance role Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Intermediate Business Mathematics 250 Course Structure Lectures, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Instructors : 5 Days : 10-14 Jun, 4-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

115

COURSE #: 133

CFA Level: 1 Course for Economics

Description This course enables participants and facilitate and equip them with the knowledge required to meet the Economics component of CFA level 1. Content Highlights Market Forces of Supply and Demand The Firm and Industry Organisation Measuring National Income and Growth Business Cycles The Monetary System Inflation International Trade and Capital Flows Currency Exchange Rates Monetary and Fiscal Policy Economic Growth and Development Effects of Government Regulation Impact of Economic Factors on Investment Markets Target Audience Investment analysts, Financial analysts; Entry and middle level risk management personnel; Personnel concerned with back office; Candidates preparing for CFA/PRM/APRM; Entry and middle level traders

Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions with an extensive use of case studies, assignments and case presentations. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 25 29 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

116

COURSE #: 140

INTERNATIONAL BANKING Introduction To International Trade Finance

Description This course is designed to assist the participants in understanding some of the important issues, products, services and documentation associated with international trade. Participants will learn how to identify customer needs and recommend appropriate product solutions, assess various risks to both bank and customer in international trade transactions and explain and identify ways of mitigating that risk. They will also be able to explain and carry out the processes involved in documentary collections, documentary letters of credit and contract guarantees, as well as understand the purpose and application of the various International Chamber of Commerce rules and practices. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A practical knowledge and understanding of the aspects of the global business planning process Evaluating the internal and external environment to identify potential marketing threats and opportunities Understand the trade documentation used in international trade Coordinating with other departments to calculate the true cost, benefits, and risks of proposed transactions in order to implement risk management policies Assessing political and economic risks and cultural issues of the target country to establish the financial costs and viability Evaluating foreign currency exchange risk and selecting, implementing, and managing risk mitigation techniques to protect the company against fluctuation of foreign exchange Establishing the most appropriate methods and terms of payment Be equipped with knowledge to avoid trade disputes and protect the interest of their financial institutions Content Highlights Combination of theory and practice involving: International trade finance and various risks involved Documentation in international trade finance Inco Terms Instruments of trade finance

Types of letters of credit and its documentation Uniform customs and practices for documentary credits UCP 600 Sanctions and Political Factors

Target Audience Individuals whose present knowledge or experience in the subject is limited, or who are or are shortly to be engaged in the Trade Finance Department of their bank or organisation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Elements of Banking 100 Negotiable Instruments 101 Foreign Exchange Level I 165 Minimum Prerequisites - Other 6 months to 1 year experience in any trade finance role Course Structure Lectures, videos, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 Days Dates : 18-22 Mar, 16-20 Sep Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

117

COURSE #: 143

Uniform Customs & Practices For Documentary Credits (UCP 600)

Description This programme is designed for practitioners involved in back office operations in the International divisions of banks. The course deals extensively with the structure and interpretation of the Uniform Customs and Practices for Documentary Credits as published by the International Chamber of Commerce from time to time. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be familiar with the uniform customs and practices that govern the operation of documentary credits and collections. Practical case studies will be used to demonstrate the application of these articles. Content Highlights Types of documentary letters of credits Documents and documentation requirements Manual of UCP 600 Risks confronted by banks in trade finance operations Target Audience Individuals who are engaged in the trade finance department of their bank or organisation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Elements of Banking 100 Introduction to International Trade Finance 140 Documentary Letter of Credit 149 Course Structure Lectures, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 28-30 May, 15-17 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

118

COURSE #: 155

Uniform Rules For Demand Guarantees (URDG 758)

Description This programme is designed for practitioners involved in back office operations in the International divisions of banks. The course deals extensively with the structure and interpretation of the Uniform rules for demand guarantees as published by the International Chamber of Commerce from time to time. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be familiar with the uniform customs and practices that govern the operation of demand guarantees. Practical case studies will be used to demonstrate the application of these articles. Content Highlights Types of demand guarantes Documents and documentation requirements Manual of URDG 758 Risks confronted by banks in trade finance operations Target Audience Individuals who are engaged in the trade finance department of their bank or organisation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Introduction to International Trade Finance 140 Course Structure Lectures, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 4-6 Jun, 21-23 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

119

COURSE #: 149

Documentary Letter of Credit

Description This programme is designed for practitioners involved in back office operations in the International divisions of banks. The course deals extensively with the structure and interpretation of the Uniform Customs and Practices for Documentary Credits and Uniform Rules for collections as published by the International Chamber of Commerce from time to time. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be familiar with the uniform customs and practices that govern the operation of documentary credits and collections. The course deals extensively with UCP 600. Practical case studies will be used to demonstrate the application of these articles. Content Highlights Types of documentary letters of credits Notification of credits Liabilities and responsibilities of parties Documents and documentation requirements Transferable credits Expiry date or presentation period Operation of a collection Rights and duties of the parties UCP 600 in detail Target Audience Individuals who are engaged in the trade finance department of their bank or organisation Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course Introduction to International Trade Finance 140

Minimum Prerequisites - Other 6 months to 1 year experience in any trade finance role Course Structure Lectures, case studies video and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 20-24 May, 7-11 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

120

COURSE #: 177

An Introduction To Certified Documentary Credit Specialist (CDCS) Preparatory Course (NEW)

Description The CDCS is a professional qualification of international standard for documentary credit specialists. Banks prefer CDCS entitled practitioners for their trade departments in order to reduce their own risks to a minimum. This course will enable documetnary credit officers to take the exam and equip them with necessary skills designed to demonstrate specialist knowledge and application of the skills required for competent practice. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be familiar with the course contents of the certified documentary credit specialist exam. Content Highlights Documentary credits Types, uses and characteristics Parties to documentary credit transactions role and responsibilities Documentation Issuance and amendments Risk issues Target Audience Individuals who are engaged in the trade finance department of their bank or organisation and who are inclined to write the CDCS exam Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Courses Documentary letter of credit 149 Uniform Rules for Documentary credit (UCP 600) 143 Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Introduction to International Trade Finance 140 Course Structure Lectures, case studies and discussions Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 12-14 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

121

COURSE #: 165

TREASURY Foreign Exchange - Level 1

Description This course introduces the participants to foreign exchange in line with the current ACI syllabus. It deals with what is foreign exchange, terminology, spot and forward rates and developing a basic understanding of the trading in foreign exchange markets. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an understanding of the history and development of the foreign exchange market Calculate the profit and loss figure Calculate spot, cross and forward rates Have an understanding of the FX swaps Content Highlights History and development of the foreign exchange markets and their participants Definition of foreign exchange Factors affecting Foreign Exchange Spot exchange rate and quotations and basic spot dealing terminology Calculating the profit and loss figure Forward FX transactions and its relationship with interest rates Outright forwards and FX swaps Use of Outright forwards in taking currency risk Use of FX swaps in rolling spot positions Hedging outright forwards Creating synthetic foreign currency assets and liabilities Target Audience New entrants to Treasury Dept; Junior Dealers; FX Traders; Corporate Desk Dealers; Treasury Operations staff ; Middle Office Staff; Auditors; Compliance Officers; Risk Managers; System Developers; Other business units where foreign exchange market is an important element in their work; Finance Officers in Corporations / Import & Export / Insurance

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites Other For people that have background and knowledge within the FX and Money market Recommended Prerequisites - BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Course Structure Lectures group discussions, exercises and video shows Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 Days 12-16 Feb, 22-26 Apr, 7-11 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

122

COURSE #: 175

Foreign Exchange Level 2 (NEW)

Description This course follows on the Foreign Exchange Level 1, and introduces the participants to a higher level of foreign exchange. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an understanding of the FX Arbitrage market Will be able to calculate the covered interest arbitrage They will be able to calculate Histroic rate Rollovers Also hedging a forward transaction Hedging a forward-forward transaction Content Highlights FX Arbitrage and Covered Interest Arbitrage Valuation and risk for a forward position Non-Deliverable Forwards (NDFs) Hedging Speculation Time Option Forward-forwards Calculation of historic rate rollovers Target Audience Senior FX Traders; Senior Corporate Desk Dealers; Senior Treasury Staff; Senior back office & operations staff; Senior Risk Management Officers; Senior Officers - Investment Dept; Senior Auditors; Compliance Officers; Senior Risk Managers; System Developers; Finance Officers in Corporations / Import & Export / Insurance Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Foreign Exchange Level l 165 Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Course Structure Lectures group discussions, exercises and video shows Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 18-22 Mar, 13-17 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 Calculator is a must in this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

123

COURSE #: 166

Foreign Exchange & Money Markets Level 1

Description This course is an introduction to foreign exchange and money market instruments and covers the trading of these instruments and also the calculation of purchase and selling prices of the instruments. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A good grasp of the basic international foreign exchange and money markets and how they operate A fundamental knowledge of the cash instruments traded in these markets and the commonly accepted working practices associated with them Thorough background knowledge for successfully participating in BIBFs external programmes - ACI Dealing Simulation and ACI Dealing Certificate Progtramme Content Highlights Introduction to Foreign Exchange Market Maker / Market User Bid / Offer Spread Calculation of Profit & Loss Cross Exchange rate Outright Forward FX Swap & Forward points Short-dates Outright Basic interest rate calculation Money Market Basis & Bond basis Semi-Annual Interest & Annual Interest Present Value & Future Value Treasury Bills Certificate of deposits Benchmarks in Money Market Target Audience New entrants to dealing rooms; Junior FX & MM Traders; Corporate Desk Dealers; Investment Depts, Officers; Back office, mid office and other support staff; Risk dept. Officers; Finance officers Corporations

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites Other For people that have background and knowledge within the FX and Money market Recommended Prerequisites - BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Course Structure Lectures and exercises. This course provides a mock examination. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 Days 4-8 Mar, 8-12 Jul, 4-8 Nov BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

124

COURSE #: 176

Foreign Exchange & Money Markets Level 2 (NEW)

Description This course build on FX & MM level 1 and is designed to ensure that candidates acquire a much higher level of theoretical and practical knowledge of the Foreign Exchange and Money Markets. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A good understanding of foreign exchange and money markets and how they operate Thorough background knowledge for successfully participating in BIBFs external programmes - ACI Dealing Simulation and ACI Dealing Certificate Programme Content Highlights FX Arbitrage Covered Interest Arbitrage Valuation and risk for a forward position Non-Deliverable Forwards (NDFs) Hedging and Speculation Hedging Forward-Forward position Negotiable securities Discount instruments Deposit position-keeping Brokerage Target Audience Senior dealers in Treasury Dept; Senior MM dealers; Senior FX Traders; Senior Corporate Desk dealers; Senior Back office, mid office and other support staff; Private Bankers & investment advisors; Auditors; Compliance Officers; Risk Managers; Other business units where foreign exchange & Money market is an important element in their work; Finance Officers in Corporations / Import & Export / Insurance Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Foreign Exchange & Money Market Level 1 Foreign Exchange Level I

166 165

Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Course Structure Lectures and exercises. This course provides a mock examination. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 1-5 Apr, 16-20 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

125

COURSE #: 167

Introduction To Treasury Operations

Description This course goes in-depth about the back-office of a business and deals in all aspects of the settlements process. The proper documentation process for money market, derivatives and foreign exchange instruments are dealt with. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have knowledge of: The various settlement processes The concept of SWIFT, RTGS The concept of brokerage, outstanding nostro reconciliation The difference between bilateral and multilateral netting procedures Content Highlights Risk management and controls Life cycle of a deal Payments and confirmations Derivatives and Money market instruments settling process Foreign exchange settlement process Market conventions Settlement and accounts, reconciliation procedures Documentation key documentation issues and major types of agreements Target Audience This course will be useful for new employees working in the settlements and operations departments of banks and who want to gain a basic knowledge of the settlements business within the fast growing international markets Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Foreign Exchange - Level I 165 Derivatives Level I 169 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Basic knowledge in the workings of the FX and derivatives market Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies and video Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 9-11 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

126

COURSE #: 168

Market Technical Analysis

Description The course offers an introduction to the Classical Chart Analysis, Reuters Market Screens and analysis of the underlying price and risk opportunities. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Received in-depth training in Classical ChartAnalysis The capability to analyse and read Reuters Market screens The ability to quantify underlying price risk and price opportunities Be able to structure their own trading strategy or hedge positions effectively Content Highlights Introduction (fundamental and technical analysis compared) Line charts-bar charts-candlestick charts Trend lines Support & resistance Tops and bottoms Consolidation, what to do when the market is not trending! Bullish and bearish flags the trend is your friend! Triangles what comes next? Wedges the start of a new trend! Head and shoulder, the classical chart formation and its price targets Key day reversal be prepared for a change Gaps and gap-filling Fibonacci - the stunning technique with excellent results Target Audience Junior Dealers (in Forex, bonds, stocks or commodities); Portfolio Managers; Controllers; Investment managers; Relationship Investment Advisors; those that trade for their own interest Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Foreign Exchange Level l 165 Minimum Prerequisites - Other Those that have an interest in trading FX for either personal or work requirements Course Structure Lectures, discussions and case studies. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 6-8 May BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturer

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

127

COURSE #: 169

Derivatives Level 1

Description The course introduces the history and development of the derivatives markets, workings of the futures, FRAs, IRS and options markets, basic options strategies and interest rate swaps. Objectives On completion of this course participants will have been introduced to the main types of derivatives: Futures, FRAs and Options and their trading practices. Types of Derivatives Forward markets: meaning, types of forwards with special emphasis on FRAs Futures markets: meaning, types of futures, difference between forward and futures Options market: Calls & Puts and pay-offs diagrams Basic option strategies Swaps: Plain vanilla interest rate swaps and currency swaps, calculate and interpret payments on each Content Highlights Historical development of derivatives Futures markets Forward rate agreements (FRAS) Interest rate Swaps The options market: calls & puts Basic option strategies Target Audience Staff recently involved in, or about to become involved in, dealing with derivatives in their banks ; Treasury Operations staff who need an overview of the instruments in order to understand the back office implications; Treasury Sales Desk Dealers; Investment Officers; Finance Mangers Corporations; Corporate Dept. Staff who using derivatives to hedge their clients FX & Interest rate Risk; Risk Managers; Derivatives System Developers; Legal advisors and lawyers; Auditors Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites

before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Foreign Exchange & Money Market Level 1 166 Minimum Prerequisites Other For people that have background and knowledge within the Derivatives / Money market / FX market Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies and video Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 Days 19-23 Feb, 1-5 Jul, 14-18 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

128

COURSE #: 184

Derivatives Level 2

Description The course offers an in-depth analysis of Interest Rate Swaps, Swap Derivatives, Exotic Options and Valuation of Derivatives. It introduces techniques to design and structure option strategies using options or volatility. This course also introduces the Greeks and its analysis and interpretation. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have covered interest rate swaps and swap derivatives Know management of interest and currency risk management Have received in-depth coverage of the concept of volatility Have understood the various types of swaps used in the market Know market conventions and practice Have attained a better understanding of valuing derivatives Content Highlights Forward markets and contracts Futures markets and contract Forward Rate Agreement Hedging FWD-FWD FX Swap with FRA Creating a FRA via an FX Swap FRA Strip Calculations Option markets and contracts Swap markets and contracts Target Audience Traders with more than 2 years in Treasury; Senior FX & MM Traders; Senior Derivatives Traders; Investment & Capital Market Department Officers; Middle office and Treasury operations officers; Senior Risk Managers; Senior Corporate Dept. Staff who using derivatives to hedge their clients FX & Interest Rate Risk; Legal advisors and lawyers; Senior Officers Corporations who need to boraden their knowledge with advanced hedging tools; Derivatives System Developers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Derivatives Level 1 169 Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Asset Valuation 185 Portfolio Management 180 Course Structure Lectures, discussions, case studies and exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 11-15 Mar, 23-27 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

129

COURSE #: 196

Interest Rate & Money Market Calculations


Description This course introduces the participants to the principles of the time value of money. To be able to calculate short-term interest rates and yields, including forward-forward rates, and to use these interest rates and yields to calculate payments and evaluate alternative short-term funding and investment opportunities. Candidates should know what information is plotted in a yield curve, the terminology describing the overall shape of and basic movements in a curve and the classic theories which seek to explain changes in the shape of a curve. They should also know how to plot a forward curve and understand the relationship between a yield curve and forward curves. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Calculate present value and future value using the arithmetic techniques of Discounting and compounding for both a money market instrument terminated at maturity and one that is rolled over at maturity Calculate simple interest rates using different day count and annual basis conventions Fix same-day, next-day, spot and forward value dates, and maturities under the modified following business day convention and end/end rule Calculate broken dates and rates through linear (straight line) interpolation Define EURIBOR, LIBOR and EONIA Convert interest rates and yields between the money market basis and bond basis in currencies for which there is a difference Convert interest rates and yields between annual and semi-annual Compounding frequencies Calculate a cash rate from a series of forwardforward rates for consecutive periods Calculate the value of a discount-paying money market instrument from its discount rate (straight discount) and convert a discount rate directly into a true yield Plot a yield curve, describe its shape and the basic changes in its shape using market terminology, and outline how the Pure Expectations Theory, Liquidity Preference Theory and Market Segmentation Hypothesis explain the shape of the curve Understand what is Probability and its types Content Highlights Cash market: Definition and its importance Call & notice deposits London money & international money market quotations Simple interest & compound interest formula

Money market & bond basis Conversion from bond from money market basis Annual and semi-annual interest rates Discount rate, Present vale & Future value Money Market Benchmarks (LIBOR, EURIBOR, etc) Roll-over loan example Pure Expectations Theory Liquidity Preference Theory Market segmentation theory or preferred habitat theory Different yield curves Interpolated (Broken date) interest rates Position average rates & forward/forward dates Asset & Liability Mismatching Treasury bills London & international money market quotation Commercial bills of exchange/ bankers acceptances Discount v. yield rates Calculate the true yield Certificates of deposit Commercial paper issuance Position keeping

Target Audience New entrants and junior dealers (0-18 Months Experience) in the dealing room; Money Market dealers; Middle office and operations personnel; Auditors and compliance officers; Operations staff with at least 2 years of experience and seniors; Other Trading Room Support Areas; Internal and external Auditors Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, PPTs, discussions and working out of different topics practice questions and analysing the rationale for the correct answers. We will provide the hardcopy of all the formulas for all the topics which will be a useful value added tool for participants when they prepare for the ACI level I exams. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 15-16 Apr, 3-4 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200 A Calculator is a must on this course
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

130

COURSE #: 183

CAPITAL MARKETS Private Equity & Venture Capital

Description This course provides a comprehensive understanding of the dynamics/complexities of venture capital, management of VC funds, deal dynamics, valuation & term sheet analysis and the due diligence process. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an overview of venture capital and private equity Know what the VC needs: the business proposal Know what the VC needs to know: the due diligence process Understand negotiating the deal structure Know the deal structure - the term sheet Understand investment exit strategy Content Highlights The course introduces the participant to the following concepts: The complexities and dynamics of venture capital Management of venture capital funds Performance Measurement: The IRR The Due Diligence process Target Audience Credit analysts/account officers; Financial control personnel; Investment placement/marketing staff; Heads of Private equity; Credit/Market Risk personnel; Corporate banking staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course Corporate Finance 122 Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical Case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 25-28 Mar, 26-29 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

131

COURSE #: 185

Asset Valuation

Description This course discusses the various types of securities traded in the market, its features and terminology associated with the securities. The course also discusses the various types of valuation methods to ascertain the value of the securities. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able: To understand differentiating characteristics of basic financial assets: Stocks, bonds and preferred stock To understand the features of different types of bonds and their relevance in to-days markets To apply and interpret commonly used valuation tools for stocks To apply and interpret bond valuation techniques Understand the differences between straight bonds and bonds with embedded options To apply Binomial model for valuing bonds with embedded options Content Highlights Introduction Instruments Traded in Capital Markets Bond Valuation Stock Valuation Portfolio Analysis Introduction to Private Equity, Venute Captital and Hedge Funds Introduction to Asset Pricing Models Target Audience Entry level treasury people; Entry and middle level traders; Executives in the area of risk management; Executives in the area of investments Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course Basic Business Mathematics 200 Minimum Prerequisites Other Should have either worked in any fiance role, or have general work experience dealing with numbers and calculations Course Structure PowerPoint presentation, discussion, case study, excel assignments and quizzes Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 4-8 Mar, 9-13 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

132

COURSE #: 180

Portfolio Management

Description This course begins with the basics of portfolio management process and gradually builds up into comprehensive topics like multi factor models and macroeconomic models. The course also discusses the practical application of portfolio models. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand Portfolio management process List the differences between active and passive portfolio management List key elements of the capital asset pricing model identify the major theories of portfolio management, including the efficient markets hypothesis, diversification and correlation, the efficient frontier, capital asset pricing model, and arbitrage pricing theory Discuss how diversifying a portfolio can reduce its risk. Explain how risk and return vary for different combinations of assets, leading to the development of the efficient frontier Explain how specific risk differs from market risk, as postulated by the capital asset pricing model Use various risk measures to build a portfolio balancing risk and return Identify the advantages, benefits, and risks of global investing and investing in emerging markets Recognise key alternative investments Understand Sharpes ratio, Jensons ratio and Treynors ratio Content Highlights Organisation and Functioning of Securities Markets Instruments: Understand ADRs, its various types and ETFs Trading The concept of efficient capital markets and three forms of the efficient market hypothesis Security Valuation Bonds Derivatives Target Audience Entry level treasury people; Entry and middle level traders; Executives in the area of risk management; Executives in the area of investments

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Asset Valuation 185 Course Structure PowerPoint presentation, discussion, case study, excel assignments and quizzes Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 12-16 Feb, 7-11 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

133

COURSE #: 186

Foundations Of Investment Analysis

Description The course introduces the participants to trading rules, regulations and practices under the Securities Exchange Commission; basic derivative products; fixed income securities; fundamental and technical analysis. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an understanding of the investment environment Be able to use industry, fundamental and technical analyses to identify stocks for investment decision Have an understanding of the macroeconomic phenomena for investment decisions Have an understanding of derivatives products and markets Content Highlights Financial markets and instruments Securities trading and market implications Security analysis - macro economic factors, industry analysis, financial statement analysis, fundamental and technical analyses Derivatives - options, calls and puts, option strategies, hedging, mechanics of futures trading and hedging with futures Target Audience Traders and Brokers; Investment Bankers and Portfolio Managers; Treasury and Back office Staff; Fund Managers; Supervisory and Investment Staff (Central Banks); Compliance and Control Staff; Accounting Staff

Prerequisites None required Course Structure Lectures together with the use of case studies, discussions and assignments and an examination at the end of the course Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 22-26 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

134

COURSE #: 187

Fixed Income Management

Description The course provides an introduction to the fixed income securities, valuation of bond yields, duration and duration hedging and bond management strategies. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an understanding of fixed income instruments and their terminologies Be able to find out prices, yields and maturity of bonds Have an understanding of the implications of bond prices and yields Have an understanding of duration hedging, cash flow matching and immunisation Content Highlights Understanding bonds and terminology Fixed income arithmetic Interest rates: coupon, market yield, inflation rates Term structure of interest rates and yield spreads Relationship between interest rates and bond prices Duration and interest rate risk Price value basis point (PVBP) and its relation to duration Duration hedging strategies Convexity and immunisation Target Audience Investment Bankers; Management Trainees; Portfolio Managers; Bank Managers; Treasury Staff; Credit Analysts/Accounts officers; Fund Managers; Financial Controllers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Asset Valuation 185 Course Structure Lectures, modelling with excel, videos and cases Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 15-17 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

135

COURSE #: 102

RISK MANAGEMENT, REGULATIONS AND COMPLIANCE Anti-Money Laundering Awareness Programme

Description This is the introductory awareness programme in which participants will be introduced to the definition and concept of anti money laundering (AML) and financing terrorism (FT), the various stages of AML, and the legal and regulatory requirements and initiatives by the international, regional and local communities against ML/FT. In particular the guidelines and policies issued by the Kingdom of Bahrain and Central Bank of Bahrain (CBB) are thoroughly discussed including the essentials of customer due diligence (CDD) and know your customer (KYC) standards in accordance with the Basel committee recommendations. Participants will be exposed to the predicate crimes that bring about ML while discussions on other financial products and services vulnerable to criminal abuses such as documentary fraud, tested telex fraud and other financial crimes will occur. Special emphasis will be placed on the financial action task force (FATF) recommendations, forty and the special nine, which are the principal sources of AML legislation as well as ML preventive measures unveiled. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A thorough understanding of what money laundering and financing terrorism is Knowledge on the legal, regulatory and operational framework relating to anti-money laundering policies in Bahrain Known the sequences, trends and stages involved in AML Operations Clearly understood the CDD/KYC standards and requirements Been equipped with the techniques to identify suspicious transactions and how to make reports (STR) Knowledge of the preventive measures for the protection of businesses and the general economy against the menaces of ML Content Highlights Introduction, overview and definition of anti money laundering Three stages of money laundering vis--vis placement, layering and integration Video shows demonstrating the various scenarios/ processes of ML How is money being laundered The common products and services money launderers patronize AML and suspicious transactions/suspicious activities concepts and overview The FATF 40 recommendations and the Special 9

The Basel committees essentials/ standards of CDD and KYC Other regulatory issues on ML/FT End of program assessment examination Target Audience All employees of the financial and related industry, who have not participated in any related AML/ Compliance Session; Newly employed personnel before handling any related responsibility Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Elements of Banking 100 Negotiable Instruments 101 Minimum Prerequisites - Other It is expected that the AML Awareness programme should be opened to every newly hired personnel in financial sector and other related businesses such as Real Estate, Precious Metal dealers, Accounting and Legal Firms, other Professions, etc:. This course is only open to permanent staff who have signed off on the oath of loyalty and secrecy favouring their respective institutions Course Structure Lectures, discussions, video shows, interactions and examination Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 24-26 Jan, 7-9 Feb, 2931 May, 3-5 Jul, 21-23 Oct, 27-29 Nov, 18-20 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

136

COURSE #: 170

Regulatory Compliance Programme

Description This workshop is introduced by BIBF to position the Banking and financial institutions in Bahrain and beyond on compliance and matters pertaining to regulations and policies in our institutions operations. The programme is intended to keep the compliance officers (COs), internal control officers (ICOs) and money laundering reporting officers (MLROs) abreast of their responsibilities, duties, limits, and liabilities and to update them on all new changes in regulations. The forum will prepare the MLROs further towards tackling different issues and trends and techniques of operation by the money launderers and criminal individuals and groups that might be unprecedented. Further opportunities will be explored on the assessment and evaluation of our industry, organisations and individuals (MLRO) regarding the level of compliance achieved and setting a realistic target for the future. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A thorough knowledge on the requirements regarding legal, regulatory and operational framework relating to anti-money laundering policies internationally with particular reference to the Kingdom of Bahrain and GCC/MENA Design and implement an effective system of controls within a financial services business Risk profile clients Communicate confidently with regulatory bodies and law enforcement agencies Generate essential management information for use in the evaluation and risk profiling of financial services, products and client types Positively influence the compliance culture of an organisation Increase and achieve the targeted compliance level of an organisation Adopt the appropriate preventive strategies against the dangers of ML/ FT Content Highlights Understanding the Regulatory Environment How to ensure full compliance with domestic legislation and International best practices Compliance program and procedures Key regulatory principles and operation requirements Compliance legal liabilities and regulatory framework Duties and responsibilities of an effective
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

compliance and anti money laundering Effective compliance contributes to good corporate governance Risks faced by financial services business and how to protect against them Penalties on ML/FT, enforcement and their consequences Compliance environment and attitude The framework of financial services regulation and the reasons thereof The history of financial services regulation in Bahrain International initiatives The Regulatory structure in Bahrain Regulators and their powers Regulatory models Rules based Versus Principles based regulation Authorisation, Supervision, Enforcement Independence, Transparency and Accountability of the regulator The role of the compliance officer or MLRO Managing the risk of Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing Investigations, enforcements and production orders A Debate on Ethics and Corporate Governance End of program evaluation - examination

Target Audience Money Laundering Reporting and Prevention Officers and their Deputies; Compliance Officers and their Deputies; Risk managers, Internal audit and Regulatory staff; Police and FIU/FCU/MENAFATF Staff; Persons who wish to acquire a detailed understanding of the threats posed to financial services business by criminally derived property and a practical understanding of how to protect business against this; Persons wishing to acquire a detailed understanding of fundamental regulatory principles and how to assist businesses to comply in the regulatory environment Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course

137

continued .... Regulatory Compliance Programme

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Elements of Banking 100 Negotiable Instruments 101 Anti-Money Laundering Awareness Programme 102 Minimum Prerequisites - Other This course is open to those control functionaries who having been appointed the CO/ ICO/MLRO are handling the responsibilities of preventing or investigating issues relating to ML and FT in either private and or public sectors. Course Structure Lectures, discussions, video shows, case studies, interactions and exercises Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 Days 25-29 Mar, 4-8 Nov BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationals : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

138

COURSE #: 106

CFA Level 1 Preparatory Course For Quantitative Methods

Description This course enables participants and facilitate and equip them with the knowledge required to meet the quantitative methods part of the CFA level 1. Content Highlights Time Value of Money Probability Probability Distributions and Descriptive Statistics Sampling and Estimation Hypothesis Testing Correlation Analysis and Regression Time Series Analysis Simulation Analysis Technical Analysis Target Audience Investment analysts, Financial analysts; Entry and middle level risk management personnel; Personnel concerned with back office; Candidates preparing for CFA/PRM/APRM; Entry and middle level traders

Prerequisites None Required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop sessions with an extensive use of case studies, assignments and case presentations. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 22-26 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

139

COURSE #: 136

Developing A Ready-To-Use Compliance Framework

Description This course is specifically designed to develop a knowledge base among compliance officers of banks and other financial institutions. This could be a critical resource because all regulatory authorities advise that an MLRO or Compliance Officer present a report to senior management, but do not specify the format for such a report. Objectives The report of an MLRO would serve its purpose best if it focused on outcomes, rather than listing a lot of statistics. In particular, it should conclude on the effectiveness of the firms AML and compliance systems and controls, and should make appropriate recommendations for improvement in the management of risks and priorities, includingoptimal use of resources. This is as per the stated purpose of international regulation which requires financial institutions to achieve high standards of compliance and controls based on risk perception rather than rule adherence. Content Highlights Benefits of using a formalised paper to support a report Those within the bank responsible for antimoney laundering systems and controls, and the structure within which they operate AML Governance framework Report on operation of systems and controls Staff training Information to senior management Documentation of policies and risk assessments Arrangements for monitoring effectiveness of systems and controls Customers and CDD processes Record keeping Court orders, etc Conclusions and recommendations for action Conclusion: Overall assessment of systems and controls Suspicious transaction reporting : Internal and external Target Audience This course is designed and specifically targeted at compliance Officers and MLROs of all financial institutions, gatekeeper organisations, etc Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please

consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Anti-Money Laundering Awareness Programme 102 Regulatory Compliance Programme 170 Minimum Prerequisites Other This course is open to those control functionaries who having been appointed the CO/ ICO/MLRO and /or are handling the responsibilities of preventing or investigating issues relating to ML and FT in either private and or public sectors. Course Structure This practical course relies on a variety of training approaches to transfer skills back to the client group to parley into a successful compliance function that conforms to the strict regulations and international conventions. Youll have the opportunity to understand and get a good grip on how to manage your critical control function effectively and with strength of purpose and self confidence. This is especially useful as no regulatory system has formulated a comprehensive compliance framework as yet but requires the compliance officer to adhere strictly to the demands of the regulation on a zero compromise basis. Participants will develop a useful framework hands on in a structured working group to build the best tools for their organisations particular needs Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 20-23 May, 11-13 & 15 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

140

COURSE #: 137

Business Of Money Exchange & AML

Description This is a basic course in Foreign Exchange & AML for the beginner to grasp the important concepts. This course will prepare the participant for the basic knowledge acquiring in the Foreign Exchange & AML. It deals with what is foreign exchange, terminology, spot and forward rates and develop a basic understanding of the trading in foreign exchange markets. This course also deals in Money laundering deterrence is an area of increasing business and regulatory concern for the financial services sector. The challenge is that training tends to focus narrowly on the requirements yet loses sight of the training objectives for money laundering. The course also deals with exchange control regulations with respect to all aspects of Foreign Exchange transactions including dealing in Money changers. Objectives Upon completion of this course the participants with no prior Forex and AML knowledge, should be able to: Understand the history of foreign exchange markets Know the different types of Foreign exchange transactions and documentation, recognising relevant basic business rules Able to know the basic structure of Foreign Exchange Dealing room purposes and organization Foreign Exchange operations supporting the dealing room Understand the market practices, market convention & quotes Prepare quoting customer rates Understand Spot markets Why currencies fluctuate Short term & long term affecting capital flows Understand Central Bank interventions Prepare basic dynamics and structures of forward markets Understand the role of dealer, broker, exchange houses and money changers Exchange control regulations Be able to interpret the quotes given by the exchange companies and be able to quote the appropriate rate for the customer transactions Be able to know the different types of rates offered by exchange company To enable participants to understand what money laundering really is and to explore the techniques used by money launderers To consider the rules and regulations applying and think through the issues attached to suspicion and reporting
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Understand the mind of a money launderer Be able to consider the control structures they would wish to employ

Content Highlights Forex principles, Forex reporting framework: basic concepts Quoting spot, cross and forward rates: basic concepts Computing spot and cross rates: cash and forward transactions Forex Market practices Nature and function of Forex market Operations in the Trading Room Funds Management in the Exchange market Factors affecting exchange rates, Control of Treasury operations Exchange control regulations for customers, exchange houses and money changers What is money laundering, Structure of dirty money Recent and classic cases, How has regulation developed The role of FATF & The FATF principles Local legislation, The Wolfsberg Principles Susceptibility of a firm to money laundering Role of the Money Laundering Reporting Officer How to implement a reporting structure Policies, Suspicion, Tipping off, Documents retention Know your client, Client acceptance, Client identification Transaction monitoring. Investigating and producing an audit trail Reporting suspicions, Testing the quality of reporting Controls and compliance, Role of internal and external audit Target Audience Those individuals who wish to pursue their career in Money Exchange brokers with little or no forex & AML knowledge or experience and whose current or future responsibilities may require knowledge of basic forex and AML. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has

141

continued .... Business Of Money Exchange & AML

been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Anti-Money Laundering Awareness Programme 102 Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants should be working in Exchange Companies and must have signed the oath of loyalty and secrecy to their employers. Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and practical workshop exercises. Note: This course is non examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 29-31 Jan, 18-20 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

142

COURSE #: 139

Corporate Governance

Description This course provides the participants with the understanding of emerging best practices in Corporate Governance and helps them understand its implications for their organisation. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will develop an understanding of the implications of Good Corporate Governance in general and its implications for banks. The course provides guidance on meeting the statutory requirements of defining the rights and responsibilities of all corporate stake holders; provides disclosures and transparency in financial statements and independence of auditors. Corporate responsibility, business ethics, international best practices and CBB regulations are discussed. Content Highlights Formal structure of company Responsibilities & independence of Board Role of CEO and CFO Transparency and Disclosure in Financial statements Auditors independence Shareholder rights Corporate responsibility Business ethics Role of regulators CBB regulations on Transparency and Corporate governance Target Audience Board of Directors; Senior Management; Compliance Officers; Legal Advisors; Internal & External Auditors Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Elements of Banking Country Risk Analysis Corporate Finance I Understanding Financial Statements

100 121 122 220

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Participants must be working in or supporting senior control functions in banks and financial institutions Recommended Prerequisites BIBF Course Evaluation of Company Performance 222 Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 18-19 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

143

COURSE #: 161

Introduction To Basel III

Description Basel-II regulation on capital has changed the environment of the banking industry. A banks management is confronted with various issues of what they have been practicing so far and what should be the best practices within the Basel-II perspective. This course introduces Basel-II and goes on to Basel III makes the participants aware of the various issues facing Basel-III Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Analyse why capital is the central issue in banks Understand the three pillars of the Basel-II framework and what does this entail for banks Distinguish between credit, market and operational risk and understand how they are operationalised in Basel-II Understand the Central Banks role in risk based supervision of financial institutions Understand the meaning of Economic Capital Content Highlights How and why banks are different from other businesses Why do banks need capital Importance of capital in banks The risk environment of banks Review of the key concepts in Basel-I The need for Basel-II Pillar I: Minimum capital requirements Credit risk: Standardised approach and internal ratings based approach Market risk Operational risk Calculations RAROC The second and third pillars Target Audience Senior bank executives; Functional and operational division heads; Risk management executives Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF course Analysing Bank financial statements

266

Minimum Prerequisites Other Candidates should be working in a bank for at least six months Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussions and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 27-29 Feb, 2-4 Oct Lecturers : BIBF Faculty and Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

144

COURSE #: 181

Introduction To Asset Liability Management

Description This is a basic course on ALM. It explains the process of ALM in banks and its importance. The course also discusses the risks facing banks in the context of to-days business environment and how ALM can be used as a risk management tool. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Learn to analyse management of both sides of balance sheet of a financial institution facing different risks Understand the relationship between central banks and interest rate fluctuations Analyse and interpret yield curves Know of the different models used to measure risk in the ALM context Content Highlights Analysing a banks balance sheet Various risks faced by a bank The concept of ALM in banks Risk management through ALM The Central Bank and the interest rate risk Term structure of interest rates The re-pricing model Maturity model Duration model Liquidity risk Liability-side liquidity risk Asset-side liquidity risk ALCO Target Audience Entry level Treasury executives; Traders and financial control executives; Investment analysts; Financial analysts Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF course Analysing Bank Financial Statements

266

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Candidates must have bankiing experience for at least 3 -6 months Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 22-25 Jan, 15-18 Jul Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Note: This course is examinable Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

145

COURSE #: 188

Risk Management And Value At Risk (VaR)

Description: This course introduces the concept of risk in business and discusses in depth the meaning of financial risk and how this risk is quantified. It touches upon different types of financial risks faced by a business and main statistical tools used to measure these risks. It discusses in depth the concept of Value at risk(VaR) method of measuring market risk. The course also covers ways to manage market risk. Objectives: Upon completion of this course participants will be able to: Understand the general meaning of risk in business Understand and analyse the concept of financial risks in business Different types of financial risks faced by a business How to use statistical tools to measure risk Understand what is market risk Different types of market risks Analyse and interpret standardised and VaR models of market risk Calculate VaR Analyse the three different methods to calculate VaR How are these risks managed? Content Highlights: What is market risk? What are standardised and VaR models to calculate market risk? Analyse VaR model Variance covariance, historical and montecarlo simulation to calculate VaR Delta, Gamma and Vega hedging to manage market risks. Target Audience Middle level to higher level risk management executives. Pre-requisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF course Derivatives - Level 2 184 Minimum Prerequisites - Other 1 years work experience as a Risk Manager Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, PPTs, discussions and working out of different topics practice questions and analysing the rationale for the correct answers. Case Study, Excel Exercises will also be a part of this course. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 17-20 Jun, 18-21 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

146

COURSE #: 194

Finance Skills For All

Description This is an introductory course in finance which is ideal for non finance professionals. Entry level candidates in the area of finance will also benefit from this course. This 3 day course will give an overview of all aspects of finance, starting from analysis of financial statements to time value of money including special topics in the area of international finance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Know how to read and interpret Annual Reports Develop the finance sense to understand and make judgments regarding normal day to day finance that one would encounter. Know how to calculate and understand present values and future values Understand the finance functions undertaken in a business entity Content Highlights What are financial statements Reading the annual report A case study in financial statement analysis The financial system Linking accounting, finance and economics Time value of money Risk and return Financial management: an overview Foundations of international finance

Target Audience Entry level people in the area of finance; Entry/ middle level executives from any other areas other than finance Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course is structured as power point presentation, discussions, quizzes, practice exercises and case studies. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 6-10 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 A Calculator is a must on this course

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR BANKING


Duration 6 3 2 10+1 10+1 10+1 3 3 5 5 4 5 5 4 4 10 10+1 10+1 10+1 5 5 5 5 118 119 120 128 18-22 1-5 8-12 14-18 117C 13-17 1-5 117B 117A 117 26.. 11 3-17 30 14 116 115 113 19-23 11-14 8-11 16-27 112 110 6-10 109 12-16 129 111 15-19 22-26 108 31 .. .. 2 11-13 107C 107B 17 1 7-21 107A 15-29 104 2-3 101 10-12 25-27 100 19-26 1-8 6-13 8-15 23-30 2-4 CODE JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV 4-11 DEC

NO COURSE TITLE

BANKING OPERATIONS

Elements of Banking

Negotiable Instruments

Introduction to Bankcard Industry

The BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part 1

The BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part II

The BIBF Branch Manager Programme Part III

Banking Products: Development and Sales

360 Negotiation Skills for Bankers

Banking Law and Practice

CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT

10

SME Financing

11

Project Appraisal & Financing

9-12 2-6

BIBF CLOSED

12

Real Estate Investment and Financing

13

Micro Finance

14

Consumer & Small Business Lending

15

Consumer Loan Collection Techniques

16

The BIBF Credit Programme

17

The BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level I

18

The BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level II

19

The BIBF Advanced Credit Programme Level III

20

Problem Credits

21

Corporate Credit Risk Analysis

22

Introduction to Loan Syndication & Documentation

23

Commercial Loan Documentation

147

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

148

NO COURSE TITLE 4 5 5 5 3 3 5 3 177 12-14 149 20-24 155 4-6 143 28-30 140 18-22 16-20 15-17 21-23 7-11 133 25-29 122 10-14 4-8 121 2-5

Duration

CODE JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

FINANCE AND ECONOMICS

24

Country Risk Analysis

25

Corporate Finance

26

CFA Level 1 Preparatory Course for Economics

INTERNATIONAL BANKING

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

27

Introduction to International Trade Finance

28

Uniform Customs & Practices for Documentary Credit (UCP 600)

29

Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantess (URDG 758)

30

Documentary Letter of Credit

31

An Introduction to Certified Documentary Credit Specialist (CDCS) Preparatory Course (NEW) 5 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 2 4 5 5 5 3 186 187 180 185 12-16 22-26 183 196 25-28 4-8 184 169 19-23 11-15 15-16 3-4 168 167 6-8 1-5 176 1-5 166 4-8 175 18-22 13-17 8-12 165 12-16 22-26

TREASURY

32

Foreign Exchange - Level 1

7-11 4-8 16-20 9-11 14-18 23-27

33

Foreign Exchange - Level 2 (NEW)

BIBF CLOSED

34

Foreign Exchange & Money Markets - Level 1

35

Foreign Exchange & Money Markets - Level 2 (NEW)

36

Introduction to Treasury Operations

37

Market Technical Analysis

38

Derivatives - Level 1

39

Derivatives - Level 2

40

Interest Rate & Money Market Calculations

CAPITAL MARKETS 26-29 9-13 7-11 15-17

41

Private Equity & Venture Capital

42

Asset Valuation

43

Portfolio Management

44

Foundations of Investment Analysis

45

Fixed Income Management

NO COURSE TITLE 3 5 5 4 3 2 3 4 4 5 194 6-10 188 181 22-25 17-20 161 27-29 15-18 139 137 29-31 136 20-23 106 22-26 170 25-29 102 24-26 7-9 29-31 3-5

Duration

CODE JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

RISK MANAGEMENT, REGULATIONS & COMPLIANCE 21-23 27-29 18-20 4-8 11-13 & 15 18-20 18-19 2-4 18-21

46

Anti Money Laundering Awareness Program

47

Regulatory Compliance Programme

48

CFA Level 1 Preparatory course for Quantitative Methods

49

Developing a Ready-to-Use Compliance Framework

50

Business of Money Exchange & AML

BIBF CLOSED

51

Corporate Governance

52

Introduction to Basel III

53

Introduction to Asset Liability Management

54

RISK Management & Value at Risk (VaR)

55

Finance Skills for All

149

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

153

Centre for Accounting and IT Information Technology Courses

intro

The Centre for Accounting and IT offers many public courses in IT. Most of the offerings are Microsoft Office 2007 multi-level courses. Access, Excel and Word are offered at three levels: Basic, Intermediate and Advanced. We encourage participants to ensure that they are enrolled on the courses at the right level. Enroling on the courses at the wrong level will not be conducive to good participatory learning for all involved. If in doubt as to the appropriate level, participants (or their representatives) should contact us and our specialist tutors will be pleased to provide advice on the appropriate level to enrol at. If necessary, for a small testing fee, we can arrange diagnostic tests. In most cases with pre-requisites we will insist that the pre-requisite requirements are complied with. PROFESSIONAL COURSES In addition to the open courses conducted at BIBF, details of which are contained in this catalogue, a series of professional courses are conducted to prepare candidates for Professional Qualifications in Information Technology. These include: ICDL: International Computer Driving Licence Approved Centre BIBF is an ICDL-GCC Foundation Approved Training and Testing Centre for ICDL. We are committed to IT Literacy and are happy to provide the training which prepares candidates for this international certification. Our systems and our highly qualified and experienced trainers are geared to the support of candidates in their quest to get their ICDL certification. Our facilities are of the highest standard. We are in the process of seeking approval from ICDL-GCC Foundation to offer the ICDL ADVANCED program which consists of four modules thus: Access, Excel, PowerPoint and Word. This is for those that want to demonstrate their higher level of skill in these MS Office tools. For further details, please contact Mrs Najma Ghuloom on tel: 17815562 or email: najma@bibf.com ICDL Programme Description Programme Name: International Computer Driving License (ICDL)

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

154

continued .... Centre for Accounting and IT Information Technology Courses

Awarding Body: ICDL GCC Foundation Candidates Eligibility Criteria: Anyone who needs to demonstrate to an international standard that they are fully competent in the use of personal computer applications is eligible Delivery mode: There will be 100 hours of classroom teaching covering all the 7 modules, made up of lectures, practical computer exercises and test practice. Students will be expected to spend about 40 hours in self-study including practising on their own in order to be fully prepared for the ICDL International standardised test. Tests will be attempted by students on completing each module Language: BIBF can train or test in either English or Arabic Attendance requirement: Enrolled students will be required to attend time tabled classes according to existing BIBF attendance policy. Only students who meet the attendance requirements will be allowed to take the ICDL tests Duration: 100 hours training plus 7 tests of one hour duration MODULES Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Module 5 Module 6 Module 7

Concepts of Information Technology (IT) Using the Computer and Managing Files Word Processing Spreadsheet Database Presentation Information and Communication

Module 1: Concepts of Information Technology (IT) (15 hours) 1 General Concepts 2 Hardware 3 Software 4 Information Networks 5 The Use Of IT In Everyday Life 6 Health And Safety, Environment 7 Security 8 Copyright And The Law Module 2: Using the Computer and Managing Files (10 hours) 1 Computer Environment
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

155

continued .... Centre for Accounting and IT Information Technology Courses

2 3 4 5

Desktop Managing Files Viruses Print Management

Module 3: Word Processing (15 hours) 1 Using The Application 2 Main Operations 3 Formatting 4 Objects 5 Mail Merge 6 Prepare Outputs Module 4: Spreadsheet (15 hours) 1 Using The Application 2 Cells 3 Worksheets 4 Formulas And Functions 5 Formatting 6 Charts / Graphs 7 Prepare Outputs Module 5: Database (15 hours) 1 Using The Application 2 Tables 3 Forms 4 Retrieve Information 5 Reports 6 Prepare Outputs Module 6: Presentation (15 hours) 1 Getting Started 2 Developing A Presentation 3 Text And Images 4 Charts/Graphs Drawn Objects 5 Slide Show Effects 6 Prepare Output Module 7: Information and Communication (15 hours) 1 The Internet 2 Web Navigation 3 Web Searching 4 Electronic Mail
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

156

continued .... Centre for Accounting and IT Information Technology Courses

5 Messaging 6 Mail Management The AAT Programme What is an accounting technician? The term covers a huge variety of accounting jobs, from administration to head of finance. You could find yourself in forensic accounting, corporate finance, tax, insolvency in fact, any number of exciting areas. It all depends on where you work, the experience you gain and how ambitious you are. Awarding Body The AAT (Association of Accounting Technicians) is the UKs leading qualification and membership body for accounting staff. It award around 90% of all vocational qualifications in accounting, and is sponsored by the professional accounting bodies CIPFA, ICAEW, CIMA and ICAS. It is based in London, UK. The AAT Accounting Qualification The AAT Accounting Qualification is divided into three levels, each providing you with a new set of skills underpinned by knowledge. Each qualification level is made up of several learning and assessment areas, and at the final level youll have the option to tailor your training. Every level is a qualification in its own right, and completing the final level leads to the full AAT Accounting Qualification. You dont need previous qualifications or experience to study for the AAT, but if you have them you could begin at a higher level. AAT Skill check is a short online test which evaluates your skills and knowledge, and recommends a starting level which you can talk through with the BIBF. Level 2 Certificate in Accounting At Level 2 youll get to know finance administration, including double-entry bookkeeping, basic costing principles and purchase, sales and general ledgers. Talk to us at the BIBF to find out more details about the subjects at this level. Obviously this will be the level for you if you are new to finance or looking to brush up your foundation knowledge and skills Approximately equivalent to GCSE grades A C, Standard Grades and Intermediate 2s
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

157

continued .... Centre for Accounting and IT Information Technology Courses

Level 3 Diploma in Accounting At Level 3 you will encounter more complex financial processes, including final accounts for sole traders and partnerships, reports and returns and professional ethics. Talk to us at the BIBF to find out more details about the subjects at this level. Obviously this will be the level for you if you are looking to develop your intermediate accounting skills Approximately equivalent to: A-Levels or Scottish Highers. Level 4 Diploma in Accounting (Level 8 in Scotland) Finally, Level 4 covers financial team leader skills, including financial statements for limited companies, complex management accounting tasks, management skills and specialist learning areas. Talk to us at the BIBF to find out more details about the subjects at this level. Obviously this will be the level for you if you have progressed through Levels 2 and 3, or you are at a more advanced stage in your career and you want a qualification to give you the confidence and proof that you have the skills to do the job. It is approximately equivalent to the first year of an honours degree. What about Level 1? Level 1 of the AAT Accounting Qualification is AAT Access. AAT Access is a short qualification to help you develop essential business and finance skills you can apply directly to the workplace; it includes: Essential accounting procedures, Accounting in a professional environment, Mathematics for accounting, and Creating business documents. These skills are necessary to be able to do well in Levels 2, 3 and 4. BIBF does not currently offer it as a standalone qualification. Other accounting qualifications We offer other accounting qualifications at the BIBF. Please talk to us for more details. For further details on AAT please contact our Senior Lecturer and AAT Programme Coordinator, Mr Hafiz Khan on tel: 17815561 or email: hafiz@bibf.com

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

158

Index

Course Titles Problem Solving Cases in MS Access 2007 & MS Excel 2007 Information Technology for Managers Principle of Customer Relationship Management (A Technology View) Ethics in Information Technology Document Control and Archiving MS Excel 2007 Basic MS Excel 2007 Intermediate MS Excel 2007 Advanced Management of Information Security MS Word 2007 Basic MS Word 2007 Intermediate MS Word 2007 Advanced MS Access 2007 Basic MS Access 2007 Intermediate MS Access 2007 Advanced MS PowerPoint 2007 MS Outlook 2007 Business Continuity Management BCM Project Management Fundamentals Project Management - Scheduling & Cost Control IT Project Management MS Project 2007

Page 159 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181

Code 304 305 306 307 308 315B 315I 315A 328A 330B 330I 330A 340B 340I 340A 350 356 380 394P 394C 394A 395

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

159

COURSE #: 304

Problem Solving Cases In MS Access And MS Excel 2007

Training courses

Description Apply Access and Excel effectively and efficiently to solve real-world business problems in this course. With the case studies that build a practical knowledge of Microsoft Office 2007 Access and Excel capabilities, this course sets the groundwork for applying these database and spreadsheet skills to actual scenarios. These scenarios introduce problems that are likely to face todays business professionals and allow participants to apply the information gleaned from the tutorials to solve them. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Apply the basic concepts of database design Identify the tools in MS Access Create queries, forms and relational tables Use the Goal Seek and Solver utilities to meet a target output for a formula by adjusting the values in the input cells; install and use Analysis tools to perform statistical analysis Create scenarios to save various sets of input values that produce different results; and create views to save different sets of worksheet display and print settings Content Highlights Database cases using Access Database design Decision support cases using Excel scenario manager Decision support cases using Excel solver Decision support cases using basic Excel functionality Integration cases using Excel and Access Data analysis techniques Case studies Target Audience All staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

160

continued .... Problem Solving Cases In MS Access And MS Excel 2007

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses MS Access 2007 - Intermediate 340I MS Excel 2007 Intermediate 315I Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Access 2007 Intermediate (340I) and MS Excel 2007 Intermediate (315I) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using MS Access 2007 and MS Excel 2007 to the extent of meeting the objectives stated in these Intermediate courses. Course Structure This course includes lectures, exercises and case studies. Note: This course is examinable

Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers

: 4 Days : 22-25 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 Description Todays managers are increasingly expected to successfully oversee and understand information systems -- even when it is an area in which they have had little formal training or expertise.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

161

COURSE #: 305

Information Technology For Managers

Information Technology for Managers is targeted at these future managers who are expected to understand the business implications of information technology. Real world examples show future managers how information technology can be applied to improve their organisation. Information Technology for Managers provides a framework for managers to understand their important role vis-avis information technology and it emphasises the importance of working effectively with all members of the organisation to achieve results Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Identify the elements of information technology Identify and describe the information systems supporting the major business functions Identify the key elements of project management and tools Assess the role of the information technology function in a business Define a describe business processes and their relationship to information technology Explain and define the process of IT outsourcing Define the relationship between corporate governance and information technology and how information technology can automate corporate governance Identify the key aspects of E-Business and how it will help the organisation Evaluate the role of business intelligence in the organisation. Identify the concept of knowledge management system and how organisations can can benefit form the system. Content Highlights Strategic planning Business process and it outsourcing Corporate governance and IT E-Business Enterprise resource planning Business intelligence and Knowledge management Target Audience Senior Managers, Managers, Section Heads and Supervisors

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other At least six months management or supervisory experience. Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 17-20 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

162

COURSE #: 306

Principles of Customer Relationship Management (A Technology View)

Description Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is one of the bases of businesses these days. In this course the participants will gain knowledge on the principles of CRM and how technology participated in enhancing CRM within organisations. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Understanding the basic principle of CRM Identify the process of CRM Explain the development of CRM Identify the relationship between data and CRM Explain the involvement of technology in CRM Understanding the basic of a database Identify the relationship between the database and customers data Content Highlights Principle of Customer relationship management History and development of CRM CRM and data management Technology and data platform Database and customer data development

Target Audience All staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 23-24 Sept : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

163

COURSE #: 307

Ethics In Information Technology

Description This course will help participants understand the legal, ethical, and societal implications of information technology. The course offers newsworthy coverage of issues such as file sharing, security risks, Internet crime, identity theft, employee surveillance, privacy, compliance, social networking, and ethics of IT corporations. It offers an excellent foundation in ethical decision-making for current and future business managers and IT professionals Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Explain what ethics is, and why is it important to act according to a code of ethics Analyse the relationships among ethical and social issues that are raised by information technology Identify the main morale dimensions of an information technology society and specific principles for conduct that can be used to guide ethical decisions Explain the concept of freedom of expression and some key federal laws that affect online freedom of expression. Assess how information technologies have affected everyday life Content Highlights An overview of ethics Ethics for IT professionals Computer and internet crime Privacy Freedom of expression The impact of information technology on the quality of life

Target Audience Senior Managers, Managers, IT Supervisors, IT Engineers, IT Support Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other At least six months in an IT Position Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 25-26 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

164

COURSE #: 308

Document Control and Archiving

Description This course will help participants understand the purpose of documentation and how to manage and archive documentation by using both manual and technology processes. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Understand the organisation and to know the functions processes. Understand the hierarchy of documents Know different methods of document control and archiving Understand how technology support the documentation and archiving process Understand the workflow process and how to link it with the technology Understand different applications for document controlling and archiving Understand the technology processes for archiving and controlling Content Highlights Understand your organisation Definitions documents & Records Document types Hierarchy of Documents Document preparation-document preparation process Control of document and records Different methods of document control and archiving Paper Systems (Record Keeping) Technology and controlling Usability Capture Indexing and Retrieval Annotations Storage and Archiving Distribution Workflow Security Integration

Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure: This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 3-4 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

165

COURSE #: 315B

MS Excel 2007 - Basic

Description This course teaches the basic functions and features of Excel 2007. Students will learn how to enter and edit data, labels, and formulas, work with functions, format cells, print worksheets and create charts. This course is designed for students with little or no Excel experience. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Start Microsoft Excel, identify the main components of the Excel window and an Excel workbook, and use the Help feature. Enter and edit labels, values, and formulas in a worksheet, and find and replace a formula. Move and copy data, insert and delete ranges, and work with relative and absolute references when creating and copying formulas. Use functions such as SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, and MAX to perform calculations in a worksheet, and use the AutoSum feature. Preview and control Page Setup options for a worksheet, print a worksheet, and set and clear a print area. Create, format, modify, and print charts based on worksheet data. Content Highlights Getting Started The new interface Working with Excel 2007 Modifying Cells and Data Printing and Viewing your Workbook. Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally used a laptop or desktop computer in a windows environment. Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 15-18 Jan, 6-9 Feb, 4-7 Mar, 22-25 Apr, 6-9 May, 3-6 Jun, 1-4 Jul, 10-13 Sept, 14-17 Oct, 9-12 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

166

COURSE #: 315I

MS Excel 2007 Intermediate

Description This course teaches intermediate-level features and functions of Excel 2007. Students will learn how to work with large worksheets, use 3-D formulas, apply validation rules, use Excels if functions, use Excels analysis functions. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Link Workbooks by using 3-D formulas; and summarise data by using the Consolidate command. Change the View, General, and Calculation settings of Excel. Sort and filter lists based on complex criteria (Advanced filter) Format data points; create combination charts and trend lines; and add and format graphic elements. Use auditing features; add comments and text boxes; and protect a worksheet or part of a worksheet Work with Excels built-in templates; and create and manage custom templates Content Highlights Advanced File Tasks Working with Functions and Formulas Managing Tables Enhancing and Finalising your workbook Target Audience All Staff who use Excel Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Excel Basic 315B Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Excel Basic (315B) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Excel to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Excel Basic (315B). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 22-25 Jan, 19-22 Feb, 4-7 Mar, 1-4 Apr, 6-9 May, 10-13 Jun, 1-4 Jul, 2326 Sept, 1-4 Oct, 2-5 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

167

COURSE #: 315 A

MS Excel 2007 Advanced

Description This course covers advanced-level features and functions of Excel 2007. Students will learn how to create nested functions, export/import data, perform what-if analyses, use the Goal Seek and Solver utilities, record and run macros, and use Share Point services. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Use the PivotTable and PivotChart Wizard to create a PivotTable for analysing and comparing large amounts of data; change PivotTable view by moving fields and by hiding and showing details; improve the appearance of a PivotTable by changing its field settings and applying a format; and create a PivotChart to graphically display data from a PivotTable Use the Goal Seek and Solver utilities to meet a target output for a formula by adjusting the values in the input cells; install and use Analysis ToolPak to perform statistical analysis. Use of Advanced functions. Content Highlights Advanced topics Getting the Most from your Data Excel and the Internet Advanced Excel Tasks Target Audience All Staff who use Excel Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Excel - Intermediate 315I Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Excel Intermediate (315I) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Excel to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Excel Intermediate (315I). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practise the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 8-11 Jan, 15-18 Apr, 8-11 Jul, 10-13 Sept, 2-5 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

168

COURSE #: 328 A

Management Of Information Security

Description This Information Security course is designed for students who want to learn the management aspects of information security. It takes a view from the top and presents important information for future managers regarding information security. The material covered in this course is often part of a capstone course in information security Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Discuss the key characteristics of information security Identify the roles in organisations that are active in the planning process Explain the principle components of information security system implementation planning in the organisational planning scheme Define information security policy and understand its central role in a successful information security programme Explain the organisational approaches to information security Describe the dominant information security blueprint, frameworks and information security management models Define risk management and its role in the organisation. Use risk management techniques to identify and prioritise risk factors for information assets Describe the various access control approaches Content Highlights Introduction to management of information security Planning Security polices Developing security programmes Security management models Risk management Protection mechanism

Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 4-7 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

169

COURSE #: 330 B

MS Word 2007 - Basic

Description This course covers the basic functions and features of Word 2007. Students will learn how to create and edit documents, move and copy text, format characters and paragraphs, create and manage tables, control page layout, and use proofing tools. Theyll also learn how to work with Words integrated Web and e-mail features. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Explore the Word environment; create, save, and close documents; and use the Help system Navigate in a document; use some of Word automated tasks; use basic editing techniques; and use the Undo and Redo commands Select text; copy and move text; and use the Find and Replace commands to modify document text Change the appearance of a document by applying character formats, by setting tabs, by aligning paragraphs and creating lists, and by setting paragraph indents and line spacing Content Highlights Getting started Editing documents Moving and copying text Formatting characters and paragraphs Controlling page layout Proofing and printing documents Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally used a laptop or desktop computer in a windows environment. Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 11-14 Mar, 10-13 Jun, 22-25 Jul, 7-10 Oct Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

170

COURSE #: 330 I

MS Word 2007 Intermediate

Description This course teaches intermediate-level features and functions of Word 2007. Students will learn how to work with sections and columns, format tables, import Excel data, create and modify styles, and work with headers and footers. Theyll also learn how to print labels and envelopes, work with graphics and objects, apply and create templates, and manage document versions. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Create and format sections in a document, create multiple columns, and sort text in columns Work with tables by formatting the cell text, resizing rows and columns, adding borders and shading, using the Table AutoFormat command, and drawing a table Import Excel data into Word tables, use formulas to perform calculations, and link and embed Excel data. Create and modify styles to format text and to set up and use different views, including Outline view, the Document Map pane, and thumbnails Content Highlights Working with sections and columns, formatting tables and working with Excel data Working with styles, headers and footers Printing labels and envelopes Working with graphics and objects Document template and managing document revisions Target Audience Staff who use MS Word Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Word Basic 330B Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Word Basic (330B) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Word to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Word Basic (330B). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 19-22 Feb, 20-23 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

171

COURSE #: 330 A

MS Word 2007 Advanced

Description This course teaches advanced-level functions and features of Word 2007. Students will learn how to perform a mail merge, create and modify forms, work with large documents, and create macros. Theyll also learn how to customise menus and toolbars. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Use the Mail Merge task pane to create form letters, create a data source, work with records, and create mailing-label documents Create forms, modify and rearrange fields in forms, protect and print forms, and discuss digital signatures Create a master document that includes a table of contents, a table of figures, footnotes, endnotes, an index, bookmarks, crossreferences, and Web frames Automate tasks by recording, running, modifying, and copying macros, and use macros in a form Content Highlights Using Mail Merge Working with forms and large documents Creating macros Customising menus and toolbars Appendix A: Sharing Word documents Target Audience Staff who use Word Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Word - Intermediate 330I Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Word Intermediate (330I) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Word to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Word Intermediate (330I). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 13-16 May, 4-7 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

172

COURSE #: 340 B

Ms Access 2007 Basic

Description This course teaches the basic functions and features of Access 2007. Students will learn how to plan and create a database, work with tables, create queries and forms, filter records, and generate reports. This course is designed for students with little or no Access experience. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Organise data efficiently by using a database management system; start Access and open Access database; and use the Help feature Plan and create a database; use Datasheet view and Design view; and create tables and work in tables Modify a tables design; use the Find feature and the spelling checker; and sort, filter, and delete records Set field properties; create input masks; set validation rules; and create single and multiplefield indices Create queries, and sort and filter the results; modify queries; and perform operations in queries Create, modify, and work with forms; and use them to find, sort, and filter records Create reports by using Auto-Report, the Report Wizard, Design view, and queries; and modify and print report Content Highlights Getting started The New Interface Creating a Database Doing more with your Database Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally used a laptop or desktop computer in a windows environment. Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 6-9 Feb, 6-9 May 7-10 Oct Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

173

COURSE #: 340 I

MS Access 2007 Intermediate

Description This course teaches intermediate-level features and functions of Access 2007. Students will learn how to set table relationships, work with Lookup fields and sub-datasheets, create join queries, and use hyperlink fields and data access pages. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Set table relationships, and implement referential integrity between related tables Create a Lookup list field, modify Lookup field properties, and use a sub-datasheet to add data to related tables Create join queries, create calculated fields in a query, and use queries to view summarised and grouped data Add unbound controls, graphics, calculated fields, and a combo box to a form Content Highlights More involved File Tasks Working with Tables Working with Forms Working with Reports Working with Queries Target Audience Staff with some knowledge of Access Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Access Basic 340B Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Access Basic (340B) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Access to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Access Basic (340B). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 3-6 Jun, 9-12 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

174

COURSE #: 340 B

MS Access 2007 Advanced

Description This course on Access 2007 teaches advanced Data Manangment techniques such as: Referential Integrity, Table Relationships, and Modal Dialogue Boxes; creating and running macros; importing, exporting, and linking database objects; optimising, replicating, and synchronising databases; and basic database security. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Use and identify defferent types of table relationships Establish and use referential integrity and understand how referential integrity works to keep data consistent Recognise why database normalisation is important Normalise a database by design and the table analyser and understand when and where to normalise data in a table Create, edit and use a switchboard Create and Edit a model dialogue box Content Highlights Advanced Data Management Advanced Form Tasks Pivoting Data Access and Windows Target Audience Staff with experience of using Access Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course MS Access - Intermediate 340I Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of MS Access Intermediate (340I) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Access to the extent of meeting all the objectives of MS Access Intermediate (340I). Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 14-17 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

175

COURSE #:350

MS Powerpoint 2007

Description This course covers the main functions and features of PowerPoint 2007 from the very basic to the most advanced. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Use the main/key features and functions of MS PowerPoint Create a new presentation; add new slides to it; save and update changes; work in the Outline tab to rearrange bullets; rearrange and delete slides; and insert slides from another presentation Use the WordArt toolbar to make the text in a presentation more appealing; use the Select Picture dialog box; explore clip art on the Web; insert images; and use the colour, brightness, and contrast controls on the Picture toolbar Use the Formatting toolbar; use the Find, Replace, Cut, Copy, and Paste commands; examine the ruler; set tabs; and align text Create objects by using the Drawing toolbar; duplicate, move, resize, delete, align, and connect objects; add AutoShapes to a slide; edit AutoShapes, and align them by using grids and guides; add text to objects; draw text boxes; and use fill colour options Use advanced organisation-chart options; format tables; and draw tables in a presentation. Add and modify action buttons; create and edit custom slide shows; and set up a review cycle Content Highlights Getting started, building new presentations, formatting slides Using drawing tools, working with graphics, using tables and charts, using organisation charts and tables Modifying presentations, building custom presentations, using multimedia in presentations, inserting multimedia elements Advanced presentation techniques, advanced presentation delivery options, using advanced delivery techniques Customising the environment, creating and modifying templates, building a custom slide master Advanced techniques for working with charts, tables, clip art, and drawing tools

Adding and modifying action buttons Using NetMeeting to broadcast a presentation on demand and Using the Package for CD feature Working with shared workspaces; embed fonts and compress pictures

Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally used a laptop or desktop computer in a windows environment. Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 4 Days 22-25 Jan, 18-21 Mar, 13-16 May, 14-17 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

176

COURSE #:356

MS Outlook - 2007

Description This course covers the main functions and features of Outlook 2007. Students will learn how to configure an e-mail account, read, create, and send messages, work with file attachments, & information management . Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Use the key/main features and functions of MS Outlook 2007 Content Highlights Getting started E-mail, e-mail management, contact management, e-mail security, appointments and events, meeting requests and responses Customising Outlook The Inbox Templates and forms Integration Public, shared, offline folders, newsgroups and managing Outlook folders Creating and organising messages, setting delivery options, printing messages Setting up a mail merge Working with contacts and tasks Using the Calendar Creating custom toolbars, customising the menu bar & navigation pane, using advanced search, setting & removing filters Sorting, grouping, and setting rules for messages Importing and exporting data between Outlook and other Microsoft Office applications Working with notes, the Journal, advanced Calendar features, message templates, forms, public folders, newsgroups, and Outlooks security features Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated

BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally used a laptop or desktop computer in a windows environment. Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 15-18 Jan, 16-19 Sept : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

177

COURSE #:380

Business Continuity Management

Description Business Continuity Management (BCM) course is designed for students who want to learn the principles of business continuity and how to manage it. It takes a view from the top and presents important information for future managers and coordinators regarding business continuity. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Explain what a Business Continuity Management (BCM) policy is Understand your organisation Understand risk management Understand business impact analysis. Develop business continuity strategy development Develop and implementing a business continuity management response Undertake exercises, maintenance and review Content Highlights Introduction to business continuity management Risk management Business impact analysis Business continuity strategy development Business continuity plan development Business continuity plan testing Business continuity plan maintenance

Target Audience Managers and Business Continuity coordinators Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussion and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 11-14 Mar, 8-11 Jul, 4-7 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

178

COURSE #: 394 F

Project Management Fundamentals

Description This course teaches the students the fundamentals of project management. Students will learn the basic tools and techniques for developing a project plan, identifying the key elements of a project and defining the schedule. They will also be involved in other activities related to project management. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Describe a project and a project life cycle Describe roles and responsibilities of a project manager across the project life cycle Develop the basic requirements of a project Develop the project requirements document Develop the project schedule Identify and scope out the project resources Manage the project against the baseline Close out a project Content Highlights Introduction to project management Fundamentals of project initiation Fundamentals of project planning Fundamentals of project implementation Fundamentals of project closeout

Target Audience All staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussions and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 20-23 May, 1-4 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

179

COURSE #:394 C

Project Management Scheduling And Cost Control

Description This course focuses on two important elements in project management: Scheduling and Cost Control. Students will learn in detail how to manage the project in an effective way in terms of scheduling, controlling cost, and addressing the pertinent project manager roles and responsibilities. Objectives On completion of the course, participants will be able to: Identify documentation needed to provide inputs to scheduling and cost control Distinguish the various types of common project costs Distinguish various forms of project costs Use the WBS to identify, assign and tabulate resources requirements Predict future project performance based on historical data Convert WBS to a network diagram Calculate schedule using PERT and the critical path method (CMP) Describe the building-block concepts of costing systems Apply job costing and contract costing concepts to project management Content Highlights Project definition Cost estimation and budgeting Resource allocation and estimating Scheduling The Baseline Project evaluation and control Project closeout and termination Job costing and contract costing concepts for project management Target Audience: Staff involved in project management requiring a deeper understanding of the concepts and the costing mechanisms Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF pre-

requisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Project Management Fundamentals (COM394P) and a basic understanding of cost accounting concepts Please refer to prerequisite course description for details of course contents. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Either a Certificate, Diploma or Degree course showing that you have met the objectives of Project Management Fundamentals (COM394P) or Work experience of at least six months in an organisation where you have personally been involved in using Project Management techniques to the extent of meeting all the objectives of Project Management Fundamentals (COM394P). Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussions and case studies and covers both project management and costing concepts. There is an assessment on the final day. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 Days Dates : 25-29 Mar, 1-5 Apr, 24-28 Jun, 2-6 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

180

COURSE #: 394 A

IT Project Management

Description Although project management has been an established filed for many years, managing information technology requires ideas and information that go beyond standard project management. Information technology project management weaves together theory and practice to present an integrated view of the many concepts skills, tools and techniques involved in project management. Objectives On completion of the course, participants would be expected to be able to: Identify the elements of a project; and discuss key elements of the project management framework they relate to IT Discuss the process involved in project integration management and project scope management Describe the various tools and techniques used to develop project schedules and how resource planning, cost estimating and cost control relate to overall project cost management Explain the main processes of project quality Identify the key aspects of project communications management and the processes relevant to project risk management Describe the main processes and deliverable of procurement management Identify the project management planning processes and outputs and explain the executing processes and outputs Content Highlights Introduction to project management The project and information technology context Project integration management Project scope management Project time management Project quality and communication management Project procurement management Project risk management Project closing

Target Audience Project Managers, IT Personnel, System Analysts, System Developers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Basic project management and IT skills Course Structure This course includes lectures, group discussions and case studies Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 16-19 Sept, 9-12 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

181

COURSE #: 395

MS Project 2007

Description This course teaches the basic functions and features of Project 2007. Students will learn how to create a new project file, create and modify task lists, create a Work Breakdown Structure, and work with task relationships. Theyll also learn how to create a base calendar, assign resources to tasks, create task calendars, and create and modify tables. Students will use filters and groups, and theyll sort task and resource data. Finally, students will learn how to resolve resource conflicts. The course is designed for quick scanning in the classroom and filled with interactive exercises that help ensure student success. Objectives On completion of the course, participants would be expected to be able to: Apply Project management concepts; start Project 2007, open an existing project file, and navigate different views; use the Project 2007 Help features; create and save a new project file; and close a project file and close Project 2007 Create a task list in Gantt Chart view by entering the task name and duration, modify the task list by inserting and deleting tasks, and create a Work Breakdown Structure by adjusting task hierarchy Create task relationships by linking, add predecessors and lead time to tasks, and add recurring tasks; explore Network Diagram view and modify the task relationships in it; and use the Task Information dialog box to add advanced task information Use the Change Working Time dialog box to create a base calendar for the project, use the resource sheet to create a resource pool, assign resources to tasks, create task calendars, enter resource costs in Resource Sheet view, and use the Cost table in Gantt Chart view Content Highlights Getting started Working with tasks Scheduling tasks Managing resources Working with views and tables Finalising the task plan

Target Audience All Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Basic knowledge of Windows Vista Course Structure Lecturer led walkthrough exercises are used to demonstrate and explain a set of features. Participants are given a series of exercises to work on independently to practice the new features. Note: This course is examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 4 Days 18-21 Mar, 17-20 Jun, 23-26 Sept BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

182

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR ACCOUNTING & IT: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY COURSES
Duration CODE 4 4 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 395 394A 18-21 17-20 394C 394F 25-29 1-5 380 356 15-18 11-14 20-23 24-28 16-19 23-26 8-11 1-4 2-6 9-12 350 22-25 18-21 340A 13-16 16-19 4-7 340I 340B 6-9 330A 6-9 3-6 14-17 14-17 330I 19-22 20-23 13-16 330B 11-14 328A 10-13 22-25 315A 8-11 15-18 8-11 315I 22-25 19-22 4-7 1-4 6-9 10-13 1-4 315B 15-18 6-9 4-7 22-25 6-9 3-6 1-4 308 3-4 10-13 14-17 23-26 1-4 10-13 4-7 7-10 4-7 7-10 9-12 9-12 2-5 2-5 307 25-26 306 23-24 305 17-20 304 22-25 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

NO

COURSE TITLE

Problem Solving Cases in MS Access 2007 & MS Excel 2007

Information Technology for Managers

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Principle of Customer Relationship Management (A Technology View)

Ethics in Information Technology

Document control and archiving

MS Excel 2007 - Basic

MS Excel 2007 - Intermediate

MS Excel 2007 - Advanced

Management of Information Security

10

MS Word 2007 - Basic

11

MS Word 2007 - Intermediate

BIBF CLOSED

12

MS Word 2007 - Advanced

13

MS Access 2007 - Basic

14

MS Access 2007 - Intermediate

15

MS Access 2007 - Advanced

16

MS PowerPoint 2007

17

MS Outlook 2007

18

Business Continuity Management - BCM

19

Project Management - Fundamentals

20

Project Management - Scheduling & Cost Control

21

IT Project Management

22

MS Project 2007

185

Centre for Insurance

intro

The nature of our services The Centre for Insurance is dedicated to the advancement of insurance as a professional service in the Middle East, providing world-class professional learning opportunities that improve insurance performance. We work closely with our customers to deliver tailormade packages that help their staff achieve corporate goals. Whether our clients seek to improve the quality of their products and services or increase revenues, we can provide solutions. Our credentials and experience The courses within the Centre for Insurance are accredited by the Chartered Insurance Institute (CII) the worlds foremost insurance learning and qualifications provider. BIBF is a member of the Institute for Global Insurance Education (IGIE), which is an exclusive association of independent international insurance institutes united by a common goal to deliver specialised education and training to insurance industry professionals. The highly capable faculty as the Centre for Insurance possesses industry experience and is well-qualified. We have the resources to offer our wide range of professional insurance programmes in either English or Arabic, anywhere in the Middle East. Teaching approach Our teaching style balances theory, practical sessions, site visits where appropriate and also the opportunity to work on real insurance claims. Our unique position in the industry gives us access to business enterprises in international locations, providing excellent commercially aligned training and awareness. As the market changes, we are able to respond in a timely and relevant manner with targeted courses. The Centre for Insurance offers the following programmes: Insurance Diploma Programmes These are the flagship instructor led programmes of the Centre for Insurance and are offered in both English and Arabic. BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) This programme is suitable for those entering the industry and seeking to gain essential basic knowledge of the market and the industry. The BIID programme is worth 60 CII credits via accreditation of prior learning.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

186

continued .... Centre for Insurance

BIID courses include: Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation Motor Insurance Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance Miscellaneous Accident Insurance Medical Insurance BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma (BAID) This programme is suitable for technical insurance professionals possessing industry experience with an emphasis on practical application. The BAID programme is worth 125 CII credits via accreditation of prior learning. BAID courses include: Liability Insurances Engineering Insurance (CAR/EAR) Transportation Insurance Reinsurance Life Assurance BIBF Insurance Management Diploma (BIMD) This programme is suitable for current or future managers with broad technical experience in insurance and possessing market expertise. The BIMD programme is worth 150 CII credits via accreditation of prior learning. BIMD courses include: Risk Management Insurance Marketing Advanced Underwriting Advanced Claims Insurance Corporate Management Specialised Insurance Programmes These are focused programmes in English that combine a practical approach with sound theory, providing all-round skills and knowledge necessary for success in competitive fields. Motor Insurance Technician Certificate (MITC) The courses in this programme designed for motor insurance specialists include: Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Motor Insurance Claims Workshop
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

187

continued .... Centre for Insurance

Motor Claims Process Practice of Motor Insurance Insurance Accounting & Finance Certificate (IAFC) The courses in this programme designed for accounting and finance specialists within the insurance industry include: Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Basic Financial Accounting Insurance Accounting Understanding Insurance Company Financial Statements Analysing Insurance Company Financial Statements Reinsurance Professional Insurance Qualification Programmes These are the flagship distance learning programmes of the Centre for Insurance in Arabic, specially designed to meet the growing demand for competent insurance professionals mainly in the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) region and are awarded in association with CII. Professional Insurance Certificate (PIC) This qualification recognises technical development achieved by those with a growing understanding of the industry. The PIC programme is worth 120 CII credits via a combination of accredited and direct CII credit awards. PIC graduates earn the CII designation of Diploma in Insurance (Dip CII) via recognition of prior learning. PIC courses include: Award in General Insurance Insurance Law Insurance Business & Finance Motor Insurance Principles of Takaful Professional Insurance Diploma (PID) This qualification recognises advanced technical development and is awarded to expert market practitioners. The PID programme is worth 188 CII credits via a combination of accredited and direct CII credit awards. Completion of PID programme after PIC certification enables graduates to earn the prestigious Associate of the Chartered Insurance Institute (ACII) designation via recognition of prior learning.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

188

continued .... Centre for Insurance

PID courses include: Award in Financial Planning Cargo & Goods in Transit Insurances Commercial Property & Business Interruption Reinsurance Risk Management Life Assurance Principles of Insurance Insurance Company Operations Insurance Marketing Basic Insurance Programmes These are entry level programmes designed to develop broad understanding of specific insurance issues and are offered in both English and Arabic. Certificate in Motor Insurance Courses include: Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Motor Insurance Certificate in Medical Insurance Courses include: Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Medical Insurance Certificate in Insurance Claims (General) Courses include: Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Claims Workshop Takaful Programme BIBF and CII have jointly developed the Principles of Takaful unit to help broaden the knowledge needed to operate successfully in the Islamic insurance market. This programme is worth 30 direct CII credit awards and is offered in both English and Arabic. Successful candidates are awarded with the Certificate in Islamic Insurance (Takaful). CBB Minimum Standard Qualification Programmes The Central Bank of Bahrain (CBB) in association with the Chartered Insurance Institute (CII) has made it mandatory for General and Life insurance appointed representatives to possess the Award in General
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

189

continued .... Centre for Insurance

Insurance and the Award in Financial Planning certificates respectively as minimum standard qualifications in the Kingdom of Bahrain. As the Awards are CII examinations, they are recognised throughout the world in both general insurance and financial planning domains, and are much sought after by the insurance industry. Upon successful completion, candidates will be eligible to use the CII (Award) designation. These programs are available at BIBF in both English and Arabic. Award in General Insurance For appointed general insurance representatives Earns 15 direct CII credits Award in Financial Planning For appointed life insurance representatives Earns 12 direct CII credits Afirc Insurance Regulatory Programme This unique programme is offered in association with the Arab Forum of Insurance Regulatory Commissions (AFIRC) with an objective to develop a comprehensive source that encompasses all essential academic and practical knowledge for the workforce of insurance regulatory authorities. Offered in both English and Arabic, successful candidates are awarded with the Certified AFIRC Supervisor (CAS) designation. The CAS programme is comprised of the following four schools: Fundamentals of Insurance Operations of Insurance Companies Regulation and Supervision Case Studies For additional information, please refer to the BIBF website: www.bibf.com

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

190

Index

Category Course Intermediate Insurance Diploma (English)

Title Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Motor Insurance Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance Miscellaneous Accident Insurance Medical Insurance

Page 191 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 214 215 216 217 218 220 221 222 223

Code 401E 412E 423E 425E 470E 401A 412A 423A 425A 470A 413E 422E 424E 433E 440E 413A 422A 424A 433A 440A 462E 465E 483E 484E 485E 462A 465A 483A 484A 485A

Intermediate Insurance Diploma (Arabic)

Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation Motor Insurance Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance Miscellaneous Accident Insurance Medical Insurance

Advanced Insurance Diploma (English)

Liability Insurance Engineering Insurance (CAR/EAR) Transportation Insurance Reinsurance Life Assurance

Advanced Insurance Diploma (Arabic)

Liability Insurance Engineering Insurance (CAR/EAR) Transportation Insurance Reinsurance Life Assurance

Insurance Management Risk Management Diploma (English) Insurance Marketing Advanced Underwriting Advanced Claims Insurance Corporate Management Insurance Management Risk Management Diploma (Arabic) Insurance Marketing Advanced Underwriting Advanced Claims Insurance Corporate Management

Description
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

191

COURSE #: 401E

Intermediate Insurance Diploma Introduction To Insurance and Insurance Documentation

Training courses

This course is part of the BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) covering Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Received a broad introduction to the concept of insurance and will have a general understanding of the insurance market Acquired a basic knowledge of the nature and function of insurance Understand the economic, legal and social environment in which insurance operates Content Highlights History of insurance The concept of risk Risk management process Functions & limitations of insurance Insurable fundamental principles The insurance market and its main components Main insurance classes and covers Agency in insurance Underwriting & rating principles Insurance documentation Claims & office administration Reinsurance Target Audience Insurance employees in the early stages of their career, Non-insurance employees who wish to acquire basic insurance knowledge, Those who wish to join insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

192

COURSE #: 401E

continued .... Introduction To Insurance and Insurance Documentation

Duration : 5 days plus one morning for the examination Dates : 8-12 Jan, 26 Feb-1 Mar, 22-26 Apr, 3-7 Jun, 9-13 Sep, 11-15 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

193

COURSE #: 412 E

Motor Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) covering Motor Insurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Acquired the full knowledge of the principles and practices of motor underwriting Understood the cover provided for private motor risks, goods and passenger-carrying vehicles, and other special types Content Highlights Introduction and history of Motor insurance Contract law and basic principles as applied to: o Motor insurance o Road traffic o Legal system o Motor insurance documentation Application of insurance principles to motor insurance Underwriting and rating principles Fleet rating and schemes The motor market Policy covers for all classes of Motor insurance. Motor claims Motor department administration Motor reinsurance Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss adjusters, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please

consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 29 Jan-2 Feb, 13-17 May, 2-6 Dec BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

194

COURSE #: 423 E

Fire & Loss Of Profits Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) covering Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A clear understanding of property and business interpretation insurance A comprehension of the essential principles and underwriting aspects of property and business interpretation insurance An ability to exercise practical aspects of property and business interpretation insurance Content Highlights General introduction to Property and business interruption insurances Insurance principles vis--vis Property and business interruption insurance Essentials of the Property & business interruption insurance contracts Fire and special perils policy Home insurance Property all risk policy Business interruption policy Special policy extensions and covers Nature of fire and loss prevention Rating and underwriting Maximum possible loss Property reinsurance Claims aspects Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or

experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : 5 days plus one morning for the examination Dates : 1-5 Apr, 15-19 Jul, 23-27 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

195

COURSE #: 425 E

Miscellaneous Accident Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) covering different classes of Accident Insurances. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Gained a broad appreciation of the different classes of the accident department both in regards to policy cover and underwriting Content Highlights Historical development of accident insurance Insurance principles affecting accident insurance Medical insurance Fidelity guarantee (with all sub classes) Theft classes All risks / glass / computer all risks Goods in transit / travel Money Life and personal accident (individual & group) Workmens compensation Liability (limited) Engineering (limited) Industrial / commercial all risks Office combined Miscellaneous extraneous covers Reinsurance / coinsurance Underwriting, rating and claims aspects Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please

consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 11-15 Mar, 24-28 Jun, 30 Sep-4 Oct BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

196

COURSE #: 470 E

Medical Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Intermediate Insurance Diploma (BIID) and provides basic working knowledge to the Medical Insurance concept. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Received an understanding of the health care delivery system and the nature and principles of medical insurance, from the perspective of insurer, administrator and policyholder Received an introduction to the benefits, contract, rating, underwriting and claims aspect to medical insurance Content Highlights Health care delivery systems and structures Risk and medical insurance Insurance principles vis--vis medical insurance Historical development Special features of medical insurance Types of medical insurance plans Scope of coverage Rating and underwriting principles Claims Target Audience Insurance employees; Brokers; Agents; Employees who manage insurance in noninsurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager

or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturer : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 19-23 Feb, 3-7 Jun, 4-8 Nov BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

197

COURSE #: 401 A

: . : 26-22 19-15 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : . . .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

198

COURSE #: 412 A

: 19-23 9-13 : : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600

: . : : : o o o o : . . . 401A : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

199

COURSE #: 423 A

16- : 27-31 20 : : : 5 : : : 150 600 : :

: . : : : : . . . : 401A : .
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

200

COURSE #: 425 A

: 26-22 15-11 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : ( ) / / / ( ) () () / / / : : . . . : 401A : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

201

COURSE #: 470 A

: 21-17 24-21 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : : . . . : 401A : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

202

COURSE #: 413 E

Advanced Insurance Diploma Liability Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma (BAID) covering different classes of Liability Insurances. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Understand the principles of public and products liability insurance cover and professional indemnity Have background knowledge to identify danger areas and weaknesses in a corporate scenario involving possible large liability claims Content Highlights Legal personality Nature of tort Negligence, trespass, nuisance, defamation & strict liability Defenses and remedies in tort Law of contract Limitation of actions Compensation awards in liability insurance Public liability insurance policy Employers liability insurance and workmens compensation Products liability policy Professional indemnity, errors and omission and directors and officers indemnity insurance Underwriting and rating of liability insurance Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss adjusters, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Possess BIID certification to obtain BAID certification
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 12-16 Feb, 15-19 Jul BIBF Staff & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Institutions GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Institutions All Nationalities : BD 600

203

COURSE #: 422 E

Engineering Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma Programme BAID, covering CAR, EAR and other different aspects of Engineering Insurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A broad appreciation of all sub-classes of Engineering Insurance Content Highlights Contractors all risks, erection all risks, endorsements and warranties Construction contracts wording Machinery plants & equipment Advanced loss of profit (delay in start-up) Decennial insurance Machinery breakdown & machinery all risks Boilers explosion Computer all risks Deterioration of stocks Underwriting & rating of engineering risks Claims procedures Engineering reinsurance Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters; Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Possess BIID certification to obtain BAID certification Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 15-19 Jan, 10-14 Jun BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

204

COURSE #: 424 E

Transportation Insurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma Programme BAID, covering Transportation Insurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Received a broad introduction to the theory and practice of Marine Hull and Cargo Insurance Received a broad introduction to the theory and practice of Aviation Insurance Content Highlights Historical development of Hull & Cargo and Aviation insurance The old and the new policy wordings Marine covers and institute clauses Practice of international trade Marine & trade documentation Risk rating The market Underwriting principles on hull and cargo Claims & reinsurance aspects Aviation: Types of cover available Aviation: Introduction to documentation Department administration Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters; Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Possess BIID certification to obtain BAID certification Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 13-17 May, 9-13 Dec BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

205

COURSE #: 433 E

Reinsurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma Programme BAID, covering different aspects of Reinsurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have knowledge of: The Reinsurance market The different types of Reinsurance arrangements available Practical applications of the different types of the Reinsurance market Content Highlights General introduction to reinsurance Insurance principles vis--vis reinsurance Essentials of the reinsurance contract/ agreement Types of treaty and facultative reinsurance arrangements Proportional and non-proportional reinsurance Special reinsurance extensions and covers Alternative risk transfer The reinsurance market Reinsurance transactions & documentation Rating, underwriting and claims Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters; Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Possess BIID certification to obtain BAID certification Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : Language : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 15-19 Apr, 9-13 Sep BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers English & Arabic

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

206

COURSE #: 440 E

Life Assurance

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Advanced Insurance Diploma Programme BAID, covering different aspects of Life Assurance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Received a good introduction to the concept of Life assurance A general understanding of the Life market Received instruction on the administration aspects of running the day-to-day operation of a Life office Typical life product sold through Bancassurance Content Highlights Structure of the insurance market Risks and insurance Fundamentals of life insurance Law of agency and contract Documents used in life insurance transactions Life insurance needs analysis Impact of inflation Term, Endowment, Whole and Unit linked life insurance Life insurance contractual provisions Buying & selling life insurance Annuities Claim aspects of life insurance Reinsurance Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Courses Introduction to Insurance and Insurance Documentation 401E Possess BIID certification to obtain BAID certification Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 11-15 Mar, 4-8 Nov BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

207

COURSE #: 413 A


: . : 27-23 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 : : . : : : : . . . :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

208

COURSE #: 422 A

: 14-18 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : ( ) : . . . : : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

209

COURSE #: 424 A

: 6-10 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : : : : . . . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

210

COURSE #: 433 A

: 26 1 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : / : . . . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

211

COURSE #: 440 A

: . : 5 -1 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : . . .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

212

COURSE #: 462 E

Insurance Management Diploma Risk Management


Evaluating potential losses o Attitude to risk o Utility theory o Rating risks in terms of statutory and management priorities Risk control options o Avoidance o Retention o Loss Control (Prevention, Reduction) o Insurance o Non-Insurance Transfer o A Risk Management Project - Captain Loomis o Self Insurance o Captive Insurance o Continuity plan Material and Workplace Risk Control o Physical damage o Security o People risk control Special risk control o Legislation risks o Product risk control o Political risks o Environmental risks o Liability risks o Motor risks o Technology risks o Brand name o Supply chain Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents, Loss Adjusters; Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Minimum five years experience in insurance industry or possess both BIID and BAID certifications

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Insurance Management Diploma Programme BIMD, covering different aspects of Risk Management. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Exhibit knowledge of the risk management process, with emphasis on identifying potential loss exposure, analysis and evaluation of risk, and selecting the optimal method(s), for dealing with risk in a specified situation, from a plethora of options Demonstrate a basic understanding of, and ability to compute the measures of Central Tendency and of risk Discuss the relevance of concepts such as risk preferences, probability distributions, and the Law of Large Numbers to the risk management process Content Highlights Risk Management versus Insurance Management The Risk Management Process Identify and analyse Potential Losses Evaluate Potential Losses Dealing with unacceptable risks Risks Monitoring Property Loss Exposures Liability Loss Exposures Business Income Loss Exposures Human Resources Loss Exposures Crime Loss Exposures Employee Benefit Loss Exposures Foreign Loss Exposures Risk Identification techniques: o Risk Analysis Questionnaire o Flowcharts o Insurance Policy Checklist o Financial Statements o Historical Loss Data o Previous Insurance Policies o Physical Inspection Analysing Potential Losses o High and Low Severity and Frequency o Maximum Probable Loss versus Maximum Possible Loss o Unimportant, Important, and Critical Losses Risk analysing tool o Hazard Catalogues o Risk Modelling o Dow Fire & Explosion Index

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

213

COURSE #: 462 E

continued .... Risk Management

Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 4-8 Mar BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

214

COURSE #: 465 E

Insurance Marketing

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Insurance Management Diploma Programme BIMD, covering Insurance Marketing. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A knowledge and understanding of the significance of marketing and marketing planning to the effectiveness of the insurance industry An understanding of the issues arising from the development and implementation of global marketing strategy for insurance products and other risk solutions and apply them locally The ability to apply knowledge and skills to practical situations The ability to synthesis different aspects of the syllabus and apply them to given scenarios Content Highlights The role of marketing Theory of marketing Development a marketing strategy Marketing data Branding Communication Distribution and service delivery Marketing program administration Key issues in international marketing Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Agents Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Minimum five years experience in insurance industry or possess both BIID and BAID certifications Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 14-18 Oct BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

215

COURSE #: 483 E

Advanced Underwriting

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Insurance Management Diploma Programme BIMD, covering different aspects of managing general insurance underwriting accounts. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: An understanding of and the ability to apply the requirements for managing a general insurance underwriting account through selection of class of business and design of products Knowledge of setting the underwriting policy for those products Knowledge of establishing the price and managing the exposures Knowledge of the implementation of operational controls, budgeting and monitoring results The ability to apply knowledge and skills to practical situations The ability to synthesize different aspects of the syllabus and apply them to given scenarios Content Highlights Understand and apply key regulation and legislation to the underwriting function Understand, apply and evaluate underwriting strategy Understand, apply and evaluate appropriate underwriting policy and practice Understand the principles and practices of pricing and apply appropriate pricing methods Understand and apply reinsurance Understand the management and evaluation of exposures in the underwriting portfolio Understand and apply appropriate operational controls Understand and apply appropriate monitoring methods and controls Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Minimum five years experience in insurance industry or possess both BIID and BAID certifications Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 6-10 May BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

216

COURSE #: 484 E

Advanced Claims

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Insurance Management Diploma Programme BIMD, covering different aspects of managing general insurance claims. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: The knowledge and understanding of claims philosophies The knowledge and understanding of the implementation of claims systems The knowledge and understanding of the management of claims functions, and the management of the claims service The knowledge and understanding of claims practice within the non-life insurance industry The ability to apply knowledge and skills to practical situations The ability to synthesize different aspects of the syllabus and apply them to given scenarios Content Highlights Understand the claims environment o Claims management strategy o Claims philosophies o Organisation design and structure o Policy interpretation o Regulation and legislation Understand and apply claims service management practices o Customer experience expectations, satisfaction o Customer retention o Complaints handling o Policyholder litigation and breach of contract Understand and apply claims management practices o Design and implementation of claims handling procedures for both first and third party o Civil Procedure Rules o The pre-action protocols o Process review and quality management o Compliance with claims procedures o Claims handling operation o Supplier and relationship management; panels o Call centre management Understand and apply claims technical management o Reserving philosophies o Interaction between claims, actuaries and underwriting o Information technology o Management information
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

o Fraudulent claims o London and Lloyds market o Reinsurance o Subrogation and recoveries o International claims Understand and calculate the cost of management practices o Cost control strategy o Estimating and reserving o Leakage o Cost of the claims function internal costs, share of overheads

Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Minimum five years experience in insurance industry or possess both BIID and BAID certifications Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 8-12 Jul BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

217

COURSE #: 485 E

Insurance Corporate Management

Description This course forms part of the BIBF Insurance Management Diploma Programme BIMD, covering all aspects of Insurance Corporate Management. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have strong understanding of the following issues and concepts: Capital, capital adequacy and solvency rules, and their impact on insurance enterprises Management structures and organizational issues Corporate finance concepts in insurance Planning and control processes in insurance Roles of investment management and insurance regulation Challenges to insurance management Content Highlights Understand the need for capital and its influence on the organization Understand the management structures of insurance organizations Understand the organisational issues of insurance organizations Evaluate and apply corporate finance concepts in insurance Evaluate and apply the planning process in insurance Evaluate and apply control processes in insurance Understand the role of investment management in insurance organisations Understand the role and impact of insurance regulation Evaluate the purpose and impact of capital adequacy and solvency rules on insurers Understand the current and future challenges to the management of insurance organisations Target Audience Insurance employees, Brokers, Employees who manage insurance in non-insurance companies

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Minimum five years experience in insurance industry or possess both BIID and BAID certifications Minimum Prerequisites - Other English Language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught Course Structure The course is conducted via a combination of lectures; case studies; role plays; and videos, where applicable. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 days plus one morning for the examination 22-26 Jan BIBF Faculty & Guest Lecturers

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 150 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

218

COURSE #: 462 A


o ( ) o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o : . : : o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

: . . . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

219


: 16-12 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

220

COURSE #: 465 A

: 12-8 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : . . . : : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

221

COURSE #: 483 A

. : 24-28 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: : : : . . . :
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

222

COURSE #: 484 A

o o o -- o

: . : : o o o o o -- o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

. . . . : 6 - 2 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

223

COURSE #: 485 A

: . : 13-9 : : 5 : : : 150 : : 600 :

: . : : : : . . .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

224

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTER FOR INSURANCE


DURATION CODE JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC JAN

NO. COURSE TITLE

INTERMEDIATE INSURANCE DIPLOMA (ENGLISH) 6 6 6 6 6 470E 19-23 .. & 10 3-7 & 23 425E 11-15 & 31 24-28 ..& 14 30.. 423E 1-5 & 21 15-19 ..& 4 ..4 & 20 4-8 & 17 412E 29.. ..2 & 18 13-17 ..& 2 401E 8-12 & 28 26.. 22-26 ..1 & 17 ..& 12 3-7 & 23 9-13 & 29 11-15 ..& 1 2-6 & 22 23-27 ..& 12

Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Motor Insurance

Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance

Miscellaneous Accident Insurance

Medical Insurance

INTERMEDIATE INSURANCE DIPLOMA (ARABIC) 6 6 6 6 6 470A 425A 22-26 423A 27-31 ..& 12 17-21 ..& 7 21-24 412A 19-23 .. & 10 ..& 16 16-20 ..& 6 11-15 ..& 1 ..& 10 401A 22-26 ..& 11 15-19 ..& 4 9-13 & 29

Introduction to Insurance & Insurance Documentation

Motor Insurance

Fire & Loss of Profits Insurance

Miscellaneous Accident Insurance

10

Medical Insurance

NO. COURSE TITLE 6 6 6 6 6 440E 11-15 & 31 433E 15-19 ..& 5 424E 13-17 ..& 2 9-13 & 29 422E 15-19 ..& 4 10-14 & 30 413E 12-16 ..& 3 15-19 ..& 4

DURATION

CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

JAN

ADVANCED INSURANCE DIPLOMA (ENGLISH)

11

Liability Insurance

12

Engineering Insurance (CAR/EAR)

13

Transportation Insurance

9-13 & 29

14

Reinsurance

15

Life Assurance

4-8 & 17

ADVANCED INSURANCE DIPLOMA (ARABIC) 6 6 6 6 6 440A 433A 26.. ..1 & 17 1-5 & 21 424A 6-10 & 26 422A 413A 14-18 ..& 3 23-27 ..& 12

16

Liability Insurance

17

Engineering Insurance (CAR/EAR)

18

Transportation Insurance

19

Reinsurance

20

Life Assurance

INSURANCE MANAGEMENT DIPLOMA (ENGLISH) 6 6 6 6 6 484E 485E 22-26 ..& 11 483E 465E 6-10 & 26 8-12 & 28 462E 4-8 & 24 14-18 ..& 3

21

Risk Management

22

Insurance Marketing

23

Advanced Underwriting

24

Advanced Claims

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

25

Insurance Corporate Management

225

226

NO. COURSE TITLE 6 6 6 6 6 485A 9-13 & 29 484A 483A 24-28 ..& 14 2-6 & 22 465A 8-12 & 28 462A 12-16 ..& 3

DURATION

CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

JAN

INSURANCE MANAGEMENT DIPLOMA (ARABIC)

26

Risk Management

27

Insurance Marketing

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

28

Advanced Underwriting

29

Advanced Claims

30

Insurance Corporate Management

(a) (b)

Notes: There is a gap between the final day of the course and the examination day to allow participants additional study time. If any public holidays fall during the course, an hour and half will be added to each of the remaining days of the week.

229

Centre for Islamic Finance

intro

Islamic finance has emerged as a fast-growing, prominent, alternative financial intermediation mechanism on the world financial stage. The Centre for Islamic Finance was established in 1997 to assist in fostering the growth of the Islamic banking community throughout the Middle East and in other traditional commercial banking communities. Drawing upon the organised support of the financial sector in Bahrain as a hub of Islamic finance, collaboration with major service institutions such as Accounting and Auditing Organisation for Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI) and patronage of the Central Bank of Bahrain, the Centre has gained access to industry experts worldwide to ensure that its courses and programs both professional and academic - are relevant, contemporary and practical. To that end, the Centre was recognised as the BEST ISLAMIC FINANCE TRAINING INSTITUTION 2008, 2009 and 2010 by the globally acclaimed Islamic Business and Finance magazine, a sister publication of the Banker. The learning experiences provided through the Centre focus on operations, products and services, management development, and professional qualifications. The Centre also provides advisory services to clients wishing to structure Islamic transactions or gain access to the Middle East capital markets. Our Services Our services can be broadly divided into three categories: (a) Open courses, Customised courses, External Courses and Professional and Academic programmes; (b) research and (c) Advisory/consulting services. Professional Courses Our professional courses aim at educating professionals to perform their functions in Islamic financial institutions more effectively, armed with the knowledge and skills gained through our intensely practical and focused courses. We deliver courses in-house Open Offerings), invite industry experts and institutions to deliver courses (External Offerings), go to financial institutions directly to provide our services (Customised offerings) or professional qualifications, including the Advanced Diploma in Islamic Finance and the Diploma in Islamic Commercial Jurisprudence.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

230

Continued.... Centre for Islamic Finance

Open Courses Our Open courses are free to levy paying institutions and are delivered by our in-house experts on Islamic Finance. External Programmes In addition, we run special courses that are delivered by leading Islamic Finance experts who are career practitioners or leading thinkers in Islamic Finance. We also partner with institutions that are prominent in Islamic finance to offer their leading edge knowledge to the industry. Customised Programmes We also entertain requests to provide customised and comprehensive human resource development programmes for Islamic financial institutions in the region. We conduct a thorough training needs assessment (TNA) to ascertain the needs of our clients and recommend courses that suit their requirements. We design training programmes that benefit from the collective capacity of BIBF, drawing expertise from our other departments where necessary. The Centre has competitively serviced the human resource development programmes of some of the largest and most prominent financial institutions in the Middle East, including Abu Dhabi Islamic Bank, Standard Chartered Bank, Islamic Development Bank, National Commercial Bank, Al Baraka Islamic Bank, Kuwait Finance House, Bahrain Islamic Bank, BNP Paribas Professional and Academic Qualifications Our professional and academic qualifications are designed to assist individuals to benefit from a full spectrum of professional and academic courses, leading to an award in Islamic Finance. We have academic programmes for individuals who have little prior academic or Islamic Finance experience, but a wealth of life experience. We also have academic programmes for those who already hold a Bachelors degree in another discipline. Advanced Diploma in Islamic Finance The Diploma in Islamic Finance Programme is the Centres leading Professional Qualification. It addresses the needs of both Islamic and conventional financial institutions providing Islamic banking services and products. It is a part-time evening programme emphasising the practical aspects of Islamic banking with detailed coverage of the theoretical foundation of the subject.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

231

Continued.... Centre for Islamic Finance

The programme is structured on the semester system and required credit hours. Participants are expected to complete the all the requirements, including credit hours and pass their semester exams in order to graduate. As a professional qualification, the programme emphasises the current practice of Islamic banking. The Instructors are predominantly practitioners and the study material is drawn from the practice of various Islamic financial institutions. Diploma in Islamic Commercial Jurisprudence (New) The Diploma in Islamic Commercial Jurisprudence (Fiqh al-Muamalat) a professional qualification addressing the needs of the Islamic finance industry for qualified professionals in dealing with Shariahrelated aspects, especially in the the areas of Shariah review and supervision. It is a seven-module programme to help develop human resources working in various Shariah departments of Islamic financial institutions. Participants are expected to complete the required credit hours, pass their semester exams and undertake certain assignments in order to graduate. As a professional qualification, the programme emphasises the current practice of Islamic banking. The Instructors are predominantly practitioner scholars and the study material is strongly focused on applied aspects of Islamic fiqh as pertaining to the Islamic finance industry. Validated Diploma in Islamic Finance (leading to a BSc in the following: Banking and Finance Accounting and Finance Business Studies and Finance This diploma programme provides students with a well-rounded commerce and Islamic Finance qualification. Thisis a validated University of Wales Diploma offered at BIBF as a joint programme. The programme provides graduates with an opportunity to major in a number of other fields including Accounting, Finance, Banking and Business Studies. Students completing this programme can also go to University of Bangor- Wales, UK for one year to complete and earn their BSc degree. This programme is coordinated by the Centre for Academic and Executive with more details available under that Centre heading in this catalogue.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

232

Continued.... Centre for Islamic Finance

MSF - Islamic Finance The Masters of Science in Finance Islamic Finance is the culmination of substantial industry based research and feedback to create a unique programme that provides participants with a strong background in both the science of conventional finance and the dynamics of Islamic Finance as practiced today. This programme builds on the success of the existing DePaul and BIBF relationship to create a programme that builds on each partners core specialisation. DePaul Universitys highly reputed Kellstadt Graduate School of Business is responsible for the Finance specialist stream while the Centre for Islamic Finance at BIBF is responsible for designing and delivering the Islamic Finance specialist stream. The broader aim of this programme was to create the next generation of leaders in Islamic Finance, equipped with the specialist knowledge set and skills that arise out of combining the knowledge and skills base of conventional finance and Islamic Finance. This programme is coordinated by the Centre for Academic and Executive and more details are available under that Centre heading. Customised Courses for your institution anywhere in the world The Centre for Islamic Finance also designs courses that suit the training needs of your organisation. Taking advantage of the vast pool of our solid connections with industry and our own staff resources, we have conducted customised courses for institutions in and outside of Bahrain and the Middle East. So far our Centre has served clients from twenty-plus countries (either in Bahrain or in the countries of the clients) and among them are: Algeria, Indonesia, Kazakhstan, Kuwait, Libya, Malaysia, Qatar, Senegal, Saudi Arabia, Syria, UAE, to name a few. Since we are a non-profit entity servicing the needs of the financial industry, our rates for comparable quality and breadth are relatively lower than other private training institutions. Please contact us with your requirements and we will get back to you shortly with the services we can offer. The service offer will provide the course dates and timings, the structure and contents of the course, the instructor(s) resumes, the price quote and other expenses quote.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

233

Index

Category Course OPEN COURSES

Title Introduction to Islamic Banking Introduction to Islamic Banking - (Arabic) Islamic Leasing (Ijarah) Islamic Mutual Funds Sharia for Bankers Murabaha Finance for Retail Executives Murabaha Finance for Retail Executives - (Arabic) Istisnaa Finance for Retail Executives Islamic Economics for Bankers Introduction to Future Studies Islamic Perspective (Arabic) Skills of Convincing & Influencing others in Negotiation (Arabic) Introduction to Global Economics & Islamic Financial Markets - (Arabic) Sharia Audit Sharia Audit - (Arabic) Intermediate Islamic Banking Advanced Islamic Banking Advanced Islamic Banking - (Arabic) Islamic Banking Ethics & Corporate Governance Islamic Banking Ethics & Corporate Governance (Arabic) Mudharaba and its Application in Islamic Finance Introduction to Waqf (NEW)

Page 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 245 247 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257

Code 600E 600A 609E 611E 630E 631E 631A 632E 633E 634A 635A 636A 638E 638A 641E 642E 642A 644E 644A 645E 646E

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

234

Continued....

Index

Category Course EXTERNAL COURSES

Title Sharia Standards Sharia Standards - (Arabic) SUKUK Demystified Islamic Documentation Structure Structuring Islamic Transactions Conventional & Islamic Project Finance Islamic Asset Securitisation Takaful Workshop - (Arabic) Islamic Trade Finance Islamic International Trade Finance Mechanics of Financial Markets - Islamic Perspective Islamic Banking Supervision Basel II and Capital Adequacy Auditing Takaful Companies - (Arabic) Futures Thinking & Strategy Development Islamic Liquidity and Treasury Management Islamic Credit Cards - English Islamic Syndication Structure Seminar - English

Page 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 271 272 273 274 275

Code EX610E EX610A EX618E EX627E EX628E EX630E EX631E EX633A EX638E EX643E EX647E EX651E EX653A EX656E EX657E EX658E EX659E

Note: English run courses unless otherwise specified

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

235

COURSE #: 600E

Introduction To Islamic Banking

Training courses

Description This is a basic course in Islamic finance. The course introduces participants to the Islamic contracts and products. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have knowledge of the: Basic philosophy and values underlying Islamic contracts Basic risks in Islamic contracts Practical applications of Islamic contracts Content Highlights Sources of legislation Modes of trade Types of Riba, Jehala and Gharar Types of contracts: Basic Sharia rules and application of Murabaha contract, Tawarroq contract, Salam contract, Istisna contract, Ijara contract, and Musharaka contract Case Studies Target Audience All Bankers who need to be introduced to Islamic Banking Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration : 5 Days Dates : 9-12 Jan, 12-16 Feb, 4-8 Mar, 1-19 Apr, 6-10 May, 3-7 Jun, 23-27 Sep, 14-18 Oct, 4-8 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

236

COURSE #: 600 A

12 - 8 : : 5 : ,23 - 19 : : : 125 : : 500 :

: . : : : : : . . . :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

237

COURSE #: 609 E

Islamic Leasing (Ijara)

Description Islamic leasing-Ijara is increasingly becoming a noticeable contract in Islamic banking practice. This course is devoted to this contract comparing it with conventional lease financing. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the concept of lease financial Explore the reasons for the growth of lease financial Explain similarities and difference between Islamic lease and conventional lease Content Highlights What is leasing A historical perspective to leasing Advantages of leasing for both the Lessor and Lessee Ijara-Islamic operating lease contracts Sharia alternative to the finance lease-Ijara Muntahia Bittamleek Structuring sale- Leaseback- Transactions under Sharia guidelines Sukuk Al-Ijara Accounting for lease transactions under AAOIFI, FAS No.8 Case studies

Target Audience Bankers in the Investment, Treasury, Capital Markets or Credit division of their banks Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 25-26 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

238

COURSE #: 611 E

Islamic Mutual Funds

Description An expanding area in Islamic finance is the establishment and management of Islamic mutual funds. This course is devoted to discussing issues relating to operations of Islamic funds. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: A thorough knowledge of Islamic mutual funds Content Highlights Sharia guidelines for investment The legal structure Investment activities of the fund Dow Jones Islamic index Types of Islamic mutual funds Risk measures for mutual funds Legal framework in the GCC region Target Audience Investment Officers; Fund Managers; Treasury Officers; Marketing Officers

Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 3-5 Apr, 14-16 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

239

COURSE #: 630 E

Sharia For Bankers

Description Islamic banking is increasingly becoming a noticeable mode of financing and investment in the global financial system. This course is devoted to this subject along with the definition of the foundational Sharia terms in relation to Fiqh-ulMuamalat. The course also includes discussions on the theories of property, rights, ownership, and contracts. However, the course is more focused on the general theory of contract and on its pillars and the Islamic financial contracts. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Have an introductory knowledge of Islamic Fiqh and Usul al-Fiqh (Objectives of Islamic Sharia), sources of Sharia Appreciate the fundamentals of contracts Be able to explain the Sharia Legal Framework underlying Islamic financial system Content Highlights What is the meaning of Sharia What are the Sharia disciplines What are the other related disciplines of Islamic Sharia Fundamentals of contracts Negative elements in the contracts Case studies

Target Audience All Employees of Banks; Other financial institutions related to the industry; All newly employed Personnel before handling any responsibility Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 7-8 Feb, 10-11 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

240

COURSE #: 631 E

Murabaha Finance For Retail Executives

Description Islamic banking is increasingly becoming a noticeable mode of financing and investment in the global financial industry. This course is devoted to this subject along with an in-depth focus on the structure and functions of Islamic financial Instruments. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the current practices of Murabaha finance Discuss issues related to contemporary Murabaha finance Foster an appreciation of Islamic banking and finance as viable alternative to the interest based conventional financial system Content Highlights Sharia legal framework Legitimate property The concept of money Sources of legislation Types of Riba, Jehala and Gharar Types of Contracts Murabaha Contract, Basic Sharia rules Application of Murabaha Risk and mitigation Mechanisms for Murabaha on imported goods Murabaha by documents for collection Delegating the customer to import the goods

Target Audience All Employees of Banks; Other financial institutions related to the industry; All newly employed Personnel before handling any responsibility Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 17-18 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

241

COURSE #: 631 A


: : . . : . : : : . . . :

: : 5 - 4 :

: : 50 : : 200 :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

242

COURSE #: 632 E

Istisnaa Finance For Retail Executives

Description Islamic banking is increasingly becoming a noticeable mode of financing and investment in the global financial industry. This course is devoted to this subject along with an in-depth focus on the structure and functions of Islamic financial Instruments (Istisna). Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the current practices of Istisna finance Discuss issues related to contemporary Istisna finance Foster and appreciation of Islamic banking and finance as viable alternative to the interest based conventional financial system Contents Highlights Concepts General rules Istisna as a mode of finance BOT and Istisna Case studies Target Audience All Employees of Banks; Other financial institutions related to the industry; All newly employed Personnel before handling any responsibility Pre-requisites None required

Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 8-9 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

243

COURSE #: 633 E

Islamic Economics For Bankers

Description This course aims to provide an understanding of Islamic economics and finance by considering the implications of the application of Sharia law for the economic and financial systems. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Provide a conceptual introduction to Islamic economics Enable the understanding of how Islam and its worldview permeate all aspects of economics Foster an appreciation of Islamic economics as a viable alternative to the interest based conventional financial system Content Highlights The nature and scope of Islamic economics and finance and its relationship with conventional economics and finance The history of the Islamic economics systems in various eras of Islam The views and contributions of Islamic economists and Muslim thinkers Islamic perspectives on wealth creation and mobilization and behaviour of both consumers and producers The development of Islamic economics and finance theory Target Audience All employees of Banks; Other financial institutions and related industry The course is designed for relative newcomers to Islamic banking and finance seeking to become familiar with the concepts in a relatively short time. It is also useful for banking professionals seeking a refresher course and/or wishing to appreciate Islamic economic concepts from a broader perspective.

Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 16-17 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

244

COURSE #: 634 A

Introduction To Future Studies Islamic Perspective - (Arabic)

Description This course provides an overview of the field of Futures Studies to gain skills in identifying and analysing trends impacting the world on an anthropological, political, technological, sociological, and environmental level. Students acquire an understanding for successful participation in society. In addition students will explore ways to create a more just, sustainable and equitable world for future generations. The course is designed to provide you with substantial knowledge regarding the perspectives on the future of the Islamic economy. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify and analyse the assumptions of contrasting views of the future See that there are logical and conceptual resemblances and differences in the assumptions and conclusions of scenarios about different political, economic and social spheres Specify the similarities and distinctions between the logical and conceptual assumptions and results of interpretations of the future - depending on whether these are directed towards the short, medium or long-term Extend the range of the debate about free market principles in time (toward the future) and space (especially towards Islamic world sphere of interest Arabic countries) - with the intention of developing more worldliness and sophisticated judgment among the participants Content Highlights Theoretical approaches to the future Philosophical elements of futures studies Methods in futures studies Change and development Organisations and movements in futures studies Multiculturalism and population change Eco-economy and sustainable development, vision and alternative futures of Islamic economics Regional development and globalization Futures thinkers and futures thinking Islamic economics and political change Applied ethics

Target Audience Those who want to expand their Islamic banking knowledge; Division and Branch Managers; Planning, Budgeting and Financial Control Departments; Managers; Executives; Business Analysts and those involved in Planning and/or implementing Strategic initiatives Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is a mix of lectures, practice and knowledge sharing Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 24-25 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

245

COURSE #: 634 A

()
: : 2 : 25 - 24 : : : . . . . : ( ) ( ) : : /

: : 50 : : 200 :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

246

COURSE #: 635 A

Skills Of Convincing And Influencing Others In Negotiation - (Arabic)

Description This course will help delegates who have to achieve greater influence across their organisation i.e. to get things done. It is also targeted at people who have to influence external bodies, with which the relationship is not a financial/contractual one. This introductory level course will help you communicate with others more effectively, get yourself heard and encourage others to value your opinions. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Turn influencing, negotiation and engagement into science from art Substantially enhance your personal effectiveness Gain greater resources for your service Overcome unfairness and achieve win-win solutions Communicate in a more persuasive manner with colleagues and individuals from outside your organisation Explain complicated ideas in a manner which aids understanding and increases the likelihood of success Communicate with increased confidence at meetings Become a more active listener and use enhanced persuasion skills to act as an opinion shaper Apply principles of negotiation to your day-today communication Contents Highlights Effective communication skills Positive and assertive communication, persuasive and influential communication Difficult situations - communicating with confidence An introduction to negotiation with others Personal development

Target Audience All employees of Banks; Other financial institutions related to the industry; All newly employed personnel before handling any responsibility Pre-requisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 23-24 Jan, 25-26 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

247

COURSE #: 635 A

( )

2 : : 24-23 26-25 :

: : : 50 : : 200 :

: . / . . : : : :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

248

COURSE #: 636 A

Introduction To Global Economy & Islamic Financial Market - (Arabic)

Description This course offers an introduction to the world economy, international trade, and economic development and is designed especially for noneconomics majors. Foundations of international markets and trade, comparative advantage, foreign investment, international inequality, and the study of international institutions such as the IMF, the World Bank, and the World Trade Organisation will form key components of the class. This course covers various topics related to both Islamic and conventional financial institutions that make up the system, as well as socio-economic issues such as poverty, development, hunger, and energy. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Have an overview of the global financial system Be familiar with various bodies responsible for regulating and controlling the conventional financial system Know the role of government in an Islamic economy Observe the global financial regulatory systems and the international supervisory framework Content Highlights Comparative economic systems Issues in global culture Economic history, international politics Overview of regulation and governing bodies of conventional financial system Positive laws governing the Islamic financial system Intervention by the regulatory authority Cultural environment of international business The Islamic financial system of selected Muslim countries

Target Audience All employees of banks, financial institutions and related industry Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 23-24 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50

Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

249

COURSE #: 636 A

( )

: : 50: : 200:

: . . . : : : : : 2: : 24 - 23 : :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

250

COURSE #: 638 E

Sharia Audit

Description This course looks at the Sharia Audit procedures, manuals and relations to Sharia Supervisory Board (SSB) and other departments in the bank. Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will be able to: Explain the objective and process of the Sharia inspection in Islamic banking Recognise the differences and relationship between Sharia audit and supervision Build up a Sharia Audit programme Prepare Sharia Audit reports Content Highlights The role of Sharia supervision in Islamic banks The establishment of Sharia audit The differences between Sharia supervision and Sharia audit What to audit The Sharia audit manual Sharia audit programme Cases studies Target Audience Bank employees involved in the Sharia Audit function; Staff of Central Banks; Credit Officers; Compliance Officers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or

experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Islamic Banking Jurisprudence Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 4-6 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

251

COURSE #: 638 A

: . . . : : / . : 3 : : 9 7 14 - 12 : . :. : . 75 : . : . 300/- : .

. . . . : : . . . . :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

252

COURSE #: 641 E

Intermediate Islamic Banking

Description This the intermediary level course in Islamic Banking and Finance. The course provides a detailed description to participants on the Islamic contracts and products used in Islamic Banking, emphasising also on numerous recently developed products currently in the market. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Discuss the Islamic nominate contracts in regards to its main principles and legal foundations and risks Discuss in detail numerous products in the Islamic Finance Industry o Islamic Credit Cards o Islamic Mutual Funds o Islamic Trade Finance Appreciate the contemporary debate on contentious issues in Islamic Finance transactions Content Highlights A recap on Islamic economics A recap on the history of the Islamic banking industry A recap on Fiqh Muamalah (Riba and the sources) A study of the products using the key Islamic nominate contracts from Murabahah, Ijarah, Salam, Istisna, Musharakah, Mudharabah (Commodity Murabahah, Murabahah in retail banking, Bai Al Ina, Tawarruq, Al Ijarah Thumma Al Bai for car and home financing, Sukuk al ijarah, Salam for financing, Parallel Salam, Salam with a promise to purchase, Project financing using Istisna and sukuk al Salam, Musharakah Mutanaqisah for home financing, Musharakah Mutanaqisah for joint venture establishment, Mudarabah for investment accounts, Mudharabah for financing, and sukuk al Mudharabah) Islamic credit cards Other products from minor nominate contracts (wadiah yad amanah and wadiah yad dhamanah, joala, wakalah, ar rahn, Islamic mutual funds, Products of Islamic trade finance (Letter of Guarantee and Letter of Credit).

Target Audience All Bankers who need to delve deeper into Islamic banking at an intermediate level Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 13-15 Feb, 10-12 Jun, 18-20 Sep, 4-6 Nov BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

253

COURSE #: 642 E

Advanced Islamic Banking

Description This module provides candidates with an understanding and application of essential principles and requirements of issuing and managing Islamic securities in dynamic Islamic capital markets across jurisdictions. The Second part will be covering Strategic Planning which enables an organisation to shape and guide its overall business objectives. Through effective Strategic Planning, an organisation creates a framework for developing, adapting and aligning organisational vision, mission and goals to achieve and sustain competitive advantage. The last part will look at risk management in Islamic banking. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have knowledge of: Islamic Capital Markets ( Capital market instruments, Sukuks) Strategic Planning in Islamic Banking Risk Management in Islamic Banking Content Highlights Development of Islamic capital market Structuring, processing and trading of Islamic securities Fundamentals of strategic planning Defining components of a strategic plan Addressing your organisations mission and vision Detecting opportunities and threats Operating in micro and macro environments Assessing external forces Recognising strengths and weaknesses Auditing internal capabilities Definitions of banking risks Management of banking risks Types of regulatory regimes Historical evolution of the Basel accord Target Audience Those who want to expand their Islamic banking knowledge; Division and Branch Managers; Planning, Budgeting and Financial Control Departments; Managers and Executives; Business Analysts and those involved in Planning and/or implementing Strategic initiatives

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Intermediate Islamic Banking 641E Course Structure The course combines a mixture of lectures, practice and knowledge sharing Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 10-12 Dec :BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

254

COURSE #: 644 E

Islamic Banking Ethics & Corporate Governance

Description The banks and their employees are considered custodians and managers of funds. They hold these funds on a fiduciary basis to help facilitate trade and financial relationships of society. For this reason, the issue of ethics and values are the cornerstone of any banking system. This course is designed to provide comprehensive knowledge on Islamic banking ethics in its first part. The second part will cover corporate governance in Islamic banking. Corporate governance is an increasingly important issue for organisations globally. With investors, regulators and politicians increasingly screening organisations for good governance, the demands on boards and senior managers are becoming more onerous, and the strength of activist stakeholders gathers pace across the region and the world. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the foundations of Islamic finance ethics Appreciate the Sharia basis of the Ethical principles Outline market disciplines of an Islamic banker Create awareness on how product development in Islamic banks should proceed Understand why good governance is important Identify the roles and responsibilities of key players in Corporate Governance Content Highlights General Islamic finance ethical principles Conducts and ethics of an Islamic banker Regulatory framework for corporate governance Corporate governance in Islamic Financial services.

Target Audience This unique course is designed for those professionals whose responsibility it is to introduce good corporate governance & Ethics into an organisation. This encompasses many different levels of seniority as well as various business functions. Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, practice and knowledge sharing. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 3-4 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

255

COURSE #: 644 A

: 2 : : 19 - 18 :

: : 50 : : 200 :

: . . . . . . . : : : . . : . . .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

256

COURSE #: 645 E

Mudarbaha and Its Applications In Islamic Finance

Description Islamic banking is increasingly becoming a noticeable mode of financing and investmentin the global financial industry. This course is devoted to this subject along with an in-depth focus on the structure and functions of Islamic financial Instruments. Objectives To expose students to current practices of Mudarabah finance To discuss issues related to contemporary Mudarabah finance To foster and appreciation ofIslamic banking and finance as viable alternative to the interest based conventional financial system Content Highlights Sharia Legal Framework Legitimate Property The Concept of money Sources of legislation Types of Riba, Jehala and Gharar Types of contracts Mudarabah Contract standard Sharia standard Application of Mudarabah Risk and Mitigation Mechanisms for Mudarabah in Islamic banks Mudarabah sukuk

Target Audience All employees of Banks, other financial institutions related to the industry. All newly employed personnel before handling any responsibility. Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lecturers, discussion and case studies. Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 30-31 Jan : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

257

COURSE #: 646 E

Introduction To WAQF (NEW)

Description AWQAF is increasingly becoming a noticeable modes of financing and investment in the finance industry. This course is devoted to this subject along with potential development of waqf which entitles it to contribute effectively to the muslim communities. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will: Explain Sharia Legal Framework underlying Waqf system Explain the the history of Waqf , developmental role, jurisprudence Explain the actual potential of Waqf in modern societies through emphasis on its modern instruments Explain the methodology for the investing the current Waqf projects and transforming them in to an intellectual product Explain economic Efficiency for Waqf Products Content Highlights What is Waqf? An historical perspective to Waqf The management of Waqf The traditional modes investment of Waqf The modern modes investment of Waqf The role of Waqf in the economic and social development Economic Efficiency for Waqf Products Case Studies

Target Audience: All staff; Officers in a Waqf Investment unit Prerequisites: None required Course Structure This course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and cases. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 days : 20-21 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

258

COURSE #: EX610 E

External Courses Sharia Standards

Description AAOIFI Sharia council has been active in issuing Sharia standards. This course is devoted to the explanation and discussion of these standards. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain and use the major Islamic banking instruments used for different requirements Recognise and follow up the acceptable and unacceptable practices for each instrument Understand the variations amongst Islamic Financial institutions in their applications and usage of each instrument Content Highlights The differences among Islamic banks in the application of the Islamic instruments Sharia standard on the Murabaha and Murabaha to the purchase order Sharia standard on Salam, Istisna, Mudharaba, Mosharaka Sharia standard on the Ijara, and Ijara-WaTamleek Sharia standard on the procrastinating debtor Sharia standard on currency trading Sharia standard on debt card and credit card

Target Audience Sharia Auditors; Bankers Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 24-26 Jun Dr. Salah Al Majthoob, Unicorn Investment Bank

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

259

COURSE #: EX610 A

: . . . . : : : : 3 : : 8 6 : : 375 : : 450 :

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

260

COURSE #: EX618E

Sukuk Demystified

Description The workshop will include hands-on case studies of actual deals, as well as generic exercises and will give participants the opportunity to demonstrate their understanding of deals through group workings and general discussions. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Gain a comprehensive understanding of the burgeoning Sukuk product as it continues to unfold within the parameters promulgated by the AAOIFI Sharia standards Make a complete coverage of the salient legal and credit aspects relating to varying Sukuk structures possible under different Sharia contracts Evaluate the trends in the Sukuk market with a focus on the benefits, costs and risks from the issuers as well as the investors viewpoints Discuss the potential of Sukuk in the restructuring and / or management of the balance sheets of Islamic banks Content Highlights Practical application of Islamic finance contracts as a basis for Sukuk activities Sukuk, current market overview Sukuk and their roles Cases Legal issues in Sukuk Sukuk in financing choices Tax and regulatory aspects and tradability Role of Sukuk in the development of capital markets in the Islamic world Target Audience Credit Officers; Marketing Officers; Sharia Scholars; Internal Sharia Reviewers/Officers; Asset and Fund Managers; Risk Managers; Bankers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 13-15 May Lecturers : Nathif Adam, CEO of First Community Bank, Kenya Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

261

COURSE #: EX627E

Islamic Documentation Structure

Description This intensive programme will cover types of Islamic Financing Products, definitions and Sharia aspects as well as work process. It will expand the cycle in the Islamic products mechanism with special emphasis on the structure of facilities, documentation and operation. The participants will also understand the Islamic Financing requirements for contract business with special emphasis on the preparation and execution of the Islamic Documentation. Objectives This training workshop addresses the fundamental causes of compliance while preparing the documentation & provides the delegate with the Sharia concepts of Islamic structuring covering the security documents for their clients credit. Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the required Security Documentation to secure the bank interest against the financing facility granted to the client as per the approved terms and conditions by the bank Delegates will be able to identify the risks involved with documents not prepared properly from the legal point in Islamic Financing & how to mitigate these risks through obtaining proper documentation for the financing transaction. Suggest to the Business Unit(s) what would be the required documents for the Islamic Financing Product(s) Content Highlights Types and Definitions, Sharia Aspects and Operation of Six Products for Islamic Mode of Finance such as Mudaraba, Murabaha (Business Murabaha), Musharaka, Ijara and Ijara Wa Iqtina (Operational and Financial), Bai Al Salam and Istisnaa. The credit proposal, approval and disbursement process. The practical steps for Islamic financing products The preparation of security documentation and execution of the same by both parties [bank versus client] until release of facilities to operations division for usage by the client The clients requirements and transactions structuring process by the Islamic bank Explain the FATWAs issued by the religious supervisory board of the bank Shamil bank in respect of handling Islamic products and

implementation of the same by operation division in the bank A general guidelines on process of handling transactions by Islamic banks and the banks policy and procedure compliance

Target Audience Credit & Marketing Officers; Compliance, Audit & Legal Affairs Managers; Operational Risk Officers & staff working in Credit Administration; Officers in Banking Operations & Middle Office; Those whom their bank are willing to convert to Islamic Window Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Minimum Prerequisites - Other Relevant banking experience Course Structure The program will be conducted using a variety of learning aids including PowerPoint, PDF slides presentation, lectures, group discussions and problem solving sessions, case studies, and quizzes Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 5 Days 7-11 Oct Abdulnasser Bukamal, Practitioner Islamic Banking, President of Tadreeb,

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 625

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

262

COURSE #: EX628E

Structuring Islamic Transactions

Description This banking course emphasises on the structuring of Islamic products and the practical applications of various Islamic contracts. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Appreciate the Sharia principles and parameters within which they can structure Islamic Banking products Content Highlights The current account, the savings account and the term deposit, Mudaraba investment account including cases, Shamil unrestricted Mudaraba contract and XYZ restricted Mudaraba contract The profit sharing rates, expenses, cash reserves, idle funds and post distribution issues Sharia rules, is it a deposit or an investment? Case: Badr Wakalah contract Retail consumer products, Trade finance Murabaha, Rolling over the Murabaha, Structuring reverse Murabaha A fixed rate deposit, Murabaha non-tradable notes Arcapita case, Murabaha as treasury product, Tawaruq Sharia Rules, Pricing the Musharaka, Dealfixing a rate in a profit/loss sharing contract. Case: Dubai Real Estate Musharaka deal Structuring treasury products: Liquidity management and features of treasury products, Commodity Murabaha Sharia principles, Ijarah Vs. Conventional leasee, Pricing Ijarah Four different methods. Case: Bayt Hospitals corporate Ijarah deal and Tamweel Ijarah Sharia principles of Salam and Istisnaa. Case: Alba Corporate Salam deal and Sharjah Real Estate Istisnaa Deal What are the Sukuk? Requirements for trading of Sukuk, Structuring tradable Sukuk, Sukuk Al-Ijarah-Bahrain Sovereign Sukuk case, Sukuk Al-Intifaah: Case of Zamam Tower, Sukuk AlMusharaka: Case of Dubai Ports Sukuk Target Audience Credit Officers; Branch and Middle Managers; Investment Analysts

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 8-10 Apr Dr. Taha Al Tayeb, Financial Investment Bank, Sudan

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

263

COURSE #: EX630E

Conventional And Islamic Project Finance

Description This course will provide a general idea of project analysis, evaluation, risk treatment, alternative financing, project structure and documentation. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have gained an understanding of: The rationale of project financing How to assess and evaluate project risks The methodology of evaluating the project cash flows Project structures and documentation Quantitative and qualitative techniques of successful projects How to structure financing to recognise the divergent needs of parties involved Content Highlights Identify critical components of a project The rationale behind the project The different stages in the deal Evaluating the project cash flows Identifying risks Alternative financing Inter Creditor agreement Applicable Islamic contracts Project structure and documentation

Target Audience Investment managers; Fund managers; Treasury Staff; Risk managers; Credit Officers; Marketing Officers; Financial Control Staff; Operations Department staff; Sharia Audit Staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure Lectures, group discussion, case studies Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 11-14 Jun : Eman Bu Rashid

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

264

COURSE #: EX631E

Islamic Asset Securitisation

Description This course provides a detailed overview of securitisation, the rationale behind its rapid growth in developed markets, its potential use in Islamic finance and practical issues relating to the securitisation process. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Appreciate the reasons for the growth of securitisation in the developed world Understand the dynamics of securitisation in both developed and emerging markets Appreciate the legal, quantitative and qualitative issues relating to the securitisation process Understand the mechanisms for securitisation available in Islamic finance Practically structure and securitise assets in both Islamic and conventional methods Appreciate the dynamics required to create an effective environment for the development Islamic securitisation Content Highlights Basics of securitisation: o Overview of securitisation in developed markets like USA and Europe o Brief Information about securitisation in the emerging markets o Legal, quantitative and qualitative aspects of securitisation o Other elements in securitisation Interest rate and cross currency swaps Specific Structures: o Commercial mortgage backed securities o Trade receivables securitisation o Islamic securitisation Basic concepts Issues to consider for further development of Islamic securitisation: o Car Lease securitisation Case Study Comparative Analysis between Islamic and Conventional securitisation structures o Current Developments in securitisation that may benefit Islamic securitisation o The Asset Backed Commercial Paper Market (ABCPs) Conventional and Islamic Banking Launching ABCP Conduits.

Target Audience Professionals in Structured Finance; Investment managers; Fund managers; Hedge Fund Managers; Staff in the Trade and Investment Department; Staff in the Treasury Department; Commercial and Residential Real Estate Staff Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 25-27 Mar Lecturers : Gohar Bilal, Islamic Liquidity Management Corporation, Malaysia Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

265

COURSE #: EX633A

( )

3 : : 14 - 12 : : 375 : : 450 :

: () . : ( )26 : : . . . 600A 600E

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

266

COURSE #: EX638E

Islamic Trade Finance

Description The course will highlight Islamic International trade financing and the risks associated with trade structured framework to enhance and develop the core business and operations of the Islamic international trade. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Recognise the Islamic concepts and techniques available to issue letter of credit Understand the significance of Islamic trade finance operations Enhance knowledge of international trade finance products Know the key risks in a trading transaction and how can they be managed Know whether a structured trade finance transaction is more appropriate than a general corporate banking facility Content Highlights Introduction to global trade finance, principles, risks and payments International trade documentations and Incoterms (2000) and L/Cs Structuring and financing trade deals, fraud and Basel II Target Audience Officers from Trade Finance Department Sharia Superintendents Staff from Corporate Finance Departments Relationship Managers Officers from Operations (Trade Finance Operations) Officers from Financial Control Officers in Banking Operations Government Representatives Staff who require knowledge of types of L/Cs Operational Risk Officers Bankers willing to convert to Islamic bank window

Prerequisites None required Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 4 Days : 4-7 Jun : Mr. Arif Khalifa

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 600

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

267

COURSE #: EX643E

Islamic International Trade Finance

Description The course will cover definition and type of all Letters of credit and the actual practice for booking the Islamic accounting entries for financing transactions such as Murabaha, Musharaka, Ijara Wa Iqtina, Month-end accruals of profit; Recoveries and recovery of instalments with delay compensation for late payment; Prepayment of instalment mechanism and calculation of profit with refund of cash gift to client against charge of breakcost Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify the risks involved in such Islamic financing and how to mitigate these risks through the use of letter of credit and compliance with the UCP rules Understand the required shipping documents under the Islamic mode of finance such as Murabaha letter of credit Know the Sharia concept of Islamic structuring for their clients> credit facilities and will have developed an understanding of the accounting techniques Content Highlights Basic introduction to the six products for Islamic mode of finance such as Mudaraba, Murabaha (Personal and Business Murabaha), Musharaka, Ijara and Ijara Wa Iqtina (Operational and Financial), Bai Al Salam and Istisnaa The Islamic banking related to trade finance which will cover contract of Al-Wakalah/ Agency, Definition and type letter of guarantees and comparisons between Islamic versus Conventional products The credit application for structure of the financing facilities Definitions and type of all letters of credit, requirements, structuring and process mechanism All types of Letters of credit and the way of handling the same by the Islamic Bank, definitions, requirements, structure and process mechanism, common discrepancies and calculation of commission and charges Explaining the accounting entries and actual practice for booking the Islamic accounting entries for financing transactions such as Murabaha, Musharaka, Ijara Wa Iqtina, Monthend accruals of profit

Sharia concept of Islamic structuring and accounting techniques FATWAs issued by the Religious Supervisory Board of the Shamil Bank

Target Audience Credit and Marketing Officers; Operational Risk Officers and Staff working in Credit Administration; Officers and Staff working in Banking Operations; Auditors and Internal Control Officers; Bankers willing to convert to Islamic bank window Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure The programme will be conducted using a variety of learning aids including PowerPoint, PDF Slides presentation, lectures, group discussions and problem solving sessions, case studies, and quizzes to illustrate the key points to be learned by the participants Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 4 Days 5-8 Nov Abdulnasser Bukamal, Practitioner Islamic Banking, President of Tadreeb Islamic Banking,

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

268

COURSE #: EX647E

Mechanics Of Financial Markets Islamic Perspective

Description This is a basic course in Financial Markets. The course introduces participants to the financial market contracts and products in an Islamic perspective. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to understand the: Basic scope of financial markets mechanism Products of the financial markets Conventional versus Islamic products and their impact on the economy Content Highlights: Introduction to financial markets The global system in perspective Money markets ( CDs, T-Bills etc.) Central banks and the monetary policy Capital markets ( Stocks, Bonds etc.) Goverment in the financial market Mechanism of the financial markets The impact of financial markets in the economy Financial market derivatives (Pros and Cons) Target Audience All Bankers who need to be introduced to financial markets from an Islamic perspective

Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Note: This course is non-examinable Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 20-22 Mar Fadi Mohamad Ali - General Manager of TAIB securities, Dubai

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

269

COURSE #:EX651E

Islamic Banking Supervision Basel Ii & Capital Adequacy

Description This course provides participants with a comprehensive understanding of the most up to date supervision methodologies of the Islamic banking industry. The workshop will allow participants to examine the unique risks involved with Islamic banks from a supervisory perspective and the risk mitigants employed. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the fundamental principles underlying modern Islamic banking and finance Describe the full range of current Islamic products used in corporate, investment, and retail banking Manage Islamic institutional effectively by increasing participants knowledge of Islamic liability management Understand the significance and rational of the Islamic principles of jurisprudence, know the sources and principles underlying modern Islamic banking and finance Explore the legal, regulatory and operational framework of the Islamic banking and finance industry Understand the unique risk facing Islamic banks, the risk management techniques involved; and the challenges related to people, practices and technology Explore Basel II approaches and the implementation challenges involved Content Highlights General Sharia principles Key Islamic financial instruments / contracts Financial statements structure, analysis and accounting AAOIFI standards IIFM capital market IFSB prudential standards Risk management and its supervisory assessment Minimum capital requirements ( III Pillars)

Target Audience Central Bankers; Banking Regulators; Legal Advisors; Sharia Scholars and Internal Sharia Reviewers / Officers, Asset and Fund Managers; Risk Managers; Accountants and Auditors Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 5 Days : 11-15 Mar : TBA

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 625 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 750

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

270

COURSE #: EX653A

Auditing Takaful Companies - (Arabic)

Description This course looks at the Sharia Audit procedures, manuals and relations to Sharia Supervisory Board (SSB) and other departments in the Takaful companies. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Explain the objective and process of the Sharia inspection in Takaful companies Recognise the differences and relationship between Sharia audit and supervision Build up a Sharia audit program Prepare Sharia audit reports Content Highlights Sharia control, compliance and audit Overview Key players in Sharia compliance, control and audit processes The role of Sharia supervision in Takaful companies The establishment of Sharia audit The differences between Sharia supervision and Sharia audit What to audit? Issue of parallel jurisdictions (accounting, regulatory, financial) and implications Risk management and Sharia compliance (Making sure things work - Rectifying (non-) compliance). General presentation and disclosure in the financial statements of Islamic insurance companies Provisions and reserves in Islamic insurance companies The Sharia audit manual Sharia audit program Cases studies

Target Audience Bank Employees involved in the Sharia Audit Function; Staff of Central Banks; Credit Officers ; Compliance Officers; Sharia Advisors Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 8-10 May Dr. Shaban M. Islam Barwari, Taazur

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 375

Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

271

COURSE #: EX653A

( )

( ) 600A600E 3 : : 10 - 8 : , : : : 357 : : 450

: . : " " : " " " " " " " " " : : . . .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

272

COURSE #: EX656E

Futures Thinking & Strategy Development

Description This course provides an overview of the field of Futures Studies to gain skills in identifying and analysing trends impacting the world on an anthropological, political, technological, sociological, and environmental level. In addition participants will explore ways to create a more just, sustainable and equitable world for future generations, the course is designed to provide you with substantial knowledge regarding the futures thinking and strategy development. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand and be familiar with methods used to develop preferred, probable and possible futures Understand emerging issues and trendsparticularly values changes - creating the futures, especially those that promise to transform the banking and finance sector Articulate and understand the implications of these emerging issues and trends that are likely to impact the financial sector Understand and have the capacity to use methods that map the historical patterns of social change Analyse and develop the preferred vision and policy of Governmental and Private sector institutions and organisations Use futures methods to better understand the probable, possible and preferred futures of various organisations Content Highlights The workshop will consist of four modules: Module 1 (Case studies), Module 2 (Critical success factors in foresight), Module 3 (Methods and Tools) and Module 4 (Reflections and Next Steps): Critical Success factors in creating futures oriented organisations o Understanding and familiarity with methods used to develop preferred, probable and possible futures o Six basic concepts of Strategic Foresight o Role of creativity and use of whole-ofbrain and body for understanding the future Methods and tools in Foresight Futures Triangle o Images of the future o Quantitative pushes of the present (Globalisation, Virtualisation, Outsourcing) o Weights of history (Bureaucracy, Politics, Feudalism)
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Emerging issues analysis - problems, trends and emerging issues The futures wheel - consequences of current trends Casual Layered Analysis Scenario Development and Visioning - Envision your personal and organisational future Back casting - a new approach to strategy

Target Audience Division and Branch managers; Staff of planning, budgeting and financial control departments; Managers, executives, business analysts and those involved in planning and/or implementing strategic initiatives Prerequisites None required Course Structure Presentation followed by interactive workshop. Course Facts Duration : 2 days Dates : 3-4 Apr Lecturers : Prof. Sohail Inayatullah is a political scientist/futurist at Tamkang University, Taiwan & the University of the Sunshine Coast, Australia. Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

273

COURSE #: EX657E

Islamic Liquidity And Treasury Management

Description This course provides new techniques in managing exposure through derivative contracts. It is also covers basic structure of Sukuk. Objectives This programme is designed to stimulate the thinking process and individual abilities to develop and structure Treasury products. Upon the completion of this course, the participant will understand: The characteristics of a wide range of Islamic contracts and their application in developing treasury products The techniques of hedging market risks utilisation synthetic commodity transaction and through built in provisions in the underlying contract The structuring of Islamic investment certificate (SUKUK) and their application in balance sheet management Content Highlights Basic principles Contract characteristics Murabaha, Bai Al Salam, Istisna, Mudharaba, Musharaka, Wekala, Tawarroq Joala, Bai Al Urboon Sources and application of funds Investments in commodity warrants Cash management and money market instruments

Risk Management Mitigating currency exposure, Price volatility, Hedging techniques Mitigating price risk in Salam, Islamic FX option, Profit rate swaps, Risk participation Target Audience Investment Managers; Fund Mangers; Treasury Staff; Risk Managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure A combination of lectures, discussion and cases Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 3-5 Dec Jihad Al Alawi, Oasis Capital Bank, Bahrain

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 375 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 450

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

274

COURSE #: EX658E

Islamic Credit Cards

Description The course will go beyond the technical and Sharia issues of Islamic credit cards to highlight the economic and the social implications of this product. Elaboration on the various differences between conventional credit cards and Islamic credit cards will also be covered. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will have: Comprehensive knowledge that covers all aspects related to Islamic credit cards, from the process of issuance of credit cards in general to the various parties involved in their operation to the Sharia concerns over the current models of Islamic credit cards Learned about the economic and the social implications of this product Learned of the various differences between conventional credit cards and Islamic credit cards; the Islamic concepts and techniques available to issue Islamic Credit Cards and the different stages and actions required in structuring this product Content Highlights Credit cards overview including: Emergence of credit cards, types of cards, features of credit cards, usages of credit cards, issuers of credit cards, mechanism of credit cards, payers in credit cards, economic and social implications of credit cards, credit cards Sharia issues Using conventional credit card diligently, can credit cards be made Islamic? Islamic credit cards including: Examining the current models of Islamic credit cards, credit card Bay Al-Eina model, credit cards Bay AlDayn model, credit cards Murabaha model, prepaid-fee model, general observations on Islamic credit cards, looking beyond Fiqh issues of credit cards

Target Audience Sharia Auditors and Bankers Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course is conducted using a combination of lectures, discussion and case studies Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 2 Days 4-5 Dec Dr. Abdulazeem Abozaid

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 250 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

275

COURSE #: EX659E

Islamic Syndication Structure

Description The course will cover: basic Introduction to the six products for Islamic Mode of Finance; the Financing Syndicated Documentation; definition, features, parties, amount, currency, purpose, term/maturity, repayment, pricing/rate fixing, documentation/ security, sources/availability and example of use; comparisons of Syndicated Transaction between Islamic versus conventional bank; the Credit Application for structuring of the Syndicated Financing Facility; the preparation of Syndicated Documentation and execution of the same by both parties [bank/participants versus client] until release of facilities and disbursement of fund by the Operations Division. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the concept of structuring syndicated credit facilities to meet specific needs Addresses the main goals of compliance while structuring syndicated facilities and preparing the documentation to provide the delegate with the Sharia concept of Islamic structuring covering the security documents Recognise and suggest appropriate structures for clients credit requirements Understand the steps handled by the Islamic Bank for processing the syndication transaction and the required Security Documentation to secure the participant banks interest Target Audience Corporate and Commercial Bankers; Analysts; Syndication Agency Dept.; Government Officials; Regulators; Credit & Marketing Officers and Front Line staff; Compliance professionals, Auditors & Legal Affairs Managers; Operational Risk Officers and staff working in Credit administration; Staff working in Sharia Department; Officers & Staff in Banking Operations & Middle Office; Bankers, whom their bank willing to convert to Islamic Window/Bank.

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent to ensure conformity with BIBF course pre-requisites. As a candidate you are personally responsible for ensuring that you meet the prerequisites before registering on a course. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require you to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - BIBF Course Introduction to Islamic Banking 600A or 600E Course Structure The programme will be conducted using a variety of learning aids including PowerPoint, PDF Slides presentation, lectures, group discussions and problem solving sessions, case studies, and quizzes to illustrate the key points to be learned by the participants Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 4 Days 2-5 Jul Abdulnasser Bukamal, Practitioner Islamic Banking, President of Tadreeb Islamic Bank

Fees: Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 400 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 500

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

276

Professional Qualification: Centre for Islamic Finance

Diploma in Islamic Finance: The Industry Standard Overview Islamic Finance has witnessed an exponential growth trajectory in the past decade, with Islamic Banks operating across more than 20 countries and 6 continents and boasting growth rates double to that of conventional banks. As a result, there is now more than ever, a critical need for banking professionals who are grounded in their understanding of the substance and form of Islamic Finance. The Diploma in Islamic Finance offers a qualification addressing the needs of both Islamic and conventional financial institutions providing Islamic Banking services and products. The programme has been designed to: 1. Provide a professional qualification for commerce graduates to initiate a career in the banking sector 2. Enhance career opportunities for those who are already in the banking sector but require a professional qualification It emphasises the practical aspects of Islamic banking while providing a fair grounding of the jurisprudential foundations of Islamic banking. Objectives To provide students with an understanding of the jurisprudential and theoretical fundamentals of Islamic Banking and Finance To provide an appreciation of the investment regulations relating to the banking industry and to Islamic banks in particular To provide an intellectually stimulating environment in which students can develop their knowledge, understanding and analysis of Islamic financial markets, institutions and systems operating around the globe To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of practical problems in their professional banking careers To train executives desiring specialisation in Islamic banking and finance in order to assist expansion in the banking and finance industry Programme Structure The Diploma of Islamic Finance programme is run flexibly in evenings to suit the working hours of professionals, while simultaneously offering a number of sessions to give candidates the opportunity to fast track their progression. The
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

programme is structured on a 20 weeks semester system and students are required to complete six modules, each having 60 in class hours. The modules are as follows and can be completed in any order: Islamic Commercial Jurisprudence Introduction to Trust, Banking and Business Laws Islamic Insurance (Takaful) Islamic Treasury, Investments and Capital Markets Islamic Banking Operations Islamic Accounting Standards Intended Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this programme, graduates should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of: The jurisprudential and theoretical foundations of Islamic Banking and Finance The regulations (accounting) and laws (commercial, banking and trust laws) applying to banks in general and Islamic banks in particular The basic jurisprudential principles of Islamic Insurance (Takaful) and its operational application by Islamic financial institutions. The forms of financing instruments (retail, investment and treasury) utilised in Islamic finance and the contexts in which they are applied The practical day to day operations of Islamic banks in detail Operations of financial markets, institutions and infrastructure within an Islamic system The current issues facing Islamic Financial Institutions and the overall Islamic Finance industry Prerequisites The programme is conducted in English and as a result, candidates are expected to have a good working knowledge of English in order to progress through the course of study. Applicants who have completed, or who are exempt from, the Business English Certificate Level 3 can enroll in the Diploma Programme The programme is intended for candidates who can demonstrate prior knowledge of commerce, banking and finance either with (a) banking or finance operations/management experience of up to five years or (b) a business, commerce, banking or finance degree from a recognised university. A variety of international qualifications are recognised as meeting this standard

277

Continued.... Professional Qualification: Centre for Islamic Finance

Teaching and learning methods Learning and teaching is provided through lectures, seminars, group work and case studies Contact and feedback is typically provided through projects, coursework assessment (e.g. essays, tests, etc.), lectures, seminars, group work, and one-to-one contact with staff within the personal tutoring system Assessment regulations For each module of the programme, a participant is required to attend 60 inclass hours, complete the required written assignments/quizzes and pass the final exam. All students are required to ensure a MINIMUM attendance of 80% in order to qualify to sit both the Mid-Term and Final examinations. Participants with less than 80% attendance should request their employer to verify the reason(s) for absence. Such verification must be in writing and addressed to the Head of the Centre for Islamic Finance. Failure to sit the Mid-term examination will result in a participant requiring a minimum of 85% of the remaining available marks in order to achieve a pass A participant must achieve a minimum mark of 50% to pass each module. Each module may also have specific requirements that need to be met in order to gain credit for the module. The pass/fail decision for Participants who achieve a mark below 50% but above 45% will be subject to the discretion of the Module Coordinator Participants who achieve less than 45% overall will be required to attend an alternative exam Fees The programme fee structure (in Bahraini Dinars) is as follows: Registration : 15 (Non-refundable) Fee per module : 400 (For every 60 hours) Alternative Exam Fee : 25 Fees are payable at the time of registration for a module. Failure to pay shall result in expulsion from the programme. Module Fees are fully refundable (100%) if the candidate decides to withdraw one week prior to the commencement of the course. Module Fees are NOT refunded if withdrawal takes place at any time later than one week prior to commencement of the course.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

278

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR ISLAMIC FINANCE


Duration CODE 5 5 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 636A 638E 638A 641E 642E 644E 644A 645E 646E 18-19 30-31 20-21 3-4 13-15 7-9 12-14 10-12 18-20 4-6 10-12 635A 23-24 23-24 4-6 634A 25-26 633E 24-25 632E 631A 4-5 8-9 16-17 631E 630E 7-8 17-18 611E 3-5 609E 25-26 14-16 10-11 600A 19-23 8 - 12 600E 8 - 12 12-16 4 - 8 15-19 6-10 3-7 23-27 14-18 4 - 8 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

NO

COURSE TITLE

OPEN COURSES

Introduction to Islamic Banking

Introduction to Islamic Banking (Arabic)

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Islamic Leasing (Ijarah)

Islamic Mutual Funds

Sharia for Bankers

Murabaha Finance for Retail

Murabaha Finance for Retail (Arabic)

Istisnaa Finance for Retail Executives

Islamic Economics for Bankers

10

Introduction to Future Studies Islamic perspective (Arabic)

BIBF CLOSED

11

Skills of Convincing & Influencing Others in Negotiation (Arabic)

12 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

Introduction to Global Economys & Islamic Financial 2 Markets (Arabic)

13

Sharia Audit

14

Sharia Audit (Arabic)

15

Intermediate Islamic Banking

16

Advanced Islamic Banking

18

Islamic Banking Ethics & Corporate Governance

19

Islamic Banking Ethics & Corporate Governance (Arabic)

20

Mudharaba and its Application in Islamic Finance

21

Introduction to Waqf - (NEW)

NO 3 3 3 5 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 5 3 2 3 2 4 EX659E EX658E 2-5 EX657E EX656E EX653A 3-4 EX651E 11-15 8 - 10 EX647E 20-22 EX643E EX638E 4-7 EX633A EX631E 25-27 EX630E 11-14 EX628E 8 - 10 EX627E EX618E 13-15 7 - 11 EX610A 6-8 EX610E 24-26

COURSE TITLE

Duration CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

EXTERNAL COURSES

Sharia Standards

Sharia Standards (Arabic)

SUKUK Demystified

Islamic Documentation Structure

Structuring Islamic Transactions

Conventional & Islamic Project Finance

Islamic Asset Securitisation

Takaful Workshop (Arabic)

12-14 5-8

Islamic Trade Finance

BIBF CLOSED

10

Islamic International Trade Finance

11

Mechanics of Financial Mkts - Islamic Perspective -

12

Islamic Banking Supervision Basel II and Capital Adequacy

13

Auditing Takaful Companies - (Arabic)

14

Futures Thinking & Strategy Development

15

Islamic Liquidity and Treasury Management

3-5 4-5

16

Islamic Credit Cards

17

Islamic Syndication Structure Seminar

Note: English run courses unless otherwise specified

279

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

283

Centre for Leadership and Management

intro

At the Centre for Leadership and Management, we truly believe and practice the philosophy of the greatest assets of any organisation are its people. We are focused on developing and improving human resources to build individual and organisational capability and efficiency. Leadership and Management courses are designed to improve competencies by developing the knowledge, skills and attitude of people. We adopt a professional approach to Leadership and Management development by ensuring that a positive learning environment is established and maintained in the classroom. We do this by making sure that All our courses have SMART learning objectives Adult learning principles are used Rapport with participants, blended learning techniques and constructive feedback are integral to the dynamics of the courses Participants take and accept personal responsibility for their classroom learning and its application back in their place of work A constant review and upgrading of our courses and lecturers is undertaken to ensure that their professional skills are in line with contemporary leadership and management development techniques In addition to the courses outlined in this catalogue, we have the capability to work in partnership with you to produce innovative learning solutions that are directly linked to your identified business strategy, goals and objectives. These tailor-made programmes combine the latest methodologies with innovative technology aimed at giving a blended learning approach to meet your organisational needs. Professional Qualifications The Centre for Leadership and Management is dedicated to help you develop the right people with the appropriate skills and competencies to take on the challenges of your business in order to deliver the right results, at the right time. We offer: The Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development [CIPD] programmes The Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) is the professional body for those involved in the management and development of people. With over 135,000 members throughout
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

284

Continued.... Centre for Leadership and Management

the UK and Ireland, the CIPD is the leading professional body in the field of personnel, training and development. CIPD membership and qualifications are widely acknowledged to enhance career development and job prospects. Theyre internationally recognised as a benchmark for professionalism and are a requirement for many personnel and development roles. Theyve been designed to help you develop the skills and knowledge you need to advance your career. Foundation Level Programmes [Level 3] 1. Certificate & Diploma in Human Resources Practice [HRP] The Certificate and Diploma programmes in Human Resources Practice are designed to introduce candidates to a wide range of practical skills required by todays line managers, personnel officers, personnel assistants, supervisors and team leaders. They are level 3 qualifications based on the CIPDs support-level Professional Standards. On completion of the Foundation level HRP programmes, candidates will be able to: demonstrate a wide range of practical skills used in the human resources function show awareness of the key issues that impact on the human resources function understand the wider context of the human resources function o Award in Human Resources Essentials = 3-6 credits o Certificate in Human Resources Practice = 28 credits o Diploma in Human Resources Practice = 37 credits 2. Certificate & Diploma in Learning and Development Practice [LDP] The Certificate and Diploma programmes in Learning & Development Practice [LDP] will provide candidates with their first step towards a successful career in training. They cover the skills required by proficient trainers such as training officers, training advisers and line managers. They are level 3 qualifications based on the CIPDs supportlevel Professional Standards. On completion of the Foundation level LDP programmes, candidates will be able to: recognise the key issues that impact on the planning and delivery of learning and development programmes identify and prioritise learning needs design and deliver effective learning, development, and assessment programmes effectively evaluate learning and development within the organisation o Award in Learning and Development Essentials:= 3 to 6 credits
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

285

Continued.... Centre for Leadership and Management

o Certificate in Learning and Development Practice = 28 credits o Diploma in Learning and Development Practice = 37 credits Progression On successful completion of the Foundation level programmes [Level 3] candidates can progress to the Intermediate level programmes [Level 5]. Intermediate Level Programmes [Level 5] 1. Certificate and Diploma Programmes in Human Resources Management [HRM] The Certificate and Diploma programmes in Human Resources Management are designed to equip candidates with a wide range of practical skills required by todays line managers, personnel officers, personnel assistants, supervisors and team leaders. They are level 5 qualifications based on the CIPDs Professional Standards. On completion of the Intermediate level HRM programmes, candidates will be able to: demonstrate a wide range of practical skills used in the human resources management show awareness of the key issues that impact on the human resources management understand the wider context of the human resources management o Award in Human Resources = 3 to 12 credits o Certificate programmes in HRM = 32 credits o Diploma programmes in HRM = 44 credits 2. Certificate and Diploma Programmes in Human Resources Development [HRD] The Certificate and Diploma programmes in Human Resources Development [HRD] will provide a wide range of skills required by Learning and Development professionals and line managers. They are level 5 qualifications based on the CIPDs Professional Standards. On completion of the Intermediate level HRD programmes, candidates will be able to: recognise the key issues that impact on the planning and delivery of Human Resources Development programmes identify organisational needs and prioritise learning needs design and deliver effective learning, development, and assessment programmes effectively evaluate human resources development within the organisation
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

286

Continued.... Centre for Leadership and Management

o Award in Human Resources = 3 to 12 credits o Certificate programmes in HRD = 32 credits o Diploma programmes in HRD = 44 credits Progression On successful completion of the Intermediate level programmes [Level 5]. candidates can progress to the Advanced level programmes [Level7]. Diploma in Management & Leadership accredited by the Chartered Management Institute (CMI), UK Through our corporate partnership with CMI, BIBF is offering a range of qualifications designed for practicing middle managers who wish to develop their core management skills and practices. These qualifications focus on the personal development of the individual learners management capabilities and competencies. Participants are provided the option to obtain the Level 5 (UK National Qualifications Framework) Award, Certificate or Diploma in Management and Leadership. To successfully obtain the International Diploma in Management, participants have to complete and pass the following 9 units: 1. Personal and Professional Development 2. Information Based Decision Making 3. Resource Management 4. Meeting Stakeholder and Quality Needs 5. Conducting A Management Project 6. Performance Management 7. Financial Control 8. Marketing Planning 9. Managing Recruitment and Selection To find out more details about the latest CMI qualifications, please refer to the section Day Time Professional Qualifications at the end of the Leadership & Management section of the catalog or visit our website: www.bibf.com Professional Qualifications in Marketing - Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), UK The qualifications are: Introductory Certificate in Marketing (Level1) o What is marketing? o Understanding Customer Relationships
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

287

Continued.... Centre for Leadership and Management

Professional Certificate in Marketing (Level 2) o Marketing Essentials o Assessing the Marketing Environment o Market Information and Research o Stakeholder Marketing Professional Diploma in Marketing (Level 3) o The Marketing Planning Process o Delivering Customer Value through Marketing o Managing Marketing o Project management in Marketing The above qualifications are well recognised internationally and are accredited by the CIM, the largest marketing learning institute in the world. Marketing plays a key role in managing your business effectively. In recognition of the importance of marketing to successful business operations, BIBF also offers courses in sales, marketing and public relations. BIBF has successfully fulfilled special marketing training requirements to organisations in Bahrain and abroad. Our marketing training solutions are delivered by marketing professionals who have hands-on experience in the field. This ensures that participants are exposed to real-life marketing and sales practices. The primary objectives of our marketing courses include: Make participants aware of the importance of marketing in their business. Train Marketing, PR and Sales employees to appreciate the concepts and practical applications to enable their business to gain a competitive edge. Create marketing-oriented employees who are able to deliver customer satisfaction. Adapt to changing business needs to develop professionals capable of making critical business decisions. To find out more details about the CIM qualifications, please visit our website: www.bibf.com

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

288

Index

Category Course Management/Leadership

Title Effective Supervisory Skills The Professional Manager The Professional Manager (Arabic) Managing Change in Organisations Managing Quality High Impact Leadership Coaching Techniques Building High Performance Teams Building High Performance Teams (Arabic) Train the Trainer Strategic Business Planning Organisational Behavior

Page 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325

Code 502 504E 504A 508 509 519 553 563E 563A 568 571 593 545 548 552 520 526 541 564E 564A 556E 556A 567 585E 585A 595 524E 524A 580 581 582 583E 583A 586 596

Business Communication

Business Correspondence Business Report Writing Professional Presentation Skills

Interpersonal Skills

Managing People Problems Effective Time Management Communication Skills Stress Management Stress Management (Arabic) Emotional Intelligence Emotional Intelligence (Arabic) Negotiation Skills Influencing Behaviour Influencing Behaviour (Arabic) Business Etiquette

Marketing & Sales

Winning with Customer Service Winning with Customer Service (Arabic) Marketing Management Successful Selling Techniques Public Relations Marketing Communications Marketing Communications (Arabic) Relationship Marketing & CRM Key Account Management

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

289

Continued....

Index
Category Course Human Resources Title Effective Performance Appraisals Recruitment & Selection Talent & Retention Management HR Planning Techniques HR Management for Non-HR Managers Employee Training & Development Reward Management 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 Code 513 555 569 590 591 592 594

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

290

COURSE #: 502

Management / Leadership Management and Leadership Effective Supervisory Skills

Training courses
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Description This four-day course aims at clarifying the role a supervisor plays as a vital part of management. It covers the functions and responsibilities of the supervisor, and gives participants the opportunity to practice the key competencies and skills required of the effective supervisor. Emphasis of the course is placed on the individuals ability to make a difference to their staff irrespective of senior management or organisational problems. Participants are encouraged to see their role as one of leader, guide, counsellor, and coach not as the old fashioned authoritarian manager. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the importance of the supervisory position to the management team Understand and use the functions and responsibilities of the supervisory position Practice key competencies and skills required by supervisors Content Highlights Supervision as part of management Managing versus Operating Supervisory authority and responsibility Supervisory knowledge and skills Supervision styles Supervision functions: o Planning o Organising/Coordinating o Motivating o Communicating o Controlling Target Audience Practicing supervisors and/or junior managers who would like to upgrade/refresh their knowledge and skills on the supervising / managing aspects of their job, plus newly promoted supervisors who need a formal introduction to the issues of management. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take

291

COURSE #: 502

Continued.... Effective Supervisory Skills

and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Supervisors who have staff reporting directly to them Course Structure This course will use a combination of interactive training methods of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 22-24 Jan, 21-23 Feb, 10-12 Apr, 12-14 Jun, 16-18 Sep, 4-6 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

292

COURSE #: 504 E

The Professional Manager

Description With a host of new challenges and responsibilities to tackle, Managers need training like never before. Learning how to manage new employees on a trial and error basis can lead to discouragement. This three-day workshop will help you understand your management style and team needs and to overcome many of the problems that Managers may encounter. In addition, it will increase knowledge, skills and performance in key areas of Managerial competencies, all the way from planning, reviewing, and team effectiveness. Objectives: Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Increase current knowledge and practice of modern management processes/functions Improve skills and developed competencies in the area of management Clarify the scope and nature of a Managerial position and learn ways to deal with the challenges of the role Recognise the responsibilities as a Manager, to yourself, your team, and your organisation Learn key techniques to help plan and prioritise effectively Acquire a basic understanding of leadership, team building, communication, and motivation, and what part they play in effective supervision Develop strategies for motivating teams, giving feedback, and resolving conflict. Content Highlights Day 1 Introduction and Course Overview Process of management Managerial roles Managerial skills Management styles Managing for quality Management functions Day 2 Leadership Managers vs. Leaders Change Time Management Coaching Shared Vision Case Study & Role plays Criteria for useful feedback Relationships Communication

Target Audience: New Managers, Middle to Senior Managers, Senior Supervisors, newly promoted Managers. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants should be team leaders in their recent jobs/roles Course Structure: This course uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, group discussion/ exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 25-27 Mar, 3-5 Jun, 14-16 Oct Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD300

Day 3 Problem Solving Delegation Personal Development

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

293

COURSE #: 504 A

: . . . . / 3:.

: , . , , . . " . . . . . . - . . . . . .

8-6 .

: :

:. : . 75 : . 300/- : . : .


2012 Training and Development Catalogue

294

COURSE #: 508

Managing Change In Organisations

Description This course aims to help participants recognise the benefits of change. Identify and define what change means, and to take personal responsibility for change as a continuous process. Course content is based on a seven-step model: Developing a Vision Identifying the Gap Setting Targets Developing Strategies Generating Commitment Checking Alignment Mapping the Future

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites Other Participants should be involved in change initiatives in their organisations Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing, group discussion/exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 13-15 Mar, 7-9 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Emphasis is placed on the people part of Change. How to deal with denial and resistance and then encourage exploration and build commitment to change? Participants are encouraged to use their own Change Objective/Situation and numerous opportunities are given for them to apply the concepts. Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will have an understanding of: The factors affecting change and the importance of planning Peoples characteristics needed for successful change Content Highlights The Change process Defining the present situation Where are we now Where do we want to be? (Vision, Mission, Objectives) How do we get there Target Audience Senior Management (GMs, Senior Managers, VPs) wanting to successfully implement and manage change

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

295

COURSE #: 509

Managing Quality

Description Total Quality Management is a system for satisfying internal and external customers and suppliers through both continuous improvements and breakthrough results. The purpose of this course is to provide the basic concepts and practices of Total Quality Management so you can apply these tools to your work for the improvement in your process. Total Quality Management is a guided tour along the road to total quality and techniques for managing, controlling and improving, quality. Objectives Upon the completion of this course the participant will be able to: Discuss the importance of quality Understand total quality concept Describe different ways of ensuring quality Discuss the different approaches of TQM tools and techniques Techniques for managing, controlling, and improving quality Gain the information and skills needed to implement total quality practices Content Highlights Introduction to Quality Management Determine the impact of quality on profitability Communicate the importance of customer focused TQM The six basic quality control tools Statistical process control The seven quality control tools Use seven QC tools for data collection and analysis Target Audience This workshop is designed especially for managers who need to increase their knowledge about TQM to start or refine the implementation of it in their work places. Ideal for middle /senior managers who are directly involved in process development and improvement. Prerequisites None required

Course Structure Blended Learning is the combination of multiple approaches to learning that combines classroom training, Case study discussion, role plays and group activities etc. We emphasise on challenges from everyday life of participants. In our face-to-face sessions furthermore we use business simulations and videos where possible. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 29-30 Apr, 11-12 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

296

COURSE #: 519

High Impact Leadership

Description Leading skills are an essential part of todays management portfolio. If you want to achieve your key objectives, the likelihood is that you will have to lead a group of individuals in a task. Your challenge is to create a team that will reach its full potential. Leadership is one of those things that are often hard to define but you know when you see it, and you definitely know when its missing. This course spotlights on the leadership functions versus conventional management approaches. It is a highly interactive programme, which focuses on improved communication with subordinates in the aim of achieving better results. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understanding good leadership behaviours Learning the difference between leadership and management Defining qualities and strengths of great leader Empowering, motivating and inspiring others Having an understanding of what leadership is and how to improve their leadership abilities Content Highlights Leadership approaches Leading/managing/operating Leadership traits/characteristics Key functions of leadership Identifying the real task Readiness levels Leadership styles and behaviour cues Matching readiness and style Implications of various profiles Development actions to increase diagnosis skills and style flexibility Target Audience Managers and Senior Supervisors who have direct reports

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF Course The Professional Manager 504 Course Structure This course uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, group discussion/ exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 24-26 Jan, 12-14 Feb, 25-27 Mar, 15-17 Apr, 15-17 May, 24-26 Jun, 1820 Sep, Nov 4-6 Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

297

COURSE #: 553

Coaching Techniques

Description Unlocking potential to maximise performance, along with Helping people to learn rather than teaching them are the key outputs of the course. Coaching is a process that managers/supervisors use with their people to ensure that individuals perform at the expected level. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Describe the concept of coaching and differentiate it from other relevant practices such as mentoring Discuss how coaching can help improve productivity and performance within both individual and organisational context Practice a number of key coaching skills including: creating agreement, asking powerful questions and identifying the clients core values Provide effective feedback based on clearly defined standards Identify their individual strengths and weaknesses in coaching for development Content Highlights What is coaching Differentiation between coaching, counselling, and mentoring Connection between performance management cycle and coaching Understanding and use of the coaching model Managing coaching sessions with employees Administration and analysis of coaching skills Individual coaching sessions Target Audience Managers and Supervisors who have staff reporting directly to them Prerequisites None required

Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; assessment surveys and questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 20-22 Mar, 2-4 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

298

COURSE #: 563 E

Building High Performance Teams

Description This is a practical and dynamic course which offers participants the opportunity to acquire and practice effective team building skills. It takes individuals through the stages of team building and coaches them on the challenges they face. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Describe the charecteristics that make an effective team Identify team roles and the generic stages that teams usually go through as they form Discuss practical ways for improving team synergies in any organisational context Analyse potential areas of conflict between the organisational goals and the team needs Content Highlights Characteristics of effective teams Teams verses work groups Stages of team development and their requirements Team membership roles and behaviours Team leadership at each development stage Target Audience Managers, supervisors, and officers who have direct reports or deal with the management of projects

Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group and individual exercises/discussion; self-assessment questionnaires; and team simulations Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 27-29 Mar, 22-24 May, 1-3 Jul, 16-18 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

299

COURSE #: 563 A

. : : : : : / 3 : : 28-26 : .

: : . 75 : . 300/- : . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

300

COURSE #: 568 E

Train The Trainer

Description This workshop is designed for keeping in view, the need for organisations to have a dedicated training team focusing on the training function. The workshop stresses on the importance of training and learning. It examines the significance of training needs analysis, different approaches to training, and identifies the various techniques of training. The skills and traits that a trainer should possess is a part of the workshop. The workshop also provides participants with the opportunity to involve in simulations, design a training plan, and deliver a training session. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify the significance of training Analyse the training needs of employees Examine various approaches to training Assess learning patterns Design a training plan Deliver a training session Evaluate the effectiveness of training Content Highlights Significance of training Learning organisation Role of the trainer Training Needs Analysis Learning styles Training methods Designing training plans Delivering a training session Evaluating training effectiveness Target Audience Training coordinators; Trainers; Training specialists; Supervisors and managers

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites BIBF course Professional Presentation Skills course 552

Course structure The course structure includes a combination of group discussions, case studies, practical exercises and simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 20-22 Mar, 9-11 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

301

COURSE #: 571

Strategic Business Planning

Description Strategic planning enables an organisation to shape and guide its overall business objectives. Through effective strategic planning, an organisation creates a framework for developing, adapting and aligning organisational vision, mission and goals to achieve and sustain competitive advantage. In this course, you will gain the knowledge needed to formulate, execute and monitor the strategic planning for your organisation based on proven analytical techniques and models. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Formulate strategic plans to help their organisation advance and grow Detect the strengths, weaknesses opportunities and threats (SWOT) that drive strategy Identify strategies to better position your organisation for long-term competitive advantage Translate strategy into action Execute strategy and deliver results through people and processes Establish strategic planning, monitoring and controlling mechanisms that ensure positive results By strengthening your business planning skills, you will enable your department and organisation to: Build competitive edge for your business Explain the purpose of a strategic plan Select a strategic direction after analysis of alternative strategic options Implement, evaluate and monitor a strategic plan Review the strategic plan and recommend changes Content Highlights Day One What is strategic planning Why bother with strategic thinking Case study in achieving profitable growth Core differentiation strategies Vision, mission and values Strategic map model Day Two Competitive edge Defining investment priorities Competitive position Environmental changes

Day Three Presenting the change plans pulling everything together into a plan Leading people through change Target Audience Managers, middle level management, supervisors, and decision makers Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Participants should be involved in leading teams / business planning / strategy within their organisations Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 17-19 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

302

COURSE #: 593

Organisational Behavior

Description Organisational behaviour plays an important role in understanding how employees interact with each other within organisations. It is specifically focused on understanding why some people work for some specific organisations and how does that impact strategic planning. The course is designed to address issues related to measuring personal values of employees and mapping them against those offered by the organisational culture. It also draws the light on how the concepts of organisational behaviour can be used to increase employee-organisation fit, retention and potentially productivity. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be able to: Discuss the key elements of organisational psychology within any work place Apply a psychometric tool to discover personal values in class Examine the corporate cultures for some well known international organisations and compare them to their own work place Design a process to measure a particular behaviour at work Evaluate the application of some psychometric tools to solve work place dilemma related to organisational behaviour Content Highlights Research in organisational psychology Group Behaviour The role of psychometric tools Relationships awareness Motivation and motivational values Organisational culture Job attitudes (job satisfaction & commitment)

Target Audience HR specialists and line managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 3-5 Apr, 27-29 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

303

COURSE #: 545

Business Communication Business Correspondence

Description This is a highly practical workshop in which participants experience the necessity of good format, structure and organised business writing for the aim of increasing their existing skills. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Demonstrate understanding of the need for written communication at work Read new information in English at the appropriate level of difficulty and demonstrate comprehension through written responses Appropriately layout formal business correspondence eg. Letters, memoranda, e mails & faxes Apply the appropriate process of written business communication reflecting the various stages of writing Determine the most appropriate vocabulary to deliver an accurate, brief, and comprehensive/ clear message Construct clear business letters/ memoranda/emails/faxes using appropriate format, tone & language Content Highlights Principles of effective writing Steps of business writing Multitude of practical writing exercises of memos, faxes, emails and letters Reinforcement of vocabulary and grammar skills Target Audience Any person wishing to improve their standard of written business communications

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other English language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught PC Usage Course Structure This course is PC based and uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; large and small group discussion; group and individual exercises; and instructional feedback Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 16-19 Jan, 12-15 Feb, 9-12 Apr, 21-24 May, 10-13 Jun, 9-12 Jul, 1-4 Oct, 2-5 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 425

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

304

COURSE #: 548

Business Report Writing

Description This course presents participants with the essential skills in business report writing in a practical way which ensures the transfer of learning to the workplace. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Demonstrate the fundamental skills and techniques to produce and present factual reports Structure a report in a logical sequence for unity and coherence Produce and present factual reports in the appropriate format Determine and select the appropriate language and format to improve the readability and impact of the report Construct clear business reports using appropriate format, tone & language Content Highlights What is Report writing Categories and essential qualities of reports Steps of report writing Structure and format of reports Multitude of practical writing exercises Reinforcement of vocabulary and grammar skills Target Audience Individuals whose job requires them to produce reports Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other English language competence to completion of High School education with English language taught PC Usage Course Structure This course is PC based and uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; large and small group exercises and feedback Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 9-12 Jan, 4-7 Mar, 6-9 May, 1-4 Jul, 16-19 Sep, 4-7 Nov Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 425

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

305

COURSE #: 552

Professional Presentation Skills

Description Presenting in one form or another has become an intrinsic part of our business life. This four day presentation course examines those factors that affect how confidently you deliver your presentation in any particular setting. The workshop provides you with the opportunity to develop and practice your skills as a confident and creative presenter. It offers practical, easy to use techniques to help you cope with nerves, structure and deliver your material with maximum impact and speak effectively to audiences of varied sizes. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand what already works for them as a presenter Develop their unique presentation style Use support materials for maximum impact Maintain confidence and handling nerves Connect with the audience Practice a range of presentation techniques Create key messages with finesse Adapt material to different levels of understanding Handle awkward situations Create compelling, engaging and dynamic PowerPoint presentations Develop a dynamic narrative to focus their key messages Content Highlights Establishing clear aims and objectives Organising information to sell ideas Developing and using visual aids Including using PowerPoint effectively Learning to direct the audiences focus Managing the presentation environment Handling questions from the audience Presentations are video-taped and replayed with instructor and group feedback

Target Audience Individuals whose jobs require them to give presentations to customers or management Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course uses interactive training methods of a combination of instructor led discussion, taped and un-taped individual presentations; and group and instructor feedback Course Facts Duration : 4 Days Dates : 16-19 Jan, 19-22 Feb, 11-14 Mar, 22-25 Apr, 10-13 Jun, 15-18 Oct, 2-5 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 125 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 425

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

306

COURSE #: 520

Interpersonal Skills Managing People Problems

Description Dealing with people problems takes up a large portion of any managers time. This course is designed to improve your effectiveness in undestanding the nature and causes of people problems by equipping you with the tools needed to better manage the process of resolution. Participants will learn and apply various processes designed to provide a systematic framework for gathering, organising and evaluating information for reasoned decisions. The programme will also give you the opportunity to find out your natural reaction to conflict and to build some of the skills necessary to deal positively with conflict in the work place. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Describe the difference between problem people and people problems Apply active listening skills to accurately identify the roots of a problem Explain the usefulness of collaborative problem solving and decision making Analyse their own conflict management style Formulate coping strategies for dealing with difficult people and difficult situations Content Highlights Types and causes of people problems Dealing with problems systematically Counseling as a Management Tool Effective decision making Conflict management and resolution methods Communication skills for resolving conflict Coping with difficult people Collaborative problem solving Influencing strategies Target Audience Managers and supervisors

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Prerequisites - Other Participants are to have staff reporting directly to them. Course Structure This course stresses the practical application of theory, using interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; case study and role-play activities. The content concentrates on the core areas typically related to people problems. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 Days 24-26 Jan, 11-13 Mar, 27-29 Apr, 7-9 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 325

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

307

COURSE #: 526

Effective Time Management

Description The objective of this course is to help participants realise some of the causes and outcomes of their ineffective use of time, and to implement a developmental plan to manage their time more effectively. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Discuss the causes for and outcomes of their ineffective use of time Implement a developmental plan to manage their time more effectively Content Highlights Using time logs Planning process and tools Prioritising tasks Time wasters and savers Dealing with interruptions Desk management Target Audience All levels of staff that are time challenged Prerequisites None required

Course Structure This course is highly practical and participative, and will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; assessment surveys and questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and video based learning Course Facts Duration : 2 Days Dates : 29-30 Jan, 28-29 Feb, 25-26 Mar, 25-26 Apr, 20-21 May, 17-18 Jun, 8-9 Jul, 23-24 Sep, 21-22 Oct, 18-19 Nov, 9-10 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 225

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

308

COURSE #: 541

Communication Skills

Description Comprehending the essentials of communication process and participants own communication styles is at the heart of this programme. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Have a deeper understanding of the communication process Identify their individual communication style Explain HOW the differences in communication styles will affect interpersonal communication Interact with improved face-to-face communication skills Content Highlights The communication model Communication breakdown Verbal vs. non-verbal communication Listening skills The four communication styles Demonstrate co-operation and commitment through positive communication Target Audience This course is appropriate for non-management staff Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; large and small group discussion; exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning

Course Facts Duration : 2 Days Dates : 22-23 Jan, 26-27 Feb, 18-19 Mar, 11-12 Apr, 9-10 May, 10-11 Jun, 8-9 Jul, 3-4 Oct, 11-12 Nov, 19-20 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 225

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

309

COURSE #: 564 E

Stress Management

Description This course focuses on the nature and causes of stress. Work-related stress is discussed in more details with a focus on solutions to reduce stress thus, leading to a better working environment. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Recognise their individual stress signals Make more informed decisions about the results of the stress they are experiencing Manage their stress more effectively Content Highlights Nature of stress Sources of stress Effects of stress Evaluation of stress Stress reduction strategies Target Audience Any person who finds difficulty in coping with work stress Prerequisites None required

Course Structure This course is practical and participants will be asked to share their experiences. A variety of interactive training methods are used, including lecturing, discussion, self-assessment questionnaires and videos Course Facts Duration : 2 Days Dates : 15-16 Jan, 15-16 Feb, 29-30 Apr, 27-28 May, 24-25 Jun, 15-16 Jul, 26-27 Sep, 28-29 Nov, 19-20 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 225

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

310

COURSE #: 564 A

: : : .

: . : : :

: 19-18 : .

: . 75 : . 225/- : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

311

COURSE #: 556 E

Emotional Intelligence

Description Emotional Intelligence (EI) has emerged as an important area of study in helping individuals to develop a better understanding of themselves and of others. It facilitates one to be more successful in life by having better relationships, and a higher quality of life. All other attributes remaining constant, the one with a higher EI has the competitive edge to succeed. This course, specifically, deals with the science and practice of EI. It aims to provide participants with the opportunity to understand their emotional balance, and reorient themselves towards interactions that are more productive. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Increase their self awareness Understand others behaviour Communicate more effectively Improve personal/ professional relationships Access personal strengths and resources Manage interactions in a positive manner Content Highlights Emotions and moods Attitudes Determinants of personality Self image Self awareness/ self - management Rapport building Symptoms of low EI Relationship management

Target Audience Supervisors and managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 2 Days 11-12 Jan, 6-7 Jun, 3-4 Oct BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

312

COURSE #: 556 A

2:. : 5-4 : . : : . 50 : . : . 200/- : .

. . . . : . . . / / /

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

313

COURSE #: 567

Negotiation Skills

Description Negotiation is something that we do all the time and is not only used for business purposes but in our social lives. Negotiation is usually considered as a compromise to settle an argument or issue to benefit ourselves as much as possible. Negotiation, in a business context used many things like for selling, purchasing, staff (e.g. contracts), borrowing (e.g. loans) and transactions, along with anything else that you feel are applicable for your business. Our Negotiation Skills programme is tailored to address specific issues of negotiation Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Prepare effectively Understand the needs and interests of all parties Identify and counter negotiation tactics Conclude significantly better agreements as a result of creativity Formalise deals that can be described as completely optimal Content Highlights Understanding types of negotiation Seeing other points of view Reading other people Defining your negotiation style Working with your own negotiation rules and beliefs Knowing your bottom line Dealing with hidden agendas Making decisions Closing the deal

Target Audience All managers, team leaders, salespersons, and people who find themselves in a position where they need to negotiate and persuade to succeed.Our negotiation training can benefit any business professionals with experience that are looking to sharpen or build up their negotiation skills and increase their chances of obtaining a negotiating agreement. Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course combines classroom training, case study discussions, role plays and group activities etc. In our face-to-face sessions, we use business simulations and videos where possible Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 2 Days 15-16 Jan, 4-5 Apr, 23-24 Sep BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

314

COURSE #: 585E

Influencing Behaviour

Description Effective people and leaders know how to encourage others to willingly, even enthusiastically, support their ideas and initiatives. No matter what your job responsibilities may be, the ability to establish rapport quickly, communicate your ideas successfully, and convince others to have confidence in you will decrease your frustration and enable you to achieve your goals. This two - day, interactive workshop will provide a synthesis of current thought on how to influence people. Through individual and group exercises, discussions, and analysis of examples from motion pictures, you will come to understand the principles of ethical persuasion. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Come away with practical ways to become an influencer Discover what works and what does not work when you encounter workplace negativity or lack of enthusiasm Learn verbal and nonverbal communication strategies to help you become a more motivational leader Be provided with helpful handouts with examples to implement Learn simple techniques which will save you time and frustration Content Highlights Planning to influence Influencing styles Whats in it for me Communicating your message Influencing through rapport Influencing different personalities Handling resistance Getting a decision Elements of a persuasive case Strategic considerations for persuasion Target Audience All Staff

Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Those with interests in developing leadership abilities and interpersonal communication skills to influence, persuade, inspire, or motivate others Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 13-14 May, 7-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

315

COURSE #: 585 A

/ 3 : .

:: . . . . : : . . .

: 22-21 :

:. : . 75 : . 300/- : . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

316

COURSE #: 595

Business Etiquette

Description Etiquette is a very important factor in determining the success or failure of a business or a person. Etiquette is the way a person presents himself to others, being comfortable and making other people around them comfortable. Good business etiquette equals a recipe to success. It is very important to practice good manners and etiquette in order to succeed in your business, be liked by people and maintain good relationships with clients, customers and employees. Todays manager increasingly has to work in international and cross cultural environments. In addition to the normal pressures of peoplemanagement, managersare now required to deal with challenges, friction and misunderstandings emanating from cross cultural differences. Effective management in the modern environment necessitates cross cultural competency in order to get the best out of a multicultural team. Objectives On completion of the course participants: Will gain an insight on the importance of impressive professional appearances in business Will get a guide to vital business etiquette regarding office courtesy and professional meetings Will learn how to create good interpersonal skills for communicating at workplace with clients and colleagues Will be able to incorporate the essentials of effective relationship building at all stages of communication, right from the introduction Will be able to understand challenges, friction and misunderstandings emanating from cross cultural differences Content Highlights Making that great first impression Greetings The handshake Business card etiquette Dress for success Overcoming fear of embarrassment Business dining E-Mail and telephone etiquette Insight and understanding of how cross cultural and intercultural issues manifest in the workplace Providing guidance on how to leverage cultural differences and maximise the potential of a multicultural team Managing diversity
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Target Audience Business development managers, Public Relation managers, Client relationship officers Prerequisites None Required Course Structure: This course uses interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, group discussion/ exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 15-16 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

317

COURSE #: 524 E

Marketing and Sales Winning With Customer Service

Description This course aims to provide participants with simple and specific interpersonal skills that will help them to exceed customers expectations, and also to help participants achieve positive results when communicating by telephone through acquiring greater self-confidence, and more effective exchange of information. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will: Possess a strong understanding of what is customer service Understand their individual strengths and weaknesses, through awareness surveys, of their own customer service skills Recognise and realise their customers needs, wants and expectations, and identify how to exceed them Know their organisations focus on customer service Demonstrate skills in dealing with upset customers Have a clear understanding of how internal customer relations impact external customer relations Content Highlights What is customer service Internal and external customer relations Making a good first impression on your customer Identifying customers needs, wants, and expectation Your companys focus on customer service How to handle awkward customers Steps in handling customer complaints Telephone answering technique Procedure of transferring and taking transferred calls Placing callers on HOLD Dealing positively with requests and inquiries Accurate message-taking Handling difficult or upset callers

Target Audience Employees who deal with internal and external customers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; assessment surveys and questionnaires; case studies; role play activities; and video-based learning Course Facts Duration : 3 Days Dates : 10-12 Jan, 7-9 Feb, 1820 Mar, 17-19 Apr, 13-15 May, 17-19 Jun, 3-5 Jul, 23-25 Sep, 4-6 Nov, 2-4 Dec Lecturers : BIBF Faculty Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 100 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 325

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

318

COURSE #: 524 A

: , 15 -13 5-3 :

3 : , .20-18 .

: . . : : - : / /

: : . 100 : . 325/- : . : .

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

319

COURSE #: 580

Marketing Management

Description This course will help participants to better understand the role of marketing, the organisations current market position and planning for widening markets. It will also help participants to clearly develop a sound marketing plan for better corporate results. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the meaning and role of marketing in achievement of organisational objectives Identify the organisations current and future position in the sectors or markets in which it operates Devise and implement a marketing plan that contributes to achievement of organisational objectives Content Highlights Marketing as a management process The role of marketing Marketing positioning Defining organisations position The impact of the marketing plan on the organisation Developing the marketing plan Organisational buy-in to the marketing plan Evaluating the success of the marketing plan

Target Audience Employees who wish to understand the marketing function Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion/exercises and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 8-10 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

320

COURSE #: 581

Successful Selling Techniques

Description This course will help participants to effectively use different types of selling techniques for better sales deals. It shows how sales should be planned and managed, ways to overcome customer objections and to finally close the sale. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Use goal-setting techniques as a way to focus on what should be accomplished and develop strategies for getting there Recognise the difference between features and benefits of products and services Identify and present the competitive strengths of products and services Use different types of selling for different situations Identify ways to find new clients and network effectively o Understand the importance of expanding a client base through effective prospecting o Be able to identify target markets and target companies with the 80/20 rule in mind o Identify the objections that can be encountered most frequently o Learn how to recognise when a prospect is ready to buy o Use techniques for closing the sale Content Highlights What is selling Essential selling skills Features and benefits of products and services Setting smart goals/objectives Time management tips Types of selling Selling price Sales steps Prospecting and networking The 80/20 rule Overcoming objections Body language Closing the sale

Target Audience Sales Professionals Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion/exercises, role plays and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 19-20 Feb : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

321

COURSE #: 582

Public Relations

Description This course will help participants apply the fundamental principles of Public Relations to their organisations and manage the PR function effectively. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Create a PR plan Have a better understanding of the media Deal and evaluate PR campaigns Content Highlights Public relations, what it can do and how it fits into the organisational structure Public relations campaigns Public relations functions and the press/ broadcast media Evaluating public relations effectiveness Target Audience Public Relations professionals

Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion/exercises and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 27-28 Jun : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

322

COURSE #: 583 E

Marketing Communications

Description This course will help participants identify which communications tool is best suited to achieve specific marketing objectives and how to manage marketing communications in an effective manner to ensure efficient use of the communications budget. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Develop the appropriate marketing communication mix to address business needs Content Highlights How marketing communications fits in the marketing mix What is the marketing communications mix What is advertising, public relations and sales promotions and how to use them in a coordinated marketing communications strategy Pros and cons of media, selection and the media schedule Target Audience Employees responsible for marketing communications

Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion/exercises and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 22-23 Apr, 5-6 Dec : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

323

COURSE #: 583 A

2 : : 18-17 : . : : . 50 : . : . 200/- : .

: . : : : : /

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

324

COURSE #: 586

Relationship Marketing and Crm


Description This course will help participants understand the various aspects of relationship marketing. This will help facilitate a reduction in customer churn rates, improve customer loyalty, with the flow on organisational benefit of achieving a higher rate of return on the marketing budget. It is designed to help participants improve the quality of relationship management and achieve the benefits of long-term customer value. Relationship marketing will be set in a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) context: CRM was developed in the late 1990s as a way to redefine customer and company relations, mostly with the help of computerised measurement tools. It is about creating sustainable connections between an organisation and its customers. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Recognise the elements of transactional marketing and relationship marketing Understand the relationship marketing process Manage the relationship life cycle Identify and analyse customer expectations and perceptions of different target groups Recognise the tools and techniques used to implement relationship marketing Plan and implement a customer loyalty programme Develop a relationship marketing plan Address the internal issues that affect success in relationship building Use technology to build and maintain relationships Recognise the role and importance of having CRM systems in their own organisations Content Highlights What is relationship marketing Transactional and relational marketing The relationship life cycle Relationship marketing and loyalty Important factors in developing relationships of different groups Measuring customer satisfaction Managing customer expectations Understand relationship marketing tools and techniques Understand the internal factors that affect customer relations Using technology to build relationships Understand, select and implement a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) system in the context of their own organisation The benefits of effective CRM systems at work
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Create a customer loyalty programme Develop the marketing relationship plan

Target Audience The course is beneficial to participants who are currently involved or expect to be involved in building and maintaining customer relationships. It is also recommendable to participants who are interested to understand the aspects and benefits of long term customer retention. Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion, exercises and video-base learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 15-17 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

325

COURSE #: 596

Key Account Management

Description This course will help participants to understand the various aspects of key account management which starts by putting a plan for acquiring and building the relationships with business clients. Good account management of organisations can aid differentiation among competitors. Account managers have the responsibility of understanding and employing professional account management skills for account acquisition and retention. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will: Understand and apply the Key Account Management principles (KAM) Clearly understand the role of the Account Manager Form a motivated team to fulfil KAMs requirements Appreciate the importance of KAM Understand each account and anticipate their needs and potential Develop appropriate strategies for each account Develop an implementation plan Monitor actions and improve results Content Highlights KAM and 80/20 rule KAM process starts with selection Analyse your Key Account business Develop a strategy and manage your Key Account Understand your clients organisation Focus on your Value Proposition Skills required for KA Manager and the team to include: o Communication, Negotiation and Bargaining o Time Management o Marketing, Selling and Customer Service Motivation Team Formation Target Audience The course is beneficial to participants who are new or have experience in managing key accounts and want to develop a structured approach to growing business with their key accounts. It is also good for sales managers and everyone who has connections or is expected to have relationships with clients. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or

experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Good understanding of account relationship management. Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing, case studies, group discussion, exercises and video-base learning. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 15-17 Jul : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

326

COURSE #: 513

Human Resource Management Effective Performance Appraisals

Description Performance Management is a holistic approach to managing performance, which is making evergreater demands on the knowledge and skills of managers, as they must carry a greater responsibility for their colleagues results. With a stronger understanding of the Performance Management sequence, participants come to the realisation that APPRAISALS are only one small, but extremely important aspect of this sequence. The course will allow participants to be able to: Relate all aspects of performance into the Performance Management sequence Differentiate performance objectives from job responsibilities Establish clear standards, expectations and clear performance objectives Encourage strong achievement attitudes in staff Accurately assessing and documenting performance Adapt an appraisal style to suit individual appraisees needs and make appraisals a positive experience, use a systematic approach to prepare, conduct and control appraisals Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Understand the holistic concept of performance management - purpose, aims and benefits Understand the role of each stage of the performance management cycle, especially planning and evaluating Understand the function of a performance review and appraisal, and how each is integral to performance management Determine the effectiveness of their individual existing appraisal skills and abilities, in order to make improvements Demonstrate their working knowledge as to how to make the performance reviews and appraisals a positive experience for both review and development Demonstrate the skills and techniques necessary to get the most out of any appraisal session for both, the manager and subordinate, as practiced in the role-plays

Content Highlights What is performance management Rationale for performance management in your organisation (purpose, aims and benefits) Performance management cycle (planning, coaching and evaluating) Monitoring and documenting performance Giving feedback-praising, motivating, constructive, areas for development The evaluating process (evaluating/rating performance/core competencies) Planning and conducting the appraisal discussion Skills in conducting reviews and appraisals body language, voice, handling difficult discussions, style, summarising Overcoming common problems in reviews and appraisals Target Audience Managers and supervisors actively involved in the performance management of personnel Managers and supervisors who complete performance reviews and appraisals of staff Prerequisites None Required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including lecturing Strong emphasis on group discussion/exercise; case studies; role-play activities and video-based learning Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 12-14 Feb, 16-18 Sep : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

327

COURSE #: 555

Recruitment and Selection

Description When it comes to recruitment, the size of the business is not important, as large companies can no more afford to recruit unsuitable candidates than smaller ones. So, one of the most difficult, as well as, important skills managers/supervisors need to master is how to recruit suitable employees efficiently. The subjective approach to recruitment can generate unreliable information resulting in candidates failing to live up to expectations, but the skilled interviews takes a structure approach and gets the right information from both, documents and interviews, that give a more reliable indication of future performance. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify and follow the necessary steps in requesting, an employee Understand requirements of job descriptions, employee specifications, rsums and objectives test results in recruitment Short-list and select from several applicants Plan, prepare and conduct interviews using systematic recruitment techniques Understand how to build rapport in conducting interviews Apply a systematic approach to making valid recruitment decisions Share information on problems and solutions to those problems in recruiting employees.

Content Highlights The recruitment process Job description and person specifications Screening and short-listing Assessment testing awareness The selection process Systematic approach to selection decisions Target Audience Managers and supervisors involved in the recruitment and selection process of their organisation. Those who will benefit most are people who have not received either any formal training or wish to improve their selection skills. Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course is designed from a practical perspective and will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing, group discussion/ exercises; and extensive role-play activities Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 29-31 May : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

328

COURSE #: 569

Talent & Retention Management

Description Employees are the most important assets of organisations when they are investing significant time and money into their development. Retaining top talent has never been more important in maintaining a competitive edge. Yet in many organisations, this critical function is often left unplanned and without an organisational support system for retention. This workshop is aimed at examining the best practices that organisations should employ to retain and manage their human talent productively. It offers frameworks for both line and human resource managers to lead their organisations in developing talent management and retention systems that provide clear career paths for highly valued employees. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify the building blocks of talent management Set up a talent management system Assess linkages that exist between organisation excellence and effective people management Develop systems to identify, keep, develop and promote their best people Coach, train and develop super keepers Integrate compensation with talent management so that they can retain their top people Content Highlights Introducing a Talent Management System The building blocks of talent management: o Coaching, training and development o Talent planning o Using compensation to implement a talent management plan Ethical leadership

Target Audience Supervisors and managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure The course structure includes a combination of group discussions, case studies, practical exercises and simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 25-27 Sept : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

329

COURSE #: 590

HR Planning Techniques

Description Human resources are one of the most important assets in any organisation. A significant aspect of a managers job is to plan for this in a systematic manner. Human resources planning involves, planning for the right number of employees, in the right place, at the right time, doing the right job. This course is especially designed to keep in view the requirements of the corporate world. It focuses on an integrated approach to the planning function in organisations. It aims to provide participants with the opportunity to evaluate various techniques of planning. It facilitates them to acquire and hone their managerial skills for effective human resources planning in their organisations. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Assess the importance and implications of human resources planning Examine current human resources requirements Focus on the integrated approach to human resources planning Evaluate various human resources planning techniques Develop a system for human resources planning Content Highlights Organisational context Job market influences Importance of planning Human resources assessment Human resources planning techniques Dimensions of human resources planning Career and succession planning

Target Audience Supervisors and Managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 7-9 Feb, 16-18 Oct : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

330

COURSE #: 591

Hr Management For Non-HR Managers

Description Human resources management, a multi-disciplinary subject is the responsibility of all managers in the organisation. In order to be more effective, managers of different functional areas need to have the required knowledge base in human resources management. This course emphasises the need for supervisors and managers to have an understanding of the human resources function, since they are involved in the formulation of human resources policies, decisions and implementation. It is imperative that these practitioners assess the various human resources techniques that are best suited for their employees and organisation. Above all, they need to appreciate their role as human resources managers. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Identify the interrelated function of human resources management Examine various human resources mechanisms Assess the role of managers in the human resources function Evaluate the effectiveness of acquisition process Analyse the maintenance, development, and utilisation policies Content Highlights Human resources mechanisms Human resources planning techniques Position profiling Compensation and reward systems Recruitment and selection Training and development Coaching and counselling employees Performance appraisal techniques

Target Audience Supervisors and Managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 1-3 Apr, 6-8 Nov : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

331

COURSE #: 592

Employee Training and Development

Description Training and developing employees is a core function in organisations. Organisations are allocating significant budgets for training their employees who are encouraged to attend training and development programmes for enhancing their productivity. This course examines the linkage between training employees and their effectiveness in organisations. The main focus of the course is to identify the needs of employees and formulate training plans accordingly. It aims at providing participants with the opportunity to assess various training methods and evaluate the effectiveness of training given. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Assess the significance of developing employees Differentiate the benefits of various training methods Identify training needs of employees Develop training plans Evaluate the effectiveness of training Content Highlights Significance of training and development Developing competencies Training needs analysis (TNA) Training plan Training methods Learning domains Effectiveness of training

Target Audience Supervisors and Managers Prerequisites None required Course Structure This course will use interactive training methods including a combination of lecturing; group discussion/exercises; self-assessment questionnaires; case studies; role-play activities; and team simulations Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 3 Days : 4-6 Mar : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 75 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

332

COURSE #: 594

Reward Management

Description The reward management course provides participants with a good understanding of the significance of reward systems in an organisational context. Organisations need to formulate equity based reward systems to sustain the motivation and engagement of employees. This course is aimed at examining the best compensation practices that organisations should employ to reward their employees. It enables participants to focus on ethical principles of reward, policy initiatives and key practices in compensation planning. Establishing fair compensation and reward system, effectively managing the system and being proactive in improving the reward system forms a vital part of the course. Objectives Upon completion of this course participants will be able to: Link reward system to the business context Identify the significance of a reward system Analyse the factors influencing reward systems Assess key reward principles, policies and practices Set up a reward management system Establish internal/external equity Evaluate compensation dimensions related to a reward system Content Highlights Business strategy and context HR philosophy Market influences and competitor analyses Elements of a reward system Principles and practices of a reward system Establishing and managing a reward system Training and developing decision makers Ethical practices in reward management Reward management and employee engagement

Target Audience Supervisors, line managers, HR specialists, generalists, compensation/ reward analysts Prerequisites None required Course structure The course structure includes a combination of group discussions, case studies, practical exercises and simulations. Course Facts Duration Dates Lecturers : 2 Days : 29-30 Apr : BIBF Faculty

Fees: Member Organisations GCC Nationals : Covered by Levy Other Nationalities : BD 50 Fees: Non Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD 200

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

333

Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
The Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development [CIPD] programmes The Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) is the professional body for those involved in the management and development of people. With over 135,000 members throughout the UK and Ireland, the CIPD is the leading professional body in the field of personnel, training and development. CIPD membership and qualifications are widely acknowledged to enhance career development and job prospects. Theyre internationally recognised as a benchmark for professionalism and are a requirement for many personnel and development roles. Theyve been designed to help you develop the skills and knowledge you need to advance your career. Foundation Level Programmes [Level 3] Fee structure: Certificate in HR Practice [CHRP] Certificate in L&D Practice [CLDP] Diploma in HR Practice [DHRP] Diploma in L&D Practice [DLDP] BD 1,600/BD 1,600/BD 2,050/BD 2,050/-

Important Note: 1. Participants who completed an award and registered for the certificate or diploma programme are eligible for a fee reduction to the extent of the guided hours fees of the award. 2. Participants registering for the certificate/ diploma programmes may be given the option of paying unit wise fees. They have to indicate at the time of registration that they are opting for the full certificate/ diploma programme. The fees at the time of registration will be BD 400/- [i.e. fees for the first unit - 4 credits = BD 200/- + BD 200/- for membership fees and book cost. Then onwards unit wise fees will be charged. Core units for Certificate and Diploma 10 credits from core units - same core for both pathways [HRP & LDP] Guided learning hours Fees Certificate/ Diploma

Unit code

Unit title

Credit value

Award Fees

4DEP

Developing yourself as an effective human resources or learning and development practitioner Understanding organisations and the role of human resources Recording, analysing and using human resources information

20

BD 225/-

BD 400/-

3HRC

20

BD 225/-

BD 200/-

3RAI

10

Not eligible for award

BD 100/-

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

334

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Optional units for Certificate and Diploma: Human Resources Practice Unit code 3RTO 3CJA Unit title Credit value 6 3 Guided learning hours 30 15 Fees Certificate/ Diploma BD 300/BD 150/-

Award Fees BD 325/BD 175/-

Resourcing talent Contributing to the process of job analysis Supporting good practice in performance management and reward Supporting good practice in managing employment relations

3PRM

30

BD 325/-

BD 300/-

3MER

30

BD 325/-

BD 300/-

Learning & Development Practice Guided learning hours 15 15 30 15 15 15 Fees Certificate/ Diploma BD 150/BD 150/BD 300/BD 150/BD 150/BD 150/-

Unit code 3LNA 3PDL 3DLA 3ELA 3DCS 3DMS

Unit title

Credit value 3 3 6 3 3 3

Award Fees BD 175/BD 175/BD 325/BD 175/BD 175/BD 175/-

Undertaking a learning needs analysis Preparing and designing learning and development activities Delivering learning and development activities Evaluating learning and development activities Developing coaching skills for the workplace Developing mentoring skills for the workplace

Intermediate Level Programmes [Level 5] Fee structure: Certificate in HRM [CHRM] Certificate in LHRD [CHRD] Diploma in HRM [DHRM] Diploma in HRD [DHRD] BD 1,700/BD 1,700/BD 2,150/BD 2,150/-

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

335

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Imp Note: 1. Students registering for the certificate/ diploma programmes have to pay the fees before commencement of the programme. However, self sponsored students may be given the option of paying the fee in two instalments, if they deserve it. In exceptional cases students may be given the option of paying unit wise fees. They have to indicate at the time of registration that they are opting for the full certificate/ diploma programme. 2. Students who completed an award and registering for the certificate or diploma programme are eligible for a fee reduction to the extent of the guided hours fees of the award.

CIPD: Intermediate Level Certificate Programme [Level 5] Human Resource Management (HRM) - [32 credits] Unit code 5BIC 5DPP 5IHR 5MHR Unit title Credit value 6 4 4 6 3 3 6 Guided learning hours 30 20 20 30 15 15 30 Award fees 325 225 225 325 175 175 325 Certificate/ Diploma unit fees 400 200 200 300 150 150 300

Business issues and the contexts of human resources Developing professional practice Using information in human resources Managing and coordinating the human resources function Developing coaching and mentoring within organisations Knowledge management Resourcing and talent planning

5DCM 5KNM 5RTP

Additional Units for: Intermediate Level Diploma Programme [Level 5] Human Resource Management (HRM) - [44 credits] Unit code 5IOP 5RWM Credit value 6 6 Guided learning hours 30 30 Award fees 325 325 Certificate/ Diploma unit fees 300 150 [Discounted fee]

Unit title Improving organisational performance Reward management

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

336

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
CIPD: Intermediate Level Certificate Programme [Level 5] Human Resource Development (HRD) - [32 credits] Unit code 5BIC 5DPP 5IHR 5MHR 5DCM 5MDN 5IOP Unit title Business issues and the contexts of human resources Developing professional practice Using information in human resources Managing and coordinating the human resources function Developing coaching and mentoring within organisations Meeting organisational development needs Improving organisational performance Credit value 6 4 4 6 3 3 6 Guided learning hours 30 20 20 30 15 15 30 Award fees 325 225 225 325 175 175 325 Certificate/ Diploma unit fees 400 200 200 300 150 150 300

Additional units for Intermediate Level Diploma Programme [Level 5] Human Resource Development (HRD) - [44 credits] Unit code 5KNM 5HRS 5HRD Unit title Credit value 3 3 6 Guided learning hours 15 15 30 Award fees 175 175 325 Certificate/ Diploma unit fees 150 150 150 [Discounted fee]

Knowledge management Human resources service delivery Contemporary developments in human resources development

To find out more details about the latest CIPD qualifications, please visit our website : www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 17815555 / 17815579 or 17815529 CMI: Diploma in Management and Leadership With over 86,000 members internationally, the Chartered Management Institute (CMI) UK, is dedicated to promoting the highest standards in management and leadership excellence both in the UK, and globally. Being the only chartered professional body in the UK that awards management and leadership qualifications, the CMI literally sets the standards that others must follow. With its powerful mandate from the management community, the CMI ensures that its members voices are heard at top tables in government, education and business. As a manager, when you join the CMI, youre making a statement about your standards and determination to continue to develop your management skills. Through our corporate partnership with CMI, BIBF is offering a range of qualifications designed for practicing middle managers who wish to develop their core management skills and practices. These qualifications focus on the personal development of the individual learners management capabilities and competencies. Participants are provided the option to obtain the Level 5 (UK National Qualifications Framework) Award, Certificate or Diploma in Management and Leadership.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

337

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Objectives Upon completion of these programmes participants will have: The key management skills to be able to operate effectively as a middle manager The opportunity to develop a range of competencies from operational management principles and practices to the development of resource control and use The ability to manage every aspect of the business (on completion of the diploma) The Diploma in Management and Leadership is recognised by the CMI as the benchmark qualification for full membership of the Institute, and enables successful candidates to progress towards Chartered Manager Status. Flexible qualification structure The Level 5 qualifications in Management and Leadership offer a highly flexible approach to learning. They allow the freedom and choice to select from a range of units available allowing employers and individuals to tailor the size and elements of the qualifications to suit their specific needs. Award: To achieve a CMI Level 5 Award in Management and Leadership, you need to successfully complete at least one unit to a minimum of 6 credits. Certificate: To achieve a CMI Level 5 Certificate in Management and Leadership, you need to successfully complete any combination of units to a minimum of 13 credits. Diploma: To achieve a CMI Level 5 Diploma in Management and Leadership, you need to successfully complete all nine units to a total of at least 62 credits.

Units available to study are: Guided learning hours 20 (4 days) 25 (5 days) 25 (5 days) 20 (4 days) 35 (7 days) 30 (6 days) 30 (6 days) 30 (6 days) 25 (5 days)

Unit code 5001 5002 5004 5005 5006 5003 5007 5008 5011

Unit title

Credit value 6 7 7 6 10 9 9 9 7

Per Unit Fee BD 200 BD 200 BD 200 BD 200 BD 250 BD 250 BD 250 BD 250 BD 200

Personal and professional development Information based decision making Resource Management Meeting stakeholder and quality needs Conducting a management project Performance management Financial control Marketing planning Managing recruitment and selection

Candidates must complete their chosen qualification within 3 years of registration Fee Structure: There is a one-off registration charge of BD 90 payable upon registration of the first unit which includes CMI membership, tuition, materials and assessments. Units are charged on a per unit basis as shown above. Candidates who register and pay upfront for the Diploma are entitled to a discounted fee of BD 1,900. To find out more details about the latest CMI qualifications, please visit our website: www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 17815555 / 17815579 or 17815510.
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

338

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Edexcel Level 3 Certificate in Management & Business Administration qualifications Edexcel, a Pearson company, is the UKs largest awarding body offering academic and vocational qualifications and testing to schools, colleges, employers and other places of learning in the UK and internationally Edexcel operates over 110 countries to provide more than 4 million learnerswith globally respected and recognized qualifications annually. These institutions and organisationsare dedicated to delivering qualifications Edexcel qualifications are constantly update & in-line with the industry and learners need, customised training suites aimed at bridging skill gaps and up skilling individuals. A BTEC is a work-related qualification, exclusive to Edexcel, which is designed to provide learners with the skills, knowledge and behaviours they need in an increasingly competitive global workplace. As such, all BTEC qualifications are based on providing learners with employability skills and transferable skills such as: problem solving skills; the ability to plan and schedule work; the ability to work as part of a team; and the ability to multi-task on different projects. All BTECs combine a certain number of Guided Learning Hours (GLH) along with independent study in order to give learners the freedom to work at their own pace while benefiting from tutor supervised sessions. The level 3 qualifications are at an equivalent level to NVQ/SVQ level 3 of the UK. Objectives The Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Management & Business Administration is designed to provide: A framework of education and training for those with a responsibility to provide first-line management An opportunities to achieve a nationally recognised Level 3 vocationally-specific qualification An opportunities for full-time learners to gain a nationally recognised vocationally-specific qualification to enter employment in management or progress to further vocational qualifications such as the BTEC National Certificate in Business and Management, an NVQ level 3 in Management or a Level 4 BTEC Advanced Award/Certificate/Diploma in Management, a Level 4 NVQ in Management or a Level 4 BTEC HNC/D in Business (Management) The knowledge, understanding and skills learners need to carry out effective management An opportunity for learners to focus on the development of the major key skills and the wider key skills in a management context, such as improving own learning and performance, working with others and problem solving An opportunity for learners to develop a range of skills and techniques, personal qualities and attributes essential for successful performance in working life. The Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Management & Business Administration relates to National Occupational Standards in Management and Leadership. Fee structure: 2011 Total fees: BTEC Certificate in Management BTEC Certificate in Business Administration

BD1800 /BD1800 /-

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

339

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Important Note: 1. Participants who completed Standalone Unit Certificate & registering for the certificate programme are eligible for a fee reduction to the extent of the guided hours fees of the Standalone Unit Certificate. 2. Participants registering for the certificate may be given the option of paying unit wise fees. They have to indicate at the time of registration that they are opting for the full certificate in management The fees at the time of registration will be BD 400/- [i.e. fees for the first unit - 3 credits = BD 300/- + BD 100/- for book cost. Then onwards unit wise fees will be charged. 3. Full certificate in Business Administration The fees at the time of registration will be BD 800/- [i.e. fees for the first unit - 14 credits = BD 700/- + BD 100/- for book cost. Then onwards unit wise fees will be charged. The Edexcel Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Management The Edexcel Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Management is a 180-hour qualification consisting of six units of 30 hours each. To achieve the whole qualification, a learner must successfully complete three core units and three specialist units from the choice. Core units for BTEC Certificate in Management Unit code IOP Unit title Credit value Guided learning hours Standalone Unit Certificate Fees BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/

Improving Own Performance 3 30 Improving the Workplace IWE 3 30 Environment Developing Effective Working DEWR 3 30 Relationships Specialist units for Certificate: Minimum of 9 credits (three units) from optional units for Certificate Unit code DOW LAT DCS RSS ADS IIP SCI PQW CEW Unit title Delegating and Organizing Work Leading a Team Delivering Customer Service Recruiting and Selecting Staff Appraising and Developing Staff Improving Individual Performance Supporting Change Initiatives Promoting Quality in the Workplace Communicating Effectively in the Workplace Credit value 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Guided learning hours 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

Standalone Unit Certificate Fees BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/BD 300/-

1 credit = 10 guided hours = BD 100/-

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

340

Continued.... Day Time Professional Qualification Offerings Centre for Leadership & Management
Edexcel Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Business Administration The Edexcel Level 3 BTEC Certificate in Business Administration is a 320hour qualification consisting of two mandatory units. Unit 1 consists of 140 guided learning hours, and Unit 2 consists of 180 guided learning hours. Unit code SBE MWBE Unit title Credit value 14 18 Guided learning hours 140 180 Standalone Unit Certificate Fees BD 800/BD 1000/-

Supporting the Business Environment Managing Work in a Business Environment

1 credit = 10 guided hours = BD 50/To find out more details about the latest Edexcel Level 3 BTEC qualifications, please visit the following sites: www.bibf.com http://www.edexcel.com/quals/btec-sc/business/lvl3/Management/Pages/default.aspx http://www.edexcel.com/quals/btec-sc/business/lvl3/bus-admin/Pages/default.aspx

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR LEADERSHIP & MANAGEMENT

NO

COURSE TITLE

Duration

CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

MANAGEMENT / LEADERSHIP 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 3 2 2 2 2 520 526 541 564E 564A 552 548 9-12 545 593 16-19 12-15 4-7 16-19 19-22 11-14 22-25 24-26 11-13 27-29 29-30 28-29 25-26 25-26 20-21 17-18 8-9 22-23 26-27 18-19 11-12 9-10 15-16 15-16 10-11 8-9 29-30 27-28 24-25 15-16 26-27 571 568 20-22 17-19 3-5 9-12 21-24 10-13 9-12 6-9 10-13 1-4 16-19 15-18 7-9 23-24 21-22 18-19 9-10 3-4 11-12 19-20 28-29 19-20 563A 26-28 563E 27-29 553 20-22 22-24 1-3 519 509 29-30 24-26 12-14 25-27 15-17 15-17 24-26 18-20 2-4 16-18 9-11 27-29 1-4 4-7 2-5 2-5 508 13-15 504A 6-8 7-9 11-12 4-6 504E 25-27 3-5 502 22-24 21-23 10-12 12-14 16-18 14-16 4-6

Effective Supervisory Skills

The Professional Manager

The Professional Manager (Arabic)

Managing Change in Organizations

Managing Quality

High Impact Leadership

Coaching Techniques

Building High Performance Teams

Building High Performance Teams (Arabic)

10

Train the Trainer

11

Strategic Business Planning

BIBF CLOSED

12

Organisational Behavior

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

13

Business Correspondence

14

Business Report Writing

15

Professional Presentation Skills

INTERPERSONAL SKILLS

16

Managing People Problems

17

Effective Time Management

18

Communication Skills

19

Stress Management

341

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

20

Stress Management (Arabic)

18-19

342

NO 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 594 592 591 4-6 29-30 590 569 7-9 1-3 555 513 12-14 29-31 25-27 16-18 6-8 596 586 583A 15-17 15-17 16-18 583E 22-23 17-18 582 581 19-20 27-28 580 524A 13-15 3-5 8-10 524E 10-12 7-9 18-20 17-19 13-15 17-19 3-5 595 15-16 23-25 4-6 18-20 585A 585E 13-14 21-22 567 15-16 4-5 23-24 7-8 556A 4-5 556E 11-12 6-7 3-4

COURSE TITLE

Duration

CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

21

Emotional Intelligence

22

Emotional Intelligence (Arabic)

23

Negotiation Skills

24

Influencing Behaviour

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

25

Influencing Behaviour (Arabic)

26

Business Etiquette

MARKETING & SALES 2-4

27

Winning with Customer Service

28

Winning with Customer Service (Arabic)

29

Marketing Management

30

Successful Selling Techniques

31

Public Relations

BIBF CLOSED

32

Marketing Communications

5-6

33

Marketing Communications (Arabic)

34

Relationship Marketing & CRM

35

Key Account Management

HUMAN RESOURCES

36

Effective Performance Appraisals

37

Recruitment & Selection

38

Talent and Retention Management

39

HR Planning Techniques

40

HR Management for Non-HR Managers

41

Employee Training & Development

42

Reward Management

345

Assessment and Development Centre

intro

Background Research demonstrates thatthat there is no substitute for objectively observing and systematically measuring how people actually perform on the ground. A well designed Assessment Centre is the most effective tool available for assessing individuals in both individual and group based environments for selection or development. We provide a complete range ofAssessment Centre design and delivery services, from competency matrix design through assessor training, exercise design and the provision of psychometric testing. In other words, we help businesses:

This section outlines some of the Assessment & Development services that we can offer to your organisation. These evolve around three main themes: Recruitment & Selection; Talent Development; Organisational Health & Functions. It is vital to emphasise that our services are extremely flexible and can be altered, to meet your requirements, as much as you wish. Recruitment & Selection Personality Assessments: SHLs Personality Questionnaire, commonly referred to as OPQ, is an established tool, well known in HR circles. The Occupational Personality Questionnaire measures aspects of behavior which cannot easily be identified by other techniques, such as CVs and interviews, yet are crucial to performance potential. The OPQ32 targets the competencies required by managers, graduates and experienced hires. It provides valuable information on an individuals behavior
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

346

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

against 32 personality characteristics. The OPQ32 dimensions are grouped into three areas: relationship with people, thinking styles, and feelings and emotions. The OPQ is available in both languages Arabic and English and will be delivered online. Upon completion of the questionnaire the any of the following reports can be generated: Manager Report- for recruitment: This is a brief narrative report, intended to be used as a basis for providing written feedback to line managers It contains the same narrative text as the User Report, but without technical OPQ information, such as the profile chart or graphical scale. This report provides managers with information regarding the best way to handle the candidate who completed the questionnaire. Universal Competency Framework Report-for recruitment The report is based on the Universal Competency Framework, a single overarching framework for defining competencies for all jobs, at all levels, in all industries, across all countries. The Universal Competency Report acknowledges a line managers need for concise, accurate and relevant information and provides an insight into an individuals potential to perform across 20 critical job competencies.In addition to the Report you can request an interview guide to help you ask the right questions and hire the right people. The Development Action Planner-for development The UCF Development Action Planner report builds a profile of an employees personal style and aptitude in a work environment. The report uses the SHL Universal Competency Framework (UCF) to generate an accurate measure of their strengths and weaknesses as they relate to their potential performance at work. It also provides the employee and their line manager with development tips and shows improvement opportunities. Team Impact report- Team development: This report assesses the preferred role and competencies that a candidate could play within a team according to SHL project completion cycle. Each project, in order to complete requires different sort of individuals that can effectively perform specific functions within each stage. From the report, it can be determined whether all stages and functions are covered within a team or not.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

347

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

Ability Tests: Administrative Skills: Verbal Usage: This test measures vocabulary, spelling and the grammatical skills essential in the drafting and processing of basic work correspondence. It takes 10 minutes exactly to complete and consists of 30 questions. Numerical Usage: This test measures basic number skills. The emphasis is on straightforward calculation and the understanding of arithmetical operations. It takes 7 minutes exactly to complete and consists of 30 questions. Clerical Checking: measures candidate accuracy and speed in checking information and data entry. Consists of 40 questions and takes 7 minutes exactly. Critical Reasoning Tests: Verbal reasoning: This test assesses the ability to understand and interpret the logical reasoning of various arguments based on short reading passages. It is consisted of 30 multiple-choices questions and takes 20 minutes exactly to complete. Numerical reasoning: This test assesses the ability to understand tables and interpret data based on statistical information presented. It is consisted of 18 multiple-choice questions and takes 20 minutes exactly to complete. Diagrammatical reasoning: This test assesses the ability to understand diagrams and interpret logical sequences based on ambiguous shapes and figures. It is consisted of 40 multiple-choice questions and takes 20 minutes exactly to complete. Management & Graduates Item Bank: The Management and Graduate Item Bank is used in the selection of graduates over a wide range of industries and in the selection, development and promotion of work experienced managers and professional staff across all functions. The range of parallel forms is particularly valuable to those operating in the graduate recruitment field. Four parallel versions are available for each test, to allow use on different occasions and to prevent over-use of a particular test. Verbal Reasoning (VMG6): Measures the ability to evaluate
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

348

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

the logic of various kinds of argument. The task is to decide whether a statement made in connection with given information is true or untrue, or whether there is insufficient information to judge. Consists of 32 questions and takes 18 minutes exactly to complete. Numerical Reasoning (NMG6): Measures the ability to make correct decisions or inferences from numerical data. The tasks set and data presented are highly relevant to a range of management level jobs. Calculators allowed. The test consists of 20 questions and takes 20 minutes exactly to complete. Scores generated for each candidate will include a norm based score (e.g. better than 60% of the comparison group) as well as level of accuracy and speed for each test. Computer Skills: This suit of computer based tests is designed to measure individuals skills in using Microsoft Office Word, Access, Excel, PowerPoint and Outlook program. These tests are suitable to be used to select candidates for jobs that require good knowledge in using computers, such as admin staff. MS Word core and expert MS Access core and expert MS Excel core and expert MS PowerPoint core and expert MS Outlook core Competency Based Interviewing: Competency based interviews are behavioural interviews including questions that ask candidates to demonstrate that they have a particular skill or a key competency the firm is looking for. Candidates will be asked to do this, using situational examples from their life experiences, to illustrate their personality, skill set and individual competencies to the interviewer. The interview usually takes 45 minutes depending on the number of competencies incorporated, which usually does not exceed four competencies. Development English Language Tests: English Proficiency: The Oxford Online Placement Test is an adaptive computer-based test of English language proficiency. The test takes approximately 45
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

349

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

minutes to complete, during which the student answers multiplechoice questions. Depending on the answers the student gives, the level of the test adapts to the ability of the student. Areas assessed are: vocabulary, grammar, reading and listening. Writing Skills: We design English writing tests that are aimed to measure the candidates skills in terms of cohesion, content, structure and use of English (vocabulary and grammar). The topics are varied and selected to match the purpose of the assessment. For example, the tests could ask the candidate to write a letter for administrative jobs recruitment or differences between conventional and Islamic banks for compliance officer. Essays are then marked by an English language specialist. Group Exercises: In group exercises a number of candidates are asked to work together in order to complete a particular task. The set of competencies assessed can change depending on the exercise and the client request. Each candidate is observed and assessed throughout the exercise by a trained assessor. A range of group exercises are available under the following categories: strategic, operational, customer contact and tactical. In-Trays: Candidates are given a file of papers providing information about issues that need to be addressed. Tasks include sorting and organising this information, prioritizing the different issues, making decisions and writing reports. A range of exercises are available under the following categories: strategic, operational, customer contact and tactical. Development Focused Feedback Session: During the feedback session, the candidates will receive feedback about their performance in the assessment- especially their personality profile and report. The purpose of the session would be to give them feedback about their potential areas of strength as well as development and propose some individual development plans for them to consider for the future. The session will take 45 minutes one hour per candidate and will be delivered by a specialized consultant.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

350

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

Coaching Coaching is ultimately an act of human recourse development. It is the first step in improving performance, which include raising awareness about strengths and areas for development, exploring fresh prospective and solutions to different issues, improving relationships and communication, as well as reducing stress, empowering employees and building confidence. Coaching is a great approach to develop leadership skills, creativity and encourage individuals to think outside the box. Organisational Health & Functions: Measuring Corporate Culture: A special workshop can be designed to evaluate the way by which employees perceive the corporate culture in relation to four main domains: Performance, Human Resources, Decision Making and Relationships. Each domain is further analysed into specific scales or dimensions. The workshop can be stretched to include group discussions and recommendations related to the corporate culture. This workshop can either be conducted by itself or incorporated into Team Building programme. Team Building: Team building exercises consist of a variety of tasks designed to develop group members and their ability to work together effectively. There are many types of team building activities that range from kids games to games that involve novel complex tasks and are designed for specific needs. There are also more complex team building exercises that are composed of multiple exercises such as ropes courses, corporate drumming and exercises that last over several days. The purpose of team building exercises is to assist teams in becoming cohesive units of individuals that can effectively work together to complete tasks. Objectives: Improving communication Breaking the ice between colleagues Motivating a team Getting to know each other Getting everyone onto the same page, including goal setting Teaching the team self-regulation strategies Helping participants to learn more about themselves (strengths and weaknesses) Identifying and utilising the strengths of team members
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

351

Confinued.... Assessment and Development Centre

Improving team productivity Practicing effective collaboration with team members

The agenda of the day can be adjusted according to the requirements of each client. In fact, business focused sessions can be added in the afternoon if requested. Customised Tests & Case studies: We can create a customised test or case study using our team of specialised experts to meet your specific needs. Those could vary from writing exercises in a special field such as HR, Finance, IT or Sales to more complex case studies. We can also provide the required assessment in either Arabic or English. We have provided for some of our clients typing, translation and letter writing skills for various positions.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

352

INDEX

Category Assessment & Development

Course Title Occupational Testing (OT)- Level A Occupational Personality Questionnaire (OPQ)- Level B Competency Based Interviewing (CBI)

Page 353 355 356 357 360 361 362

Code AD1 AD2 AD3

English Language

International Diploma in Business English International Certificate in Financial English IELTS Preparatory Course

Arabic Language

Arabic For Expats

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

353

COURSE #: AD1

Occupational Testing (OT) - Level A

Training courses

Description This is an SHL qualification course for using ability and aptitude tests and is recognised by the British Psychological Society (BPS), which is the representative body for psychology and psychologists in the UK. By becoming Level A qualified, delegates will gain a sound understanding of the underlying principles and uses of ability and reasoning tests. The course enables delegates to examine a wide range of tests, evaluate, select, administer and score ability tests appropriate to their organisation and feedback test results. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Gain an appreciation of a wide range of ability tests Evaluate and select appropriate ability tests for use in your own organisation Administer, score and interpret assessment methods in a standardised way Feedback results face to face and in writing Become a registered SHL qualified user and have eligibility for BPS Level A Content Highlights The different types of tests Tests standardisation and the norming systems Correlation Reliability and validity Tests utility Tests ethics and fair selection Target Audience This course is targeted at HR specialists, training specialists, line managers and employees who are engaged in the assessment and development processes of individuals Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other English language competence to completion of High
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

354

continued.... Occupational Testing (OT) - Level A

School education with English language taught Complete online pre-course assignment Course Structure Course structure, outline and materials are provided by SHL Training Academy from the UK. This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning. In order to gain the qualification, participants will need to pass a written feedback assessment report, a practical test administration session and the end of course test. The course requires attendees to complete an online pre-course assignment. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 days - from 8.00 am to 5.00 pm 8-10 May BIBF Staff- Accredited SHL Associate Trainer

Fees: Member and Non-Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD750

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

355

COURSE #: AD 2

Occupational Personality Questionnaire (OPQ) - Level B

Description This is an SHL qualification course for using personality and motivational assessments and is recognised by the British Psychological Society (BPS), which is the representative body for psychology and psychologists in the UK. By becoming Level B qualified, delegates will gain a critical appreciation of personality theories and assessment methods. The course covers the use of personality questionnaires, specifically the OPQ, enabling delegates to become proficient in administering, interpreting and feeding back the results of the questionnaires studied. A core focus is on how to relate the OPQ to competencies. Objectives Upon the completion of this course, the participant will be able to: Administer, interpret and feedback the OPQ, including report writing Understand how to introduce and apply the OPQ in different situations Relate the OPQ to competencies Gain familiarity with the different versions of the OPQ family Qualify to register as a user of the OPQ Become eligible for BPS Intermediate Level B qualification Qualify to register as a user of the MQ Content Highlights Introduction of the OPQ Social desirability and response bias OPQ feedback Reliability and validity OPQ & selection OPQ & development Motivational questionnaire Group Differences Target Audience This course is targeted at HR specialists, training specialists, line managers and employees who are engaged in the assessment and development processes of individuals Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated

BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course. Minimum Prerequisites - Other Level A qualification is required Complete online pre-course assignment Course Structure Course structure, outline and materials are provided by SHL Training Academy from the UK. This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group discussion/ exercises; case studies; role-play activities; and video-based learning. In order to gain the qualification, participants will need to pass a written feedback assessment report, a practical feedback session, end of course test and the course followup assignment. The course requires attendees to complete an online pre-course assignment. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 3 days - from 8.00 am to 5.00 pm 12-14 Jun BIBF Staff- Accredited SHL Associate Trainer

Fees: Member and Non-Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD750

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

356

COURSE #: AD3

Competency Based Interviewing Course (CBI)

Description This course gives a highly practical insight into competency based interview techniques that are proven to improve appointment success rates. During the programme, delegates will come to understand the concept of competencies; practice competency based interviews and learns to objectively evaluate interview evidence. Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will: Use competencies to structure interviews Appreciate the strengths and limitations of different interview approaches Conduct structured and comprehensive competency based interviews Systematically evaluate and use information from competency based interviews Identify and overcome the obstacles to fair and objective assessment when interviewing Content Highlights Interviews as a method of selection Core CBI Skills Practical interviews Evaluating candidates Target Audience The program is suitable for HR specialists, line managers and senior executives who are likely to be involved in the final stages of the selection process and are keen to practice and harness the power of competency based interviewing. Prerequisites Pre-requisite knowledge for the course may be obtained through prior certified learning or experiential learning at the workplace. Please consult with your line manager, training manager or equivalent for ensuring conformity to BIBF prerequisites in courses. Candidates are responsible for ensuring that they meet the pre-requisites before registering in courses. Where the knowledge has been obtained other than through the stated BIBF course, BIBF may require candidates to take and pass a pre-course assessment in order to be admitted to the course.

Minimum Prerequisites - Other Refer to target audience above Complete online pre-course assignment Course Structure Course structure, outline and materials are provided by SHL Training Academy from the UK. This course will use interactive training methods of a combination of lecturing; group exercises; role-play activities; and video-based learning. The course requires attendees to complete an online pre-course assignment. Course Facts Duration : Dates : Lecturers : 1 day - from 8.00 am to 5.00 pm 11 Jul BIBF Staff- Accredited SHL Associate Trainer

Fees: Member and Non-Member Organisations All Nationalities : BD300

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

357

International Diploma in Business English - (IDBE)

BIBF offers Business English Programmes, which test proficiency of communication in English for international business needs. The BIBF IDBE courses prepare successful students to sit the BIBF International Diploma in Business English Examinations. The BIBF International Diploma in Business English examines reading, writing and listening in business-related situations and covers four levels of competence: IDBE 1 (Elementary), IDBE 2 (Pre-intermediate), IDBE 3 (Intermediate) and IDBE 4 (Upper-intermediate). IDBE 4 is a core component of the BIBF Banking Studies Diploma Programme. Each Level is a total of 60 hours Sessions are 3 hours Sessions are held two days a week Days are determined based on demand Fees are BD 335/- for each level

career prospects Exchange information and give opinions on familiar business related topics Read and comprehend different business-based texts Write business messages using the appropriate business vocabulary Compose short formal business correspondence in the accepted formats, on a variety of topics in different sectors of business Plan, prepare and demonstrate a short presentation mostly related to business using appropriate business vocabulary

Stage 3 = 60 Hours On completion of this Stage, participants will be able to: USE BUSINESS ENGLISH AT AN INTERMEDIATE LEVEL TO: Participate in discussions, develop negotiation skills & exchange views on modern day issues Conduct meetings, discuss improvements & make suggestions related to business matters that are current in todays industry Read, comprehend & analyse a wide variety of texts on business related topics Plan the structure and choose effective techniques for making short presentations in the workplace Compose formal business correspondence in the accepted formats, on a variety of topics in different sectors of business Examine descriptions of predicting trends in todays economy Plan, prepare and demonstrate a short presentation using appropriate business vocabulary Stage 4 = 60 Hours Upon successful completion of this course Students will be able to: USE BUSINESS ENGLISH AT AN UPPER INTERMEDIATE LEVEL TO: Comprehend and associate in different business theories Compare facts and discriminate between ideas and support opinion regarding a business matter Select, order, group, judge and contrast facts related to a business theme Discuss, support and conclude on certain business topics
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

The BIBF International Diploma in Business English (IDBE) examinations are practical examinations that focus on the application of language in dealing with real-world business situations. There are four IDBE levels; at each level there are reading, speaking, writing and listening skills. Stage 1 = 60 Hours On completion of this Stage, participants will be able to: USE SIMPLE BUSINESS ENGLISH TO: Discuss daily routines in Business contexts Summarise simple telephone messages Practice making arrangements, excuses and giving directions verbally and by e-mail Demonstrate simple business - based dialogues Explain and solve simple business problems Compose short business e-mails Express opinion and practice agreeing and disagreeing techniques regarding business matters Read and comprehend different business-based texts Plan, prepare and demonstrate a short presentation on a business related topic Stage 2 = 60 Hours On completion of this Stage, participants will be able to: USE BUSINESS ENGLISH AT A PREINTERMEDIATE LEVEL TO: Discuss solutions to different business related problems they might face at work Speak/discuss and share ideas about their

358

continued.... International Diploma in Business English - (IDBE)

Create, design and demonstrate advertisements of products Communicate with others using phrases of request and offer Recommend certain products to customers Judge and explain a situation through a formal letter to a client Compose different types of formal and semi formal business correspondence Plan, prepare and demonstrate a short presentation using advanced business English vocabulary

BIBF offers the International Diploma in Business English (IDBE) 3 times a year, January March / April June / September December 2012. To find out more details about IDBE, please visit our website: www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 17815555 / 17815579 or 178155603 / 17815526 Schedule for Assessment Dates and Timings Placement tests take place at 9:00 am & 11:00 am and take approximately 1 hour to complete. Participants should call Mrs. Sameera Al Khal at BIBF (1781 5526) to book a seat. Charges: BD10 PAYABLE BEFORE ENTRY PLEASE No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Assessment Dates for 2012 Thursday 5 January Thursday 19 January Thursday 2 February Thursday 16 February Thursday 23 February Thursday 1 March Thursday 15 March Thursday 29 March Thursday 5 April Thursday 19 April Thursday 3 May Thursday 17 May Thursday 31 May Thursday 14 June Thursday 28 June Thursday 5 July Thursday 19 July Thursday 26 July Thursday 6 September Thursday 13 September Thursday 27 September Thursday 4 October Thursday 18 October Thursday 1 November Thursday 15 November

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

359

continued.... International Diploma in Business English - (IDBE)

26. 27. 28. 29.

Thursday 29 November Thursday 6 December Thursday 13 December Thursday - 27 December

Scheduled Terms for 2012: (20 sessions-3-hours per session 60 hours)

TERM Term One Term Two Term Three


NOTE:

SESSION START & END DATES 15 January 27 March 2012 15 April 26 June 2012 16 September 2 December 2012

EXAMINATIONS ARE THE WEEK AFTER SESSIONS END. SOME EXTRA SESSIONS WILL BE ADDED IF REQUIRED. REGISTRATION FOR EACH COURSE CLOSES FIVE WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO THE COURSE START DATE.

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

360

International Certificate in Financial English - (ICFE)

INTERNATIONAL CERTIFICATE IN FINANCIAL ENGLISH - (ICFE) ICFE is an examination that has been developed jointly by Cambridge ESOL and ACCA (Association of Certified Chartered Accountants) in response to a perceived need for a formal English language qualification for professionals working in the finance and accounting fields. ICFE is an intermediate / upper intermediate level exam, approximating in the Cambridge ESOL suite of exams to First Certificate / Cambridge Advanced or IELTS 5.5 6.5. It is also equivalent to the Common European Framework of Reference Levels B2 / C1. ICFE is a blended learning course comprising 50 hours online study, and 50 hours face to face tuition. The course content covers a wide range of topics relevant to the fields of finance and accounting. Content Highlights Financial Reporting Company Financial Strategy Risk Assessment and Analysis Auditing Ethics and Professionalism Accounting Software Packages Assets and Company Valuations Budgetary Processes Corporate Governance Cost and Management Accounting Environmental and Sustainability Issues. Mergers and Acquisitions Taxation (non-jurisdiction specific) Raising Capital Insurance Banking Investment Banking Professional Practice The Stock Market Foreign Exchange and Currency Debt-Recovery and Credit Policy Bankruptcy and Insolvency Forensic Accounting Economic Conditions and Forecasts Pricing and Purchasing

Objectives Upon completion of this course, participants will: Build financial vocabulary Explain the basic concepts of most areas of finance Develop comprehension of financial texts Read and understand finance and accountingrelated texts Develop listening and speaking skills on finance and accounting-related topics. Construct written texts covering a range of finance and accounting related topics Identify and interpret the context of finance and accounting. Demonstrate a range of oral skills: interactional, social, transactional, negotiation and collaboration. On completion of the preparation course, candidates can sit for the examination at the British Council, Manama. Candidates will be examined in all four language skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing. Alternatively, it can be taken as a standalone unit of Financial and Accounting English. BIBF offers the (ICFE) starting from January March / April June / September December 2012. The frequency with which BIBF will offer ICFE will be decided by demand. To find out more details about ICFE, please visit our website: www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 17815555 / 17815579 or 178155603 / 17815526

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

361

International English Language Tests Preparatory Programme - (IELTS)

IELTS is an internationally recognised English language examination. It is widely acknowledged to be one of the most reliable English language testing instruments available. It is used to assess learners English language competence for many purposes, including education (Academic IELTS), immigration and the workplace (General IELTS). IELTS is accepted by many universities and employers worldwide. IELTS is run by the University of Cambridge ESOL (English for Speakers of Other Languages), the British Council and IDP in Australia. Candidates are tested in all four language skills; reading, writing, listening and speaking. According to their performance, they are allocated a band score on a scale of one (non-user) to nine (expert user). IELTS examinations are run three or four times a month by the British Council, Manama. Candidates may sit for the examination as many times as they wish. For further information on IELTS, please visit: http://www.ielts.org BIBF Academic IELTS Preparatory Programme is intended to assess candidates who wish to undertake graduate or undergraduate studies in an English medium environment or work where English is the language of communication.

Prospective students should demonstrate that they have the requisite language skills to benefit from the programme by providing proof of their English language level, or they should take a placement test at the BIBF Assessment Centre. Students will be expected to score for Level 4 of the International Diploma in Business English (IDBE) or equivalence in order to enroll for IELTS. BIBF ensures thorough preparation in all aspects of the exam. Programme is of 40 hours duration Sessions are held two days a week by trained/qualified staff. Sessions are 2 hours each The programme fee is BD 200 (Course book not inclusive). BIBF offers the International English Language Tests Preparatory Programme (IELTS) 3 times a year, January-March / April - June September December 2012 based on demand. To find out more details about IELTS, please visit our website: www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 17815555 / 17815579 or 178155603 / 17815526

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

362

Arabic for Expats

BIBF offers courses in Arabic as a Foreign Language starting at Beginners Level with a progression to the Intermediate and Advanced Level. Within each level there are three key stages. The BIBF Arabic courses goal is to get you speaking the target language quickly. The Arabic programme will enable participants to communicate fluently in the intended language focusing mainly on speaking as the most essential skill in learning any language along with the other language skills necessary. It will allow you to learn vocabulary and grammar as they occur in the proper context - while using only the target language in both the receptive and productive skills. Throughout the courses, participants will gain: A deeper understanding of the region, its culture and its people Enrich their stay in the region by having the ability to communicate effectively with all sections of the society Build a foundation of fundamental vocabulary and essential language structure Develop the Arabic language skills to enjoy social interactions Learn to share their ideas and opinions in Arabic Starting date : September June 2012: First intake in September 2012, all participants will start at Level 1.1 proceeded by progression. Each level is a total of 180 hours (60 hours each stage). Sessions are 3 hours from 6:00 pm 9:00 pm. Sessions are held 2 days a week. Days are determined based on demand (Monday Wednesday OR Sunday Tuesday). FEES Beginners Level BD 330 per stage (Books Inclusive). Intermediate Level BD 350 per stage (Books Inclusive). Advanced Level BD 350 per stage (Books Inclusive). Arabic Course Profile Beginners Level-1 (Stages 1.1, 1.2 , 1.3 = 180 Hours) On completion of this level, participants will be able to: Use the Arabic alphabet and sound systems Be able to distinguish and pronounce Arabic sounds Write accurately from dictation
2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Read simple texts Initiate social interaction, ask for basic information, and be aware of basic cultural aspects of social interaction Talk about themselves and matters of personal concern with any native speaker of Arabic Comprehend simple written texts on familiar topics Comprehend simple audio/video texts on familiar topics Compose simple paragraphs Recognise some of the differences between formal and spoken Arabic Introduce himself and others and talk about his family, jobs and address Use verbs in the present tense to describe actions Use the singular tense and figures

Intermediate Level-2 (Stages 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 = 180 Hours) On completion of this level, participants will be able to: Write accurately from dictation Talk about work and social topics with some confidence and fluency Comprehend simple written texts on common topics Comprehend simple audio/video texts on common topics Compose simple paragraphs about themselves Gain a deeper understanding of the differences between formal and spoken Arabic Talk about colours, date and time Use the plural tense Advanced Level-3 (Stages 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 = 180 Hours) On completion of this level, participants will be able to: Understand the main points of clear, standard speech on everyday matters and the main points of short, clear radio or TV programmes Read and understand texts that use high frequency, everyday or job-related language Comprehend audio/video texts on everyday topics Take part confidently and fluently in conversations on everyday topics Express, in brief oral exchanges, an opinion or ambition Write simple, connected texts on topics of personal interest Use the past tense in description To find out more details about Arabic for Expats, please visit our website: www.bibf.com or call BIBF infodesk on 1781 5555 / 1781 5579 or 1781 5563 / 1781 5526

363

COURSE CALENDAR 2012 CENTRE FOR ASSESSMENT & DEVELOPMENT

NO 3 3 1 AD3 11 AD2 12-14 AD1 8-10 BIBF CLOSED

COURSE TITLE

Duration

CODE

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

Occupational Testing (OT) -Level A

Occupational Personality Questionnaire (OPQ) -Level B

Competency Based Interviewing (CBI)

* Levels A & B courses are accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS) All Assessment and Development courses above are FEE PAYING over and above the levy. Please contact infodesk@bibf.com for more information

363

2012 Training and Development Catalogue

Bahrain Institute of Banking and Finance PO Box 20525, Manama Kingdom of Bahrain Tel: +973 17 815 555 Fax: +973 17 729 928 Email: infodesk@bibf.com www.bibf.com

.. + : + :

Registration Form (Organisation Sponsored)

Form to be lled out in CAPITAL letters please *Name of Course *Course Code Member Non-Member *Date of Course

*Mandatory elds to be lled

*Organisation Information Contact Person :

Mr/Mrs/Ms Position Address Organisation Of ce Tel

First Name

Middle Name Department

Last Name

Country Fax Email

Signature & Stamp

Date

Name of the Participant

1
Position

Mr/Mrs/Ms

First Name

Middle Name Department

Last Name

*Nationality *Email (Personal)

*CPR

*Mobile Email (Work)

Of ce Tel

Name of the Participant

2
Position

Mr/Mrs/Ms

First Name

Middle Name Department

Last Name

*Nationality *Email (Personal)

*CPR

*Mobile Email (Work)

Of ce Tel

Name of the Participant

3
Position

Mr/Mrs/Ms

First Name

Middle Name Department

Last Name

*Nationality *Email (Personal)

*CPR

*Mobile Email (Work)

Of ce Tel

Methods of Payment Cheque Please nd enclosed a cheque for or Credit card Please debit my credit card Card No. Cardholders Name Cash Expiry Date Signature Visa made payable to BIBF. Mastercard

FOR OFFICE ONLY


INFORMATION DESK

Receipt Number Comments Information Desk Attendant Signature REGISTRATION OFFICE Student ID Comments Registered By

Amount

Date

Date

Bahrain Institute of Banking and Finance PO Box 20525, Manama Kingdom of Bahrain Tel: +973 17 815 555 Fax: +973 17 729 928 Email: infodesk@bibf.com www.bibf.com

.. + : + :

Registration Form (Self Sponsored)


Form to be lled out in CAPITAL letters please *Name of Course *Course Code *Date of Course *Mandatory elds to be lled

*Name of Participant

Mr/Mrs/Ms Position Organisation *Address *Country *Mobile *Email (Personal) *Signature

First Name

Middle Name Department *Nationality

Last Name

*CPR

Of ce Tel Residence Tel Email (Work) Date Fax

Methods of Payment Cheque Please nd enclosed a cheque for or Credit card Please debit my credit card Card No. Cardholders Name Cash Expiry Date Signature Visa made payable to BIBF. Mastercard

FOR OFFICE ONLY


INFORMATION DESK

Receipt Number Comments Information Desk Attendant Signature REGISTRATION OFFICE Student ID Comments Registered By

Amount

Date

Date

www.bibf.com